Home

Manual - The DijonStock AW16G digital recording support forum

1. 50 7 7 VAY Wel ER 179 INPUT LIBRARY popup window 77 INPUT SEL key 17 INPUT SETTING popup window 34 77 Inputting text PRINT 25 internal effect 50 85 EE eege 85 SN LumdcinomU nnd 85 JOG ON key 20 71 L LATCH button E 166 LEARN Reif tel 166 Level meter 34 93 PHE POST buttons eoe 93 library ER 73 Basic operation accinevaccsecccaccedoccen ZA Channel Wbranm 79 BI E 9 DaT E if Dynamics library 57 78 Effect STAN NITE 78 EQ library RET EET 56 77 PUIG MOY EO EE f Mastering library 78 MURS e Le PEN TT 76 Recall eese 15 Sample library 78 STONN EE 74 Terminologie 16 LIBRARY button 50 LISTEN button 72 Loading a SOM BE 64 Locate pomte 68 POCONO EE 65 A B DOU EE 65 Adjusting the position 68 mire bm 69 Lee RNC PROCURE 66 In OUt POM enisinia 65 Beete E 68 LOCATOR button 68 Locator point marker display area 68 marker eese 67 MARKER button 68 POSITION E 68 Relative zero point 65 Start end point ees 65 LOCATOR button o eiui ie acine 68 Locator point marker display area enen
2. E ELEVA Ee T REC v RAN SIG Auto punch in out Auto punch in out is a function that performs the punch in and punch out operations automatically In order to use this function you must first specify the punch in location the In point and the punch out location the Out point Access the DIRECT page of the RECORD screen and make sure that your instru ment mic is assigned to the track on which you want to punch in bb IR A be The recording source INPUT SEL key and the recording destination TRACK SEL key will blink red AW1600 Owner s Manual 59 lt D CL c o ca 2 X 60 Punch in out 2 Locate to the point at which you want to punch in 3 In the Locate section hold down the SET key and press the IN key The current location will be registered as the In point 4 Locate to the point at which you want to punch out 5 In the Locate section hold down the SET key and press the OUT key The current location will be registered as the Out point ES e If you want to set the In and Out points more precisely you can use the Nudge function gt p 71 which repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location or use the WAVE DISPLAY popup window gt p 72 which lets you view the contents of the track as a waveform e The In point and Out point will be updated each time you record The location at which you last started r
3. master opu Input Track channels channels a ae eee SE neen bus 8 In the Selected Channel section repeatedly press the PAN BAL knob to access the PAN page of the PAN screen and spread The effect sound will be heard in stereo If desired you can specify input channels 3 4 as a pair NOTE e If you use these settings leave the AUX 1 knob and AUX 2 knob of input channels 3 4 set all the way to the left dB If you raise these levels the signal will loop creating oscillation C a 2 Q E 2 D Z O O O t 2 D gt lt t D 2 D Q D O D o IMEUT z gg 00 00 00 000 2 1225 5 4 4 LI nm o e oo gege e J PHASE H HCH ACA ACOA ACA AOA H H ACA H FAM oe oi Qo GH eer Qo og i ee IB TEE TIHIMIHI MET B ex 5 B I BH FI F2 F3 FH ILA 176 ll AW1600 Owner s Manual apart the pan settings of input channels 3 4 channel es ee 3 4 Bee Mixer section Q Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion and while playing back the song adjust the input level of your external effect processor and use the GAIN knobs to adjust the input level of input channels 3 4 If desired return to step 5 and readjust the send level to AUX bus 1 for each track channel If you want to adjust the AUX bus 1 master level use the BUS page of the VIEW screen or the AUX OUT page of the PAN screen Let a DEDE 000 221ze 6 4 4 DOEI HETER
4. 132 MOVE 133 EXCHANGE so 134 TIME COMP EXP Time Compression Expansion 134 PITCH CHANGE 135 E de M 9 135 MERGE NR RR I NE o 135 Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files 136 Importing and Exporting Audio Data From and To a Computer 136 Exporting WAV files seessseeeeeeese 136 Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer 137 Importing WAV Files sess 139 Importing from the CD RW drive 140 13 Song management 143 POC UN SOMOS TNNT ar 143 Editing the song un GE 145 Editing various settings for the SONG 146 Copying or deleting a song 147 Optimizing a SONG ssc 148 AW1600 Owner s Manual Creating a tempo map 149 Importing data from an existing song 151 Backing up songs and sample libraries 152 Restoring songs or sample libraries 154 Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations 155 14 MIDI and utility functions 157 What you can do using MIDI 157 Basi MIDI Settings EE 158 Setting MIDI messages sese 158 Using the MIDI Remote function 163 About the MIDI Remote funct
5. 145 folder organization 144 Importing data 151 EOIN E 64 management 143 UIA ZUG EE 148 aite 154 EIS e PRENDE A 63 tempo map eese 149 LET MUIMOIOG MOD ENT 16 SONG key onnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnennsnnnnnnenni 18 SORT EIO EE 28 Sound CMD MPH 14 33 Recording playing 35 SOUND CLIP Key sacacoatiiieveasvaaass 20 SOUND CLIP TIME 170 Specifications 220 Start end point 65 Stereo bus assign switch 34 OTEREO TAGS ER 19 STEREO SEL KEV enira 19 STEREO AUX OUT jack 21 STOP KOV Lauccsciacsestut iit S ciaeeeonts 21 STORE CONFIRM ON OFF button ctrnsseccwensmesexseecass 169 Switching a button on off 25 System data elle e BON NNNM NM 16 T Tempo map Tempo map event 47 terminology 16 Tempo map event 47 149 terminology sss 15 SIENTEN 16 CHIANG E 15 LOT AY NEP ERO EHE 16 Locate point marker 15 PAG VACK NE 16 AW1600 Owner s Manual Paired channels 16 Ser te dedu 15 Sample bank and sample 16 Scene and scene memory 16 lolo MR 16 System data 16 Tempo Map m 16 pir cm 19 TEST ADUDI o ceotetosie cete n eden
6. 2 Trigger Gate Selects one of the following two types of operation for when the pad is pressed XI Q c o Q O D x 9 2 O AW1600 Owner s Manual Il 123 GATE The sample will play only while you hold down the pad e TRIGGER The sample will play to the end when you press the pad once O E O 9 el e O o RV z o D ges 124 Using the Slice function Using the Slice function Slice is a function that divides a sample whose playback mode is set to Loop into eight to six teen segments and adjusts the timing of each segment so that it can be played at a different tempo without affecting the pitch Here s how you can use the Slice function to play a sampled phrase at the tempo of the current song e The Slice function always handles the playback region of the sample as one measure Before using the Slice function you must trim the playback region of the sample so that it is one measure long 1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section repeat edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR l Y keys to access the SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen SAMPLE ran enn nmn a 120 L 3 4 TET FAD EE HAME TRIM SLICE EFM b LIERARY E 1 ACORUH EAS OD Go zm CO DEI otEe bIEtEu C3 O zz Be TR WHE ACEG_RIFF2 GQ GO D IB Hau HFE ACCHORUS 3 D 77 30 MEMORY HOMITOR TEHFO ORIGINAL TR
7. P1 00 00 08 000 FIZE 00 00 08 000 im mm m AF K INSERT For an audio track Start D D iL INSERT D D D D D 4 D D 4 D b 4 D D D D D 4 D D 4 D D 4 t D Size For a pad track loop For a pad track one shot Start D D D D D 4 INSERT D 4 D b 4 D D D b D D D 4 D D 4 D D 4 b D Size E Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command However instead of 5 End use 5 Size to specify the region that will be inserted AW1600 Owner s Manual D E o D x O FE 131 List of editing commands For a pad track one shot COPY Copies the specified region of data to the specified loca F i tion of the specified track PAD From Start From End RV Q Q D 2 e DO H TI 00 00 08 000 00 00 24 000 K H 00 0 1 04 000 For an audio track Start End To Start iL COPY 5 For a pad track loop From Start From End NOTE D e If you set 1 From TR to other than ALL INS the copy destina tion track will be overwritten and the data that follows the copied region will not be moved backward If you set 1 From TR to ALL INS the copy destination track will be moved backward by the size of the copied region Note that this may cause the bar lines specified by the tempo map to change E Parameter list Param
8. 101 Methods of writing an audio CD 102 Basic settings for the CD RW drive 103 Writing audio data Track At Once 104 Writing audio data Disc At Once 106 Finalizing CD R RW media 108 Erasing CD RW media naaenennnneeenennerennrerrrreenenn 109 Playing an audio CD 110 11 Quick loop sampler 111 About the quick loop sampler 111 Using sample libraries 113 Recording playing a pad performance 114 Grid Recording Step Recording the Pads 116 Importing from an audio CD WAV file to a pad 117 Importing from an audio track stereo track to a pad 119 Importing From a Computer To the Pads 120 Editing the sample name 121 Trimming the playback region 122 Switching the playback mode for each pad 123 Using the Slice f llgtlOri icuioca oraret snas 124 Deleting an unwanted sample 126 12 Track editing 127 What you can do using editing commande 127 Basic procedure for track editing 128 List of editing commande esses 130 ERASE EE 130 EE cce 131 INSER EE 131 9
9. Out point o A key A point e B key B point es RTZ kd key Relative Zero point NOTE e If you want to change the Start point or End point use the SONG screen POINT page These points cannot be set by key operations e The In point and Out point will be updated automatically when you perform a recording operation 66 ll W1600 Owners Manual Using markers Markers are symbols that you assign at desired locations in a song so that you can move quickly to a desired point You can assign up to 99 markers in each song Use the I BI keys to find and move to markers 1 Move to the position in the song at which 3 Press the I key to locate to the previous you want to assign a marker marker or press the PI key to locate to You can assign a marker whether the song is playing the next marker or stopped MARK SEARCH EI deel HE 2 Press the MARK key MARK SEARCH E B REPEAT LAST REC AUTO PUNCH IN SEARCH OUT CANCEL REPEAT i The song will move to that location and an icon will appear at the left of the counter to indicate the cur rently selected marker number The top line of the display will briefly indicate MARK POINT SET This indicates that a marker Marker icon has been set A new marker will be added each time you press the MARK key TRACE am ka Markers are automatically numbered 1
10. YAMAHA LN 160 PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION Owner s Manual A H je zs ETE ME EYTTY 3 3 i i j FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instruc tions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the prod uct IMPORTANT When connecting this product to acces sories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to fol low instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to com ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequen cies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause inter ference harmful to the operation of other electronic This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT devices Compliance with FCC regulations
11. Rewind 1 frame __Hideusea Forward 1 frame Ee M Home Rewind by format value Ime ii End Forward by format value R Shuttle Rewind SS Shuttle Forward Scrub Rewind Scrub Forward ranm ms Please note that all the previously specified key com mands will be initialized If you do not want to change your existing user key command settings you can manu ally make the MIDI channel and CC settings shown above Installing the SONAR template file 1 Copy the SONAR template file from the included CD ROM to the folder in which SONAR is installed 2 Start up SONAR e In the menu bar select File menu Open 4 The Open file dialog box will appear Choose Cakewalk template files as the type of file to be loaded From the list in the dialog box choose Yamaha AW1600 Remote and click the OK button 5 In the menu bar select Option gt MIDI Devices Q The MIDI Ports window will open In the Input Ports field assign the MIDI device that you are using If you changed the track structure from the default settings of the template With the Yamaha AW1600 Remote template started click the CONFIG button in the StudioWare panel window A cluster will open at the right Drag the SET MIDI First Track knob to the first track number of the MIDI tracks f you use this template you will not be able to control the tracks correctly from the AW1600 unless the MID
12. 215 MIDI IN connector 22 MIDI OUT THRU connector 22 MIDI Remote 157 163 user defined Remote function 165 mix balance 57 nai Ko a Let ERRORES 81 check the level 93 Convenient functions 92 mirc origen 83 FEC ONCING E 87 Viewing all parameters 93 MMC device number 159 MMC MODE enn 159 MONITOR key 18 MONITOR OUT jack 21 MONITOR TEMPO 124 MONITOR PHONES knob 17 MIC MODE icerum deer Hei 159 AVRG Average 159 OFST Offset isse cissinsteoies eds 159 N Nudge function 71 NUDGE MODE 71 170 NUDGE TIME 71 170 OFST Offset 22 6022 eist ebiegne 159 One shot mode 112 123 OPTIMZ button 148 Overall setting 169 Overdubbing 55 58 Assigning the input signal 56 Auto pUPDch diealit ssesssss spen sueco 59 Manual punch in out 59 aler BET E 62 P or T EE 111 117 playback mode 123 Pad irack 112 terminology sssssse 16 Pods E E 18 EE eege 49 84 Paired channels terminology seccctssstecicesssctensddazcouas
13. 3 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the num ber of the track whose waveform you want to view 4 Move the cursor to the WAVE button and press the ENTER key The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear This popup window displays the waveform of the audio data recorded in the current track of the track 1 16 you selected in step 3 004 2 TRACE T 00 00 04 994 LLISTEH ESIT i TRACK Indicates the currently selected track number You can also move the cursor to this field and turn the DATA JOG dial to switch tracks 2 Counter Displays the location of the vertical line pointer indi cating the current location in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window You can move the cursor to this field and turn the DATA JOG dial to move the current location forward or backward 3 TIME By moving the cursor to this area and turning the DATA JOG dial you can expand or shrink the wave form display in the time axis The value of this field indicates the length of time displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window If you select ISEC the distance from the left edge to the right edge of the screen will correspond to one sec ond Selecting SAMPLE will produce the highest magnification and each horizontal pixel will corre spond to one sample 1 44 100 second AW1600 Owner s Manual 4 AMP By moving the cursor to this area and turning the DATA JOG dial you can expa
14. 20 UNLATCH button 166 USB Conector sosta rentes 22 USB MIDI driver 209 USB Storage mode 22 137 utility HUE eegeee 157 AUTO SAVE button 169 D OUT COPYRIGHT ON OFF DUTOR sees getetee 169 Digital input settings 168 FADER FLIP RT 170 initializing the internal hard CISK dte RUNE 168 NUDGE MODE 170 NUDGE TIME nnns 170 PARAM DISP TIME 169 POSTROLL TIME 170 PREROLL TIME 170 RECALL CONFIRM ON OFF button sinoticcastsainadaenes 169 SOUND CLIP TIME 170 STORE CONFIRM ON OFF button 169 EIER g ege dee Geheit 167 UTILITY key cnccsictenssncsesnncccnncdonsscest 18 V VARI PITCH knob 168 VARI PITCH ON OFF button 168 WIES GEES 19 Viewing the display 24 Virtual track PTS 62 SEa EE 62 terminology sss 19 W WAV file CD RW drive 140 COMPUTE I NR Tof GXDOL cacxxracsstondustn uisus Eu eegen 136 DON RP RR 139 Transport folder 136 144 WAVE DULOFlscsi sat euin Ros rieben iens 48 WAVE DISPLAY popup window 72 W vetormm 72 workstation synth 171 WRITE DUO EEN 103 Block diagram ei ER D B I c5 E AWONOULAN S3NOHd HO LINOW H lt O
15. 57 Setting the mix balance and pan Y4 Overdubbing ETE 58 K tt Elo de PER RR 59 Manual DUE OUN E 59 Auto punch in out EE 59 Using the Undo List C T 61 Switching virtual tracks ssseeeeeeeeeseeeee 62 Saving the current song 63 Loading an existing SONG sese oco nacta tact ae rh eo epa eo esae 64 7 Various types of playback 65 Using UNIO CANON NR EE T 65 Using fg oboe p bae et Ibi Dunne UMDEm OM Sa SemPO Sabi 67 Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker 68 Erasing a locate point or marker 69 Repeatedly playing a specific region the A B Repeat function sesseesesss 70 Finding a location while you listen to the sound the Nudge function esassssescreese nsum etna pira ctba eterne beue 71 Finding a location while you view the waveform 72 8 Using libraries and scene memories 73 About the libraries cccccceeccceceesceeeceeeceeeeeeeesaaees 73 About scene memores 13 Basic operation for libraries and scene memories 74 Storing library or scene data 74 Recalling library or scene data 75 Deleting library or scene data 75 Naming library or scene data 76 Details on libraries and scene memory Z DIAN leie EE 77 EQ lIbr
16. For an audio track i ERASE 1 2 3 For a pad track loop Start End 9 ERASE For a pad track one shot Start End Hupa Yoel iL ERASE e If you select the pad track of a pad that is set to one shot mode all pad events whose attack falls within the Start End region will be erased 130 AW1600 Owners Manual DELETE Deletes the data from the specified region of the specified track s This command is similar to ERASE but differs in that the data that follows the specified region will move forward to fill the gap Lu TRACE a uu 00 00 00 000 2 12 04 7 4 OOII ERASE j DELETE Lr S DELETE DELETE mn E INSERT amp B amp S o0 E E mp cory TE H 00 00 08 000 OOS B 00 00 24 000 RE D E 30 DEES wo Le Zoe GE DELETE Lk For an audio track Start End e f you select the pad track of a pad that is set to one shot mode all pad events whose attack falls within the Start End region will be erased E Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command List of editing commands INSERT Inserts blank space into the specified region Data follow ing the location of the Start parameter will be moved backward to make room DO TRACK a gu 00 00 00 000 2126 0 a a LI IHSEIRT I D EAE T commen B OOS 004 0 ERASE DELETE
17. e Changing the Start point will mean that locations already recorded in a track will move relative to the measure lines defined by the tempo map Please be aware of this if you are using measure display for the metronome or for the quick loop sampler 4 To adjust the location of a marker move the cursor to the MARKER button in the display and press the ENTER key When the MARKER button is on the POINT page will list the markers that have been registered 1 List Lists the markers that have been registered The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for oper ations 2 MARKER These are the marker numbers 01 99 3 POSITION Shows the position of each marker in the counter dis play format Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker e Erasing a locate point or marker 4 MEAS Shows the position of each marker in measure beat units 5 DELETE button To delete the currently selected marker move the cur sor to this button and press the ENTER key 5 Move the cursor to the MARKER area and turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list so that the dotted frame encloses the marker number that you want to edit 6 Move the cursor to the value that you want to edit and turn the DATA JOG dial to edit the value NOTE e You cannot change the location beyond the next or previous marker Erasing a locate point or marker If necessary you can erase a previously register
18. 5 While you play back the song move the cursor to the EFF knobs in the screen and adjust the level of the signal that is sent from each channel to internal effect 1 ES e Another way of adjusting the send level to internal effect 1 is to press a TRACK SEL key to select a track channel and then turn the EFFECT 1 knob of the Selected Channel sec tion This method is convenient if you want to adjust the effect level without displaying a different screen 6 To adjust the master level of the effect send repeatedly press the Selected Chan nel section VIEW key or hold down the VIEW key and use the CURSOR A WT keys to access the BUS page of the VIEW screen The BUS page of the VIEW screen lets you use on screen faders to adjust the master level of each bus Aur r VIEH jer 1 Eg 00 00 00 000 2128 6 4 4 DOL FADER jj FRE CH LIEH CH LIE FUST 1 DTN OTTO ec HR eg d El L RILA 1 PEAK button This is an on off switch for the peak hold function of the level meters If this button is on a peak indicator rt will show the level meter peaks and will remain displayed To reset this indicator you can temporarily switch the PEAK button off This setting is shared with the METER page of the VIEW screen AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 PRE POST button This selects whether the level meters of the BUS page will indicate the pre fader level PRE or the post fader level POST This setting i
19. Wrong Sampling Frequency The sampling rate of the selected file is incorrect Wrong Wav Chunk Data The WAV file s chunk data is incorrect Wrong Wav File AW1600 Owner s Manual The WAV file cannot be used A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 Special Notices The software and this owner s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software This disk is a CD ROM Do not attempt to play the disk on an audio CD player Doing so may result in irrepara ble damage to your audio CD player Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately Contents of the CD ROM The included CD ROM contains a backup file that you can use to restore the AW1600 to its factory set condition setting files that let you use the AW1600 s MIDI Remote function with various DAW software and a USB MIDI driver that is necessary to allow MIDI message transmis sion and reception via the USB connector Folder Softwar
20. 3 ALL button If you turn this button on and then turn the ENABLE DISABLE button on all data displayed in the list will be selected for backup 4 ENABLE DISABLE button Selects whether an item of data will be selected for backup ENABLE or not selected DISABLE 5 AS AW2816 button Backs up the audio tracks within a song in the format of an AW2816 backup file Select this format when restoring data on a Yamaha AW series Audio Workstation other than the AW 1600 AW4416 AW2816 AW2400 AW16G This format can only be used with 16 bit songs If you turn this button on you will be able to back up only one song at a time 6 EXECUTE button Executes the backup operation for the selected song s or sample library ies Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song or sample library data that you want to back up Then move the cursor to the ENABLE DISABLE button and press the ENTER key The symbol for the selected data will change to the symbol indicating that this data has been selected for backup You can repeat this step to select multiple items of data for backup If you turn on the ALL button and then move the cur sor to the ENABLE DISABLE button and press the ENTER key you can select all data in the list in one step e If you turn on the NAME or OLD button the data in the list will be sorted alphabetically or by the order in which it was saved To execute the backup move the cursor to the EXECUTE button
21. 5 5 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME F1 lt Transmission gt If MIDI OUT is set to MTC Quarter Frame messages will be trans mitted according to the time code movements of the recorder when the recorder is playing or recording lt Reception gt This message is received if MTC SYNC MODE is set to SLAVE Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are internally assem bled into time code that controls the recorder STATUS 11110001 F1 Quarter Frame Message DATA Onnndddd dd nnn message type 0 7 dddd data 5 6 SONG POSITION POINTER F2 Transmission If MIDI OUT is set to CLK a song position message will be trans mitted when STOP or LOCATE is performed on the recorder to indi cate the song position from which the song should start at the next START or CONTINUE message STATUS 11110010 F2 Song Position Pointer DATA Oddddddd ddo data H high 7 bits of 14 bits data Oddddddd dai data L low 7 bits of 14 bits data 5 7 TIMING CLOCK F8 Transmission If MIDI CLK is ON this message is transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder begins playing or record ing until it stops STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing Clock 5 8 START FA Transmission If MIDI CLK is ON this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure STATUS 11111010 FA Start 5 9 CONTINUE FB Transmission If MIDI CLK is ON
22. Arppegio Rev Sympho Graceful arpeggio sound with good definition 27 Chorus Lead Chorus Mod Delay Deep chorus sound usable in any situation Light modulation sound suitable for lead guitar Finger Cut ReverbRoom Suitable for finger strumming or walking bass phrases BA Bass Stroke Symphonic Symphonic sound effective on single note melodic playing 31 Pick Drive AmpSimulate A sound ideal for root note picking 32 Finger Pick Rock Boost AmpSimulate AmpSimulate Sound suitable for finger picking with emphasis on response Heavy and solid distortion sound Best Slap AmpSimulate Slap bass sound for everyone reminiscent of when slap became fashionable Melody al Rev gt Chorus Sweet toned sound for lead melodies Pop Vocal ReverbPlate Clear and transparent effect for vocal that cuts the low range Rock Vocal Delay Vocal MonoDelay MonoDelay Effect for rock vocal that uses doubling to create depth Vocal effect that uses a basic delay Ballad Vocal Symphonic Vocal effect with symphonic effective on ballades etc ROBOT Speaker simulation SMALL TYPE RingMod SFX sound for vocal and speech also usable as a sound effect Appendix Small cabinet simulation REAL FEEL Creates realism picking produces grit HIGH RANGE STACK TYPE Cabinet with boosted highs Large cabinet
23. Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording e Monitor signal flow during recording Recorder section e Track 7 UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV i H Stereo output channels channel Q Q D Q O x CL 2 Q 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STEREO Mixer section 11 To adjust the pan of the monitor signal press the TRACK SEL key for the corre sponding track channel and turn the PAN BAL knob of the Selected Channel section SELECTED CHANNEL NOTE e The pan setting of an input channel will have no effect if that input channel is assigned to a track by direct recording 44 AW1600 Owner s Manual 1 2 Assigning input signals to tracks Bus recording Assigning input signals to tracks Bus recording Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion Connect instruments mics to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 In the Quick Navigate section either press the RECORD key repeatedly or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR J L keys to access the MIXED page of the RECORD screen In the MIXED page of the RECORD screen you can assign the input channel signals to any one or two tracks via the L R bus 2120 8 4 4 0011 RECORD TERE RS OOOO OO IHFUT 8 3 4 5 B B de d CD INPUT Selects the record source input channel 2 L R bus The two horizo
24. REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and delayed reverb balance 0 delayed reverb 100 delay MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds gt O O D 2 e x 198 AW1600 Owner s Manual Effects Parameters E DIST DELAY Parameter Description DST TYPE DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DLY BAL 0 100 Distortion and delay balance 0 distortion 100 delayed distortion MIX BAL 0 100 95 E MULTI FILTER Parameter TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Filter 1 type low pass hi
25. SLICE Turns the Slice function on off If this is on you can specify the number of segments into which the sample will be divided If the playback mode is not set to Loop mode this will be displayed as and cannot be changed 2 BPM Indicates the tempo calculated by considering the playback region of the sample as one measure This field is for display only and cannot be edited 3 MONITOR TEMPO Selects the basic tempo that will be used for playing the phrase sample when the recorder is stopped This item only affects a sample whose playback mode is set to LOOP While the recorder is running the tempo of the song will be used 2 Move the cursor to the bank field of the pad for which you want to use the Slice func tion and select the sample bank AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 Move the cursor to the SLICE field of the pad for which you want to use the Slice function and select one of the following as the slice setting e OFF The Slice function will not be used B LE m The playback region of the sample will be divided into eight equal seg ments ho Ie The playback region of the sample will be divided into twelve equal seg ments v i LS The playback region of the sample will be divided into sixteen equal segments e Normally when you use the Slice function you will select the number of segments based on the shortest note value in the original phrase For example you would
26. e If you move the cursor to the Start or End parameter and press the ENTER key the current counter location will be input Alternatively you can recall a locate point or marker to move to that location in the song and then press the ENTER key to input that location as the value of the Start or End parameter NOTE P e For some commands you will also need to specify a location in the editing destination track In the same way as described above move the cursor to the counter display format field or the measure beat field and specify the location D E o D x O FE AW1600 Owner s Manual ll 129 List of editing commands List of editing commands This section lists all the commands that are provided in the EDIT screen and explains their parameters ERASE E Parameter list Erases the data in the specified region between Start and End of the specified track s 1 16 A single audio track Sie 7 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track A single pad track Tracks 1 16 Pad tracks 1 4 Virtual track number 1 4 Pad number oP BHnnmng nmn 005 1 e IB 00 00 24 000 013 4 i e 30 Ak ERASE Specify a point Beginning of the edited region Specify a point End of the edited region 1 2 V TR can be selected only if TR21 16 1 2 15 16 or ST 2 8 PAD can be selected only if TR PAD
27. e TIME COMP EXP Time Compression Expansion Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track without affecting its pitch e PITCH CHANGE Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track without affecting its length EXPORT Writes the specified region of an audio track to a WAV file a gt e The EXCHANGE TIME COMP EXP PITCH CHANGE and EXPORT commands can only be used on audio tracks The remaining commands can be used on either audio tracks or pad tracks Here are some ways in which you can use these editing commands D Erase unwanted regions You can use the ERASE command to erase just a specific region of a specific track For example this provides a convenient way to erase a few wrong notes from a perfor mance or to eliminate noise that occurred while an instru ment was not playing 2 Change the structure of the tracks You can use the EXCHANGE command to exchange an entire track with another track By using this command you can bring tracks of widely separated track numbers closer to each other for easier operation during mixdown You can use the COPY or MOVE commands to copy move the specified region of a track to a different track This is convenient when you have recorded a solo part among two or more virtual tracks and want to assemble the best parts into a single track 3 Change the structure of the song You can use the DELETE or COPY commands to delete copy e
28. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A H Stereo track S RAN Virtual tracks ON OO OH P GA NM RR ANAN SAN ANANT Neu RAN SA SORA ANANA SSS SSS NY Virtual tracks CONDO oP WD AW1600 terminology lll Paired tracks For audio tracks 9 10 15 16 adjacent pairs of tracks are handled by the mixer as a single unit These pairs of tracks are referred to as paired tracks A paired track can be used to record a stereo source or a dual guitar perfor mance etc ll Locate points markers Locations within a song that you specified in order to exe cute a function such as auto punch in out or A B repeat playback are called locate points Locate points include the in out points and the A B points and you can use the keys of the Locate section to move instantly to these points Independently of the locate points you can assign mark ers at desired locations within a song so that you will be able to find these locations quickly The AW1600 lets you set up to ninety nine markers 1 99 By using the keys of the Locate section you can move instantly to the previous or next marker Mixer section E Channels A signal route that processes a single signal within the mixer and sends it to various sections is called a chan nel The mixer section of the AW1600 lets you use the following channels e e co z st C T O O 2 O O A Input channels 1 8 These app
29. A FADER 13 I2 cH VIEH 3 um CH LIE cl pus CECE 10 In the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD screen switch the REC button on and per form the mixdown NOTE e When you are finished with the mixdown turn the PAN screen AUX OUT page setting back to its original setting of STEREO Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT By connecting a digital recorder to the AW1600 s DIGITAL STEREO IN or DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack you can mixdown to the digital recorder such as MD or DAT while keeping the signal in the digital domain or record an audio signal from the digital recorder into the AW1600 Mixing down to a digital recorder Here s how you can connect a digital recorder to the AW 1600 s DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack and mix down The DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack always outputs the same signal as is recorded on the stereo track This means that the procedure is essentially the same as for normal mixdown Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 As shown in the diagram below connect the AW1600 to your digital recorder Digital recorder MD or DAT DIGITAL DIGITAL STEREO OUT STEREO IN DIGITAL STEREO IN DIGITAL STEREO OUT MONITOR OUT t AW1600 3 Use the Quick Navigation section RECORD key to access the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD screen and select the channels that you want to send to t
30. AW1600 Owner s Manual STEREO Ip DL s izee aa OOII C FAC FE a One Shot Loop mode An icon indicates whether the sample assigned to the pad is set to One Shot mode Gi or Loop mode D 2 Pad track number This shows the pad track number 1 4 At the right is shown the name of the sample for the sample bank selected for that pad e Sample banks recorded in and played back with a song are specified via the Tempo Map Check the Tempo Map setup gt p 149 when recording phrases played on the pads to a song 3 Track status button This indicates the operating state of the track If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the following two displays will alternate e D The pad track can be recorded wl e The pad track can be played NOTE e Depending on the settings in the PAD page of the TRACK screen this may also indicate f muted 4 Pad track view In this area the pad events recorded in the pad track are shown as a bar graph Locator positions are shown as icons in the lower part of the screen 5 GRID button Grid records step records pad performances in one measure increments gt p 116 2 Move the cursor to the track status button and press the ENTER key several times to switch the button display to 3 ready to record You may select more than one pad track e The track status button can be switched only when the recorder is stopped 23 Us
31. COHFIRHBTIOH In this popup window you can select whether the internal effect 1 or 2 will be patched to the input chan nel NOTE P e When you use the input library internal effect 1 or 2 will be disconnected from the send return of the mixer and patched to a specific input channel For this reason you can use the internal effects on a maximum of two channels 3 Move the cursor to the EFF1 button or EFF2 button and press the ENTER key The INPUT LIBRARY popup window will appear allowing you to select an input library i 1 Eurhiul ti Drive m fe EL She crunch a oma gs te AV RE PFT LIERARY WS EG Hard Bl Wes 1 List This is the library list The line surrounded by a dotted line in the middle of the list is the data that is selected for loading When you turn the DATA JOG dial the data in the list will scroll upward or downward 2 RECALL button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to load the currently selected data 3 EXIT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window AW1600 Owner s Manual Data suitable for vocals NOTE e All input library data is read only 5 Select the desired data and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the recall operation COHFIRHRTIOH IHPLIT Lib 0037 Recall 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The data of the selected
32. HI RATIO UM EU High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEP 0 100 Pitch modulation depth AM DEP 0 100 Amp modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform HEV BAL 0 100 Reverb and chorused reverb balance 0 chorused reverb 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 E REV FLANGE Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO UT 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feed
33. INPUT 1 5 Parameter page Return channel page In this area you can edit the various effect parameters The content and range of the parameters will depend on the currently used effect type If the effect is internally connected to the mixer sec tion via send return this area will show the mix parameters of the return channel allowing you to edit them Move the cursor to the effect parameter that you want to edit and turn the DATA JOG dial to edit the value Depending on the effect type this area may be used to show multiple parameter pages In this case repeat edly press the CURSOR V key to access the param eter page that contains the parameter you want to edit For example the illustration below shows the parame ter pages for the STEREO DELAY effect type TVFE UsSEDRHS STEREO DELAY Wl EFFi DELAY L FE G L HI RATIO Uv 5 nz qas Bg UUT DELAY ER FE G P W a 375 ams EXE LE TVFE UUSEDAS STEREO DELAY W EFFI duer T EE Thru 1a RAS HIH ERL TOGE LE MIX BAL parameter ES e The parameter pages show the parameters that are specific to that effect type However for all effect types the lower right of the last parameter page will have a MIX BAL parameter which sets the mix balance between the effect sound and the original sound 4 To edit the mix parameters of the return channel access the last parameter page and then press the CURSOR V ke
34. Importing will begin If you decide to cancel the import move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key e When you import from CD DA a name of PAD x y x pad number y sample bank will automatically be assigned to the sample You are free to change this name later gt p 121 e When you import a WAV file the first eight characters not including the extension of that filename will be assigned as the name of the sample e The imported sample will be saved together with the current song e t is not possible to import samples while the AW1600 is run ning Importing from an audio track stereo track to a pad Importing from an audio track stereo track to a pad Here s how a region of an already recorded track of the current song can be imported into a sam ple bank for pads 1 4 Play back the song and find the track and region that you want to import 2 In the Quick Loop Sampler section repeat edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR l Y keys to access the TR IMPORT page of the SAMPLE screen SETUF TR IKNPORT l LIERRE CD IHF TR IHF TR P i 00 00 00 000 ol HAL HF EREC oo o0 00 200 ODII on 30 MENAR SA BANK A CFA 1 81 i Ge This page contains the following items a4 From TR Specifies the track from which the data will be imported 2 From V TR Specifies the virtual track from which th
35. NO ASSIGN MASTER STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN AW1600 Owner s Manual v c 9 O c gt aS gt z gt O c c 161 Setting MIDI messages z D 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pu O 2 Wn 162 e When CTRL CHG MODE 3 PARAMETER NO ASSIGN PARAMETER CHANNEL TRACK 1 CHANNEL TRACK 1 CHANNEL TRACK 2 CHANNEL TRACK 2 CHANNEL TRACK 3 CHANNEL TRACK 3 CHANNEL TRACK 4 CHANNEL TRACK 4 CHANNEL TRACK 5 CHANNEL TRACK 5 CHANNEL TRACK 6 CHANNEL TRACK 6 CHANNEL TRACK 7 CHANNEL TRACK 7 CHANNEL TRACK 8 0O N OQ O01 B G PO O CHANNEL TRACK 8 CHANNEL TRACK 9 CHANNEL TRACK 9 CHANNEL TRACK 10 CHANNEL TRACK 10 CHANNEL TRACK 11 CHANNEL TRACK 11 CHANNEL TRACK 12 CHANNEL TRACK 12 CHANNEL TRACK 13 CHANNEL TRACK 13 CHANNEL TRACK 14 CHANNEL TRACK 14 CHANNEL TRACK 15 CHANNEL TRACK 15 CHANNEL TRACK 16 CHANNEL TRACK 16 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 1 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 2 NO ASSIGN MASTER STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN MASTER AUX 1 NO ASSIGN MA
36. l V keys to access the EDIT page of the EFF1 screen The EDIT page lets you edit all of the effect parame ters EFF 1 srkgEo g 00 00 22 911 a120 4 4 E Bay TFE USED AS LIERARY JJ STEREO DELAY E EFF1 SEHD DELAY L FE G L HI RRTIO IoFFl d DELAY A FE G P enean d 275 mz Z5 BYPASS ON OFF button Switches effect bypass on off For effects connected to the send return loop however this function mutes or un mutes the effect rather than turning bypass on or off 2 TYPE Indicates the type of the currently selected effect v c KS Ces D Ben ab Q O O c J O I2 O c Wu c O O LES e You cannot change the effect type in this page If you want to use a different type you must recall library settings that use the desired effect type 3 STEREO MONO Indicates whether the effect is stereo or monaural A stereo input effect is indicated by EJ and a monaural input effect is indicated by Tei AW1600 Owner s Manual 97 x Q O z 3 RV 2 e o e c 3 O D O O D A St 5 o 98 Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations 4 USED AS Indicates how this effect is being used If the effect is internally connected to the mixer section via send return this will indicate EFFI or EFF2 If the effect is inserted into a specific channel this will indi cate the name of the channel into which the effect is inserted e g
37. 5 EQ H MID FREQ 6 EQ H MID Q These specify the gain frequency and Q for the HIGH and HI MID bands of the return channel EQ The range of each parameter is the same as in the EDIT page of the EQ screen TYFE USED AE STEREO DELAY i EFFI Ea L HID FRE g 0 0 0 0 7m vc 1 makHz eee E Lou REG e D x GG Jade 1z5Hz L SHELF Lk 6 g G4 EQ L MID GAIN 2 EQ L MID FREQ 3 EQ L MID Q 4 EQ LOW GAIN 5 EQ LOW FREQ 6 EQLOW Q These specify the gain frequency and Q for the LO MID and LOW bands of the return channel EQ The range of each parameter is the same as in the EDIT page of the EQ screen T FE UsEDHR STEREO DELAY a EFFI 3 droen L FAH Fi RETUEH L16G R16 Wwe PANL PANR Independently specify the return channel panning for the L and R channels 8 RETURN Adjusts the input level for return channel 1 5 Access the desired return channel page move the cursor to a parameter and turn the DATA JOG dial 6 To switch effect BYPASS on off press the ENTER key In the EDIT page you can press the ENTER key to switch BYPASS on off regardless of the current loca tion Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations Inserting an effect into a track channel The chapter Track recording explained how to insert an internal effect into an input channel In the same way you can also insert an effect into a track channel or pad chan nel
38. 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Panning direction Turn R WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform REV BAL 0 10096 Reverb and panned reverb balance 0 panned reverb 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E DELAY ER Parameter Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio TYPE S Hall L Hall Random Type of early reflection simulation Revers Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflec
39. Also turn down the GAIN knob for the MIC LINE INPUT jack to which your instru ment mic is connected 2 Press and hold the INPUT SEL key for the jack to which your instrument mic is con nected When you press and hold an INPUT SEL key the INPUT SETTING popup window will appear allow ing you to make settings for the corresponding input channel The following diagram is an example of the screen that will appear if you press and hold INPUT SEL key 1 da INPUT LEVEL knob Move the cursor to this knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the level of the input channel Nor mally you will leave this at the default setting of 0 dB The current level is shown by the value dB units above the knob 2 Stereo bus assign switch When you move the cursor to this knob and press the ENTER key the signal that is sent from the corre sponding input channel to the stereo bus will be switched on off 3 Level meter This indicates the input level of the input channel The ili symbol in the window indicates the location at which the level is detected 4 EXIT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window and return to the previ ous screen AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 While you watch the level meter in the popup window produce sound on your instrument and turn the GAIN knob to adjust the input level As you turn the GAIN knob toward the right the level meter in
40. As an example here s how to insert internal effect 1 into a track channel for use during mixdown or bouncing T In the Selected Channel section repeatedly press the EFFECT 1 knob or hold down the EFFECT 1 knob and use the CURSOR A LV keys to access the SEND page of the EFF1 screen 9 0 d ID 1I 12 13 IH 15 IB EL Fi TTT ec HR NOTE P e If the displayed page is different than shown above make sure that a track channel is selected as the object of opera tions This is indicated in the upper left of the screen If an input channel pad channel is selected press any one of the TRACK SEL keys 2 Move the cursor to the EFF INSERT field of the track channel into which you want to insert an effect and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking whether it 1s ok to release internal effect 1 from the send return con nection COHFIRHRTIGEH Release EFFI Send CRHCEL 3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Internal effect 1 will be inserted into the selected track channel 4 Press the EFFECT 1 knob twice to access the LIBRARY page of the EFF1 screen AW1600 Owner s Manual v c KS Ces C Ben ab Q O O c gt O O O c O O LES 99 Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations 5 Select the library that you want to use for that channel NOTE P e f you insert an internal effect into a channel the
41. Continue 6 Select a destination for the driver installation then click Continue The message Installing this software requires 100MB of disk space may appear However the actual required free disk space is 2MB 7 A window opens displaying the message Click install to perform a basic installation of this software Click Install If the driver has already been installed the Upgrade button is displayed instead of the Install button The driver is installed and message The software was successfully installed is displayed 8 Click the Close button The driver installation is complete You can check the following locations to confirm that the driver has been installed e Library Audio gt MIDI Drivers YAMAHAUSBMIDIDriver plugin e Library gt PreferencePanes YAMAHAUSBMIDIPatch prefPane Restoring the internal hard disk to the factory set condition In order to restore the internal hard disk to the factory set condition you will need to perform the following two pro cedures CD Initialize the internal hard disk 2 Load the demo song and sample library B initializing the internal hard disk Initialize the internal hard disk p 168 When you initialize the internal hard disk the system set tings will return to their factory set state NOTE e Executing this operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk and the data cannot be recovered We recommend you to backup al
42. E Can t store a scene The store destination scene may be protected A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00 B Can t reproduce a scene One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe E Can t save to a library e t is not possible to save to the factory preset libraries E Meters move even though the faders are lowered The meter display may be set to PRE FADER B Moving a fader does not change the level In the VIEW screen FADER page check whether the dis play moves in correspondence with fader operations You cannot control the level until the panel fader position matches the position shown in the display n the UTILITY screen PREFER page is FADER FLIP set appropriately When the power is turned on FADER FLIP will be set to TRACK Troubleshooting The fader may be set to PRE FADE in AUX E Pairing was specified but the signal is mon aural s the odd numbered channel panned far left and the even numbered channel panned far right E Pairing was specified but the signal phase does not match Even when channels are paired the phase setting is not linked B Signal is delayed An effect such as delay may be inserted B Can t use the internal effects Effect BYPASS may be turned ON The effect may have been inserted into a different channel Are the level of EFF RTN 1 2 faders raised 019 HQ Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 2 These do not affect the stereo tr
43. Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Av Reboucas 2636 Pinheiros CEP 05402 400 Sao Paulo SP Brasil Tel 011 3085 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 4 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraDe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z 0 0 Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 HEAD OFFICE PA12 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hr ten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos c
44. O 22 Parts of the AW1600 and what they do USB Connector This connector allows the unit to be directly connected to a USB equipped computer via a standard USB cable compatible with USB 2 0 When the USB Storage mode is selected WAV files and song files can be transferred between the AW 1600 and the computer In the normal mode the USB connection can be used for MIDI control The USB interface does not directly handle audio signals NOTE P e The USB interface cannot be directly connected to external hard disks or CD R RW drives e The AW1600 can be connected to either a USB 2 0 or USB 1 1 interface but data transfer will be slower if a USB 1 1 interface is used e When connecting via USB 2 0 be sure to use a cable specified for USB 2 0 use e The USB MIDI driver provided on the supplied CD ROM must be properly installed to allow MIDI message transmission and recep tion e When connecting USB cables make sure to connect the AW1600 directly to a computer without USB hub Caution when using the USB connector You must observe the following points when con necting the AW1600 to your computer via the USB connector If you fail to observe these points your computer or the AW1600 may stop operating hang up Causing data to be corrupted or lost If the computer or the AW1600 stops working turn the power off and then on again and restart the com puter Before connecting the computer via the USB co
45. Pad track event data Bi Audio Folder The following song audio data is saved in WAV file for mat File names are automatically created in the order of recording as in 0 WAV 1 WAV 2 WAV etc 24 bit song data is saved as 32 bit WAV files e 16 2 stereo track audio x 8 virtual tracks Quick loop sampler sample data e Sound clip audio data Audio data for undo and redo operations System File AW1600 SYS BIN Stores UTILITY screen settings and information for data man agement CD 5 e j RV 5 Q D D 5 t 144 AW1600 Owner s Manual AW1600 2 Drive Song2 an 002 Song Name AWS 004 Song Name AWS Lib 001 Library Name AWL 001 Library Name AWL OL WAV OR WAV 1L WAV 002 Library Name AWL 1R WAV 003 Library Name AWL 2L WAV Transport OR WAV File Name1 WAV File Name2 WAV E Song2 Folder Songs are stored in either the Song1 or Song folder B Lib Folder Sample library data is stored in the Lib folder E Individual Sample Library Folders Sample library data is stored in a folder bearing the name of the sample library extension AWL Sample Library Files Sample library settings are stored in a file bearing the name of the sample library extension AWL B Audio Folder Sample library samples are stored as WAV files The pads use stereo samples which are stored as separate left and right channel mono files L
46. RECORD key and use the CURSOR l Y keys to access the MIX DOWN page of the RECORD screen 2 Move the cursor to the LIBRARY button in the screen and press the ENTER key The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will appear HRETER ITI LIERARY oe Initial Data az 20FT COMP H HARD HTTHCHE 1 EXIT button Closes the popup window and returns to the previous MIXDOWN page Sample library This library contains sets of up to sixteen samples for use with the Quick Loop Sampler Sets of drum loop or sound effect samples are saved on the hard disk as sample librar ies When you recall one of these those samples will be assigned to the pads and sample banks so you can imme diately play them from the pads NOTE e Unlike the other libraries the sample library data is shared by all songs Bl Recalling sample library data Repeatedly press the Quick Loop Sampler section SAM PLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR A Uu Y keys to access the LIBRARY page of the SAMPLE screen ZETI mpi LIERARY LIER AR LS D Tel CD mp Z re TE HEH E SE HEH dii ee janruT 35 IL 2 1z8 6 4 4 LI C SORT field Use these three buttons to specify how the library data in the list will be sorted You can choose NAME sort alpha betically OLD sort by save date or SIZE sort by size 2 LISTEN button If you move the cursor to this button press the ENTER key a
47. REW lt lt key FF PP key Rewind Fast forward Select tracks DATA JOG dial Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection al n FLAY OFF sETTING INPUT CH HUTE kd key gt i key Select tracks 1 CD PLAY button Switches the CD Play function on off e When the cursor is located in the list you can turn the DATA 2 INPUT CH MUTE MIX button JOG dial and press the ENTER key to select tracks Use this button to specify whether the signals of input While an audio CD is playing the access indicator on the CD channels 1 8 will be output together with the CD play RW drive will blink back MIX button or whether only the CD signal will be output MUTE button 5 To exit the CD Play function move the cur sor to the CD PLAY button and press the ENTER key 3 List Displays the tracks of the audio CD that is inserted in the CD RW drive Insert the audio CD that you want to play 12 olpne ue DumeaJ2 N into the CD RW drive e The CD PLAY button can be switched on off only while the CD is stopped 3 Move the cursor to the CD PLAY button and e While the CD PLAY button is on the CD RW drive will be press the ENTER key locked and it will not be possible to eject the disc The CD Play function will be turned on and the CD track data will be read STEREO CD track Ol rine OOO COMRITE A CO PLAY TRACE TIHE ERCEUF ESTORE s SETTING 3 110 AW16
48. Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters Overdrive level Accelation at speed changes Low frequency filter High frequency filter SLOW rotation speed FAST rotation speed Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds gt O O D 2 e x 192 AW1600 Owner s Manual E RING MOD Parameter SOURCE OSG SELF Description Modulation source oscillator or input signal Effects Parameters OSC FREQ 0 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth MIX BAL 0 100 95 E MOD FILTER Parameter FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance PHASE 0 00 354 38 Left channel modulation and right channel modulation phase difference LEVEL 0 100 Output level MIX BAL 0 100 94 E DISTORTION Parameter DST TYPE DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER
49. SCL NOO MUNI NC CENE 23 Eject switch 23 meinel RET 10 media eegen 101 NIE TNOO EE 102 Track At Once 102 JB m 10 CD RW MEDIA ERASE 103 CH RECALL SAFE 80 Channel library 79 Recall ME 79 CONDE cousins int dst 183 COMPARE button 103 LGompreseor nssssssssnessseeseeeeeeeeeeeae 182 Connect external devices 27 Connecting instrument or mic 33 Connecting the AC adaptor 11 DC IN connector 23 control change NP T 160 controlling a tone generator module 174 ODIO nn ene ces 9 NOICE ENTER 6 COUNTS us cosincincnsinnscnssnwarannontigoaesannts 24 COUNTER DISPLAY 146 COUNTER DISPLAY 146 Creating a new song 39 Current song 28 Ser 20 D D OUT COPYRIGHT ON OFF Tue e EEN 169 DATA WRITE SPEED 103 DATA JOG dial 20 DC IN connector 23 demo SOng MONTEM RUEDA 28 Loading m m Em 28 MINO EN 30 Pay NNO Poe o REDEEM 29 DIGITAL IN jack DIGITAL IN PATCH 168 DIGITAL IN PATCH 168 Digital input setting 168 DIGITAL REC ON OFF button 168 Digital recorder 177 DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT jack 22 Dimensions sseeeee 222 Di
50. Tempo Map 1 6 MTC transmission MTC Master If you set MIDI OUT to MTC MTC can be transmitted during play back or recording 1 7 MTC reception MTC Slave If you set MTC MODE to SLAVE the internal recorder will operate in synchronization with MTC messages received from the MIDI IN connector 1 8 Realtime control of parameters Control changes can be used to send receive internal parameters in realtime 1 9 MIDI Remote The faders SEL keys and RTZ FF REW STOP PLAY REC keys can be used to control an external MIDI device In PRESET mode operating the above controllers will transmit MIDI data according to the preset settings of the AW1600 In USER mode operating the above controllers will transmit the MIDI data that you specify 2 MIDI data flow diagram RN MTC SLAVE Oo o gt MTC MTC Slave USB 2 IN EFF MIDI MIDI IN Oo o gt NOTE ON OFF Effect Control PGM CHG oO o PROGRAM CHANGE Scene Recall CTRL CHG Oo O CONTROL CHANGE Parameter Edit MMC SLAVE oO o MMC Transport Control LEARN O o Channel Message Exclusive Message MIDI REMOTE Learn THRU USB 1 OUT USB 2 OUT PGM CHG swt MIDI OUT PROGRAM SE MIDI OUT CHANGE CTRL CHG CONTROL CHANGE w2 REMOTE ee Transport W REMOTE SE Fader Sel MMC MASTER Sw4 MMC oc MIDI OUT MTC Sw4 MTC gt o O MIDI OUT CLK SW1 REMOTE OFF MIDI gt o c SW REMOTE ON Remote CLOCK SW3 REMOTE ON SWA REMOTE OF
51. WAV R WAV For 24 bit songs the samples are saved as 32 bit WAV files B Transport Folder This folder is used to store WAV files for import and export Data is stored as 16 bit or 24 bit WAV files The following operations are possible by directly access ing the data on the internal hard disk from a computer For detailed operating procedures refer to Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files on page 136 Specified audio data on the internal hard disk can be directly edited from a computer using an appropriate waveform editor application The song will become unplayable if you change the sampling frequency or quantization of the audio data but you can change the length of the waveforms without problems WAV files transferred from a computer to the Transport folder can be imported to the AW1600 audio tracks or pads as required and specified regions of audio data can be exported to the computer as WAV files which can then be imported into computer based DAW applica tions The entire contents of the internal hard disk or individual songs can be backed up to the computer Editing the song name Here s how to edit the song name that is assigned when you create a new song NOTE About songs Editing the song name NOTE e For 24 bit songs the audio data contained in the Audio folders is stored in 32 bit WAV format If your waveform editor application cannot handle 32 bit data
52. a long time make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet The performance of components with moving contacts such as switches volume controls and connectors deteriorates over time Consult qualified Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components 5 4 2 2 AW1600 Owner s Manual Caution for Laser This product utilizes a laser Use of control adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in haz ardous radiation exposure Do not open covers and do not repair yourself Refer servicing to qualified personnel Laser properties of the Drive Laser Class Class 1 HHS and IEC 825 1 Wavelength for CD 784 nm for DVD 662 nm The label shown below is located on the bottom of this product CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT The label shown below is located on the top of the internal CD RW drive CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASSE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED ABNING UNDGA UDS ETTELSE FOR STRALING ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR
53. e Pads 1 4 Pad channels 1 4 2 According to the parameter you want to edit turn the five knobs of the Selected Channel section The following items will change when you turn each knob Turn the EQ knob This changes the amount of boost cut for the selected EQ band To select the EQ band use the HIGH HI MID LO MID and LOW keys located at the right Turn the DYN knob This changes the depth of dynamics processing SELECTED CHANNEL Turn the EFFECT 1 knob This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from that channel to internal effect 1 If the stereo output channel is selected this adjusts the return level from internal effect 1 Turn the EFFECT 2 knob This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from that channel to internal effect 2 If the stereo output channel is selected this adjusts the return level from internal effect 2 Turn the PAN BAL knob This adjusts the pan of the signal that is sent from that channel to the stereo bus If the stereo output channel is selected this adjusts the balance of the left and right channels AW1600 Owner s Manual e Simply turning the knobs of the Selected Channel section will not cause the screen to change e If you turn the DYN knob immediately after recalling a preset library that includes dynamics settings multiple dynamics parameters will change simultaneously affecting the way in which dyn
54. hard refer to the appendix x e COMPAND S Compander soft zi DUCKING Duckin 4 Move the cursor to the parameter that you iia 9 want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial to edit the value e You cannot change the dynamics type in this page If you r want to use a different type you must recall library settings 5 To switch dynamics on off press the that use the desired type E NTE R key In the EDIT page you can press the ENTER key to switch dynamics on off regardless of the cursor loca tion Please be aware that if you edit even one parameter in the EDIT page of the DYN screen the operation of the Selected Channel section DYN knob will change as follows for that channel 96 AW1600 Owners Manual D Immediately after recalling a read only library that contains dynamics settings turning the DYN knob will simultaneously adjust multiple parame ters to affect the dynamics processing The amount of change will depend on the last recalled library TYFE KEMIM SOURCE oo COMP SEE ae THRESHOLD RATIO OUT SAIH evesen ma dB 3 1 5 5g eee ATTACK RELEASE KEHEE NH ams Sims 2 ck LR TYFE KEVIM SOURCE oo COMP SELF THRESHOLD RATIO OUT GAIA vv 6 Sok 21 E Betz was nuuuuux ATTACK RELEASE KHEE nnn M NN 1 amp ms G ns i ck TE 2 For a channel for which you edited even one parameter in the EDIT page of the DYN screen turning the DYN knob will ad
55. ini PLAY AUTO PUNCH rehearsal punch in REC PT actual recording punch out Using the Undo List Using the Undo List By using the AW1600 s Undo list you can not only cancel the most recent recording or editing operation but can even backtrack through your work for as many as fifteen previous steps This is convenient when for example after performing several overdubs you decide that you would rather go back to the state immediately after you had recorded the third solo 1 Press and hold the UNDO REDO key 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select a step The UNDO LIST popup window will appear number WMO LIST 3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press LES oe RECORD the ENTER key IE RECORD i The current song will revert to the state of the step you a4 RECORD selected az BECORD az RECORD WHO LIST op RECORDO D Undo list az RECORD This is a list of the previously performed recording and editing operations az RECORD From the left the list shows a step number that indi cates the order in which the operations were per formed the content of the operation and the track 4 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and virtual track that was affected by the recording or edit press the ENTER key ing operation The popup window will close and you will return to the previous screen Overdubbing The current song is now in the state of the step that is highlighted E NOTE The step enclosed by
56. lt o C T O O 2 O O La This popup window contains the following items and functions D Text input box This box lets you input characters numerals and symbols When you save the data for the first time the box will con tain a default name You can input a scene library name or song name of up to twelve characters 2 Text palette This displays the characters numerals and symbols that can be input in the text input box 3 CANCEL button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key you will return to the previous screen with out changing the name 4 OK button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the scene library will be saved or the new song will be created 5 button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the character that is currently selected in the text input box will be switched between uppercase and lowercase 6 INS button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key an underscore will be inserted at the location of the currently selected character underlined and subsequent characters will move one character backward 7 DEL button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the currently selected character under lined will be deleted and subsequent characters will move one character forward To assign a new name use the CURSOR keys to move the
57. one volume of CD R RW media and each track must be at least four seconds long The maximum length of time that can be written is approximately 74 minutes for 650 MB media or approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB media e The total size of audio data that can be written is 746 MB approx imately 74 minutes for 650 MB media or 807 MB approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB media e O Q O gt O E Ces C Ben O The CD RW drive of the AW1600 can use two types of media CD R which lets you record and add data and CD RW which lets you erase previously recorded data and rewrite it Each type of media has the following characteristics e CD R You can write data to this media and add additional data later You cannot erase and rewrite data that has already been written Once you perform a process known as finalizing the disc the audio data written to the CD R can be played by the CD RW drive or by most CD players e CD RW In addition to writing and adding data this media lets you erase all recorded data and rewrite it Audio data written to a CD RW can be played back by the CD RW or by CD players that support CD RW media AW1600 Owner s Manual 101 Methods of writing an audio CD D Q Q Q Q c Q O O O 102 Methods of writing an audio CD There are two ways in which you can write audio data to CD R RW media Track At Once This method write
58. plays the sample only while you continue holding down Loop mode plays the sample repeatedly from start to the pad or Trigger mode which plays the sample all the end way to the end when you press the pad once 0 Original sample ONE SHOT GATE ONE SHOT TRIGGER Start playback Stop Start playback Stop Pad z dark Pad lit Pad z dark Pad lit 9 Original LOOP GATE LOOP TRIGGER sample Start playback __________ 55 Stop Start playback _______________ Stop gt w s 4 4 lt j lt L Zen N as OO 005 Pad lit Pad dark Pad lit Pad dark O c Q D D Your pad operations can be recorded in an area of memory O NOTE D 9 called the Pad Tracks The pad tracks always operates in o synchronization with the recorder By recording your pad e Be aware that the pad tracks do not record the sample or audio 5 operations ithe pa d tracks while you E EE song data itself but there the pan on off data Each such piece of Ke data is called a pad event The playback produced by a pad track D play back you can use the pad tracks as supplementary will change if you switch to other samples after recording pad audio track events or if you change the playback mode FER The AW1600 also provides a Slice function that divides a sample into eight to sixteen segments and adjusts the playback timing of each segment accord
59. press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to save the current song COHFIRHRTIOH SVE Current Sond 3 To save the song move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key the Save operation will be cancelled NOTE P e The song save operation always saves the current song regardless of the song that is selected in the list D fs 2 oO XI D gt O e You cannot save a song that is protected If for example you have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song you must disable the protect setting and then save the song Making various settings for a song p 146 ES e If necessary you can change the name of the song before you save it gt p 145 e In the following situations a popup window will ask whether you want to save the current song when you load an existing song from the hard disk when you create a new song or when you shut down the AW1600 e However we recommend that you frequently save the song you are working on as a safeguard against accidents such as the AW1600 s power cable being accidentally disconnected AW1600 Owner s Manual Il 63 Loading an existing song Loading an existing song Here s how to load an existing song from the hard disk In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down
60. song This chapter explains how to play back the demo song while you oper ate the faders and keys of the front panel Connect external devices and turn on the power The following diagram shows a typical example of connections to the AW1600 Connect your mics instruments and external devices as shown in this diagram Rhythm machine Mics Synthesizer OO OOO Se OO CJ9C9OJ g S55 O UH A em s INPUT 1 8 HI Z O G O V O D O Be O O Kr Electric guitar Electric bass DIGITAL DAT recorder MD recorder etc STEREO OUT os O DIGITAL OOO STEREO IN MONITOR OUT Headphones Monitor system When you have finished making connections turn on the power switch of each device in the fol lowing order 1 External devices such as audio sources or effect After the opening screen the following screen will appear processors connected to the input output jacks of the AW1600 stereo 6 00 00 00 000 2122 0 274 TY BUT H TE I x SS The AW1600 itself Te rono REET ASE 3 The monitor system connected to the output jacks of RE HAE JE the AW1600 r en a When you turn on the power of the AW10600 the
61. the gain will ary e op T Sdn gt s recover too quickly causing level pumping noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be compressed incorrectly A compressor provides a form of automatic level control By attenuating high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore improving the signal to noise perfor mance Compressor CMP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms O to 120 121 points Outgain dB O to 18 36 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter Ratio controls the amount of compression the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change i
62. using the INPUT LEVEL knob in the INPUT SETTING popup window e If turning the EQ knob or DYN knob does not produce the desired result you can reload new settings from the EQ library or dynamics library gt p 77 78 8 In the same way select input library set tings for the other input channels However a maximum of two input channels can use the internal effects at the same time AW1600 Owner s Manual D D Lus O O D 2 x O H 51 Using the EQ library RV Q g D Q e en ES e 52 Using the EQ library The EQ library contains EQ settings appropriate for a variety of instruments Use these when you want to apply EQ to an input channel while you record or when you want to modify the EQ set tings after recalling an input library Press and hold the INPUT SEL key of the input channel for which you want to use the EQ library to access the INPUT SETTING popup window 2 Move the cursor to the EQ button in the screen and press the ENTER key The EQ library will appear EW LIERARY 2 TRECRLL GG i D I i Bose D I eu DT T KITURO GITT GG CTT ECO CTT Q ET oz Boss Drum z o ges snare Drum 1 d 1 List This is the library list The line surrounded by a dotted line in the middle of the list is the data that is selected for loading When you turn the DATA JOG dial the data in the list will scroll upward or downward
63. want to stop repeating the rehearsal press the REPEAT key once again or press the STOP B key e With the initial settings of the AW1600 the pre roll and post roll times are each set to four seconds You can adjust these values in a range of 0 5 seconds gt p 169 AW1600 Owner s Manual 8 To perform the actual auto punch in out stop the recorder then hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY P key G Only the PLAY gt key will light and playback will begin from the pre roll point 2 When you reach the auto punch in point the REC 0 key will light and recording will begin punch in 3 When you reach the auto punch out point the REC 0 key will go dark recording will stop and you will return to playback mode punch out 4 When you reach the post roll point you will return to the pre roll point and stop 9 To check the newly recorded content press the AUTO PUNCH key to make it go dark and then press the PLAY P key 1 If you are satisfied with the newly recorded content save the song For the Save pro cedure gt p 63 If you decide to re do the recording you can go back to the best take using the Undo list after performing several overdubs by repeating steps 6 9 gt p 61 The following diagram shows the auto punch in out procedure Pre roll Auto punch in Auto punch out Post roll point point point point 1 2 3 4 5 pU VN 16
64. you can monitor the bounce source track channels during playback even when not recording O When you reach the end of the song stop the song and press the RTZ key to rewind e If you re not satisfied with what has been recorded press the UNDO REDO button to undo the recording and go back to step 7 1 To check the recorded result move the cur sor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key to cancel the recording settings 11 Access the ON OFF page of the MONITOR screen gt p 31 turn off all track channels other than the bounce destination and press the PLAY B key ES e If you attempt to change the screen or page without using the SAFE button a popup window asking Clear Current REC Setting will appear asking you whether it is ok to clear the current recording settings Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key e f desired you can use the UNDO REDO button to cancel the bounce recording operation gt p 61 or switch the virtual track of the bounce destination and record another take gt p 62 Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix The Pitch Fix function can be used to fix the pitch of a vocal track or create chorus parts based on a main vocal part An Auto Punch in out function is also provided which allows a specified segment of a vocal track to be processed and replaced Pitch Fix can be useful in the following situations Correct the pitch of slightly
65. 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction MIX BAL 0 100 E AMP SIMULATE Parameter AMP TYPE STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume CAB DEP 0 100 Speaker cabinet simulation depth BASS 0 100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control EQF 99 8 0 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQG 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth MIX BAL 0 100 95 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 2 O C Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 193 Effects Parameters E DYNA FILTER Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 6 0 ms 46 0 s Filter fre
66. 1 o E 103H31S H O3HJIS Lino HOLINOW S3NOHd u o lt l o GJ xnv m o di M 4 1 OFHILS Lino xnv OauaLs WIXVOO u 103H3lS LNO O34H3Ls 1v LIDIGI t INO L9313S L93HIa H lt Juno 193410 HO R m d Q 8 LLNO LO3HIG H 9L LNdNI H30HOO3H lt LOATAS EI u1sna 433 paos 2130 ed uogoeuuo 2 HEI 103443 lt Q GN3S LYASNI ex 193443 LOATdS elt 193443 lt J zug 194444 0E INHNLFY 4 1H3SNI 0 e uj dij punos UI MOBIL Oeigie LNdNI 443qYOI3Y S 4 27 1443 a H3L3N p usum 7 2 LXNV t OQ AQ 13431 H sng suan l O lt eng i 4 o TIA31 HSL ino dij punos a 0 1 yoegheid dD JAYA MH GO oa O H Ino MOBIL 0212 H3JGHO23H 318vN3 uogonpey uies 03 usus usus U3L3 epoui i I AW Td A2 OPO Se O3 aNvar H up z og D oo T03H3lS Wad 13A31 NO o 9 o LYASNI H3LLSIA mmn JIGS Nana EN 1 P4 E H OS3HJIS 70389341S QO YOLVTIIOSO xipueddy B TAI NO 7 a O yY Fa Gavosvo sna 7 oj 6 1 NI O3H3LS 1vLIOIG LV 378VN3 91 6 01 6 t X ur 081945 T 8 1 8 X ul ouo INO yoeLL oeueis uy dijo punos i H3QHOO3H uj xoe1 021915 uouonpeg up 03 lt Hu3auoo3u l Zei O pm ees mee rn I I LL LNdNI l opo SOINVN LLY oo TEST NO d YOLINOW t lt OHd3H O LYASNI LNdNI H3QHOO3H Rum 91 L HOLINOW H3aHO23H yoegheld GO i 3AIHd MH dO il
67. 16 D e A E E ET 57 84 PAN BAL knob 19 26 PARAM DISP TIME 169 PERFECTLY DUltOfl erectis 109 PHANTOM 48V switch 22 PHA ene nee meee mene eee er ein eater 84 elei 21 ping pong recording 81 88 PAG FIX EE 89 PLAY KEY wecteccccncatsdenacocetedecwectcndunce 21 DEE MR RETE 65 A B Hepneat ennn 70 popup window INPUT LIBRARY popup window 77 INPUT SETTING popup window 77 POSITION DE 68 POSTROLL TIME 170 See 23 PHEGCAUTIONS EE 3 PHERHOLL nl E 170 program change 160 PROTECT HEIEREN o oon 146 Karen le e E 59 Quick loop sampler 14 111 an audio Ke BEE 117 COTnIDUIDI ionis cesi iai asa E EeeP 120 Deleie nnn 126 Editing the sample name 121 Cc m eee 123 Gate mode 112 Grid recording 116 MADONO EE ETT IS 117 Importing from an audio track stereo track 119 Loop MOG aet 112 123 Index One shot mode 112 123 PaO TIOR quet UM 112 Slice TUDOCIOD ue retos arena oia 124 Switching the playback mode 123 TQ Let 123 Trigger mode 112 WMG TTE 117 n Rear panel 21 REC ROY 21 RECALL CONFIRM ON OFF button 169 Recall Gate 80 RECORD key 18 Recording on a track 48 Recordi
68. 9 8 TRACE DEIER TRACE FADER E 1 t 2 EFF EWS 3 CH UIEH ert CH LIE Bohr ATTE EQ OYN IANA DEED EE IH m CET D Pairing Indicates the pairing status of adjacent odd numbered even numbered channels Paired channels are indicated by a heart shaped symbol and unpaired channels are indi cated by a broken heart Move the cursor here and press the ENTER key to switch pairing on off NOTE e Pairing cannot be switched off for track channels 9 10 15 16 pad channels 1 4 and the stereo channel 2 ATT knob Move the cursor to this knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the attenuation of the signal over a range of 0 to 96 dB before it enters the EQ This is the same func tion as the ATT knob in the EDIT page of the EQ screen 3 Phase except for the stereo output channel Move the cursor here and press the ENTER key to switch the phase of the signal between N Normal and R Reverse WY c KS Ces Ben ab Q O O c gt O O O c O O LES AW1600 Owner s Manual Il 93 X Q O 2 Q 2 CL o O c O D O O D Q CT O 2 o 94 Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations 4 Effect insert This lets you insert an internal effect into the channel When you move the cursor here and press the ENTER key a popup window will appear allowing you to select internal effect 1 or 2 5 EQ
69. ASSIGN MASTER AUX 1 NO ASSIGN MASTER AUX 2 NO ASSIGN MASTER EFF 1 NO ASSIGN MASTER EFF 2 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN BALANCE STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND INPUT 1 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND INPUT 2 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND INPUT 3 CHANNEL INPUT 1 EFF1 SEND INPUT 4 CHANNEL INPUT 2 EFF1 SEND INPUT 5 CHANNEL INPUT 3 EFF1 SEND INPUT 6 CHANNEL INPUT 4 EFF1 SEND INPUT 7 CHANNEL INPUT 5 EFF1 SEND INPUT 8 CHANNEL INPUT 6 EFF1 SEND PAD 1 CHANNEL INPUT 7 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL INPUT 8 EFF1 SEND PAD 2 CHANNEL PAD 1 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND PAD 3 CHANNEL PAD 2 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND PAD 4 CHANNEL PAD 3 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL PAD 4 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN
70. AW1600 will transmit MIDI Clock Start Stop Continue and Song Position Pointer messages from its MIDI OUT THRU connector when it is running Example settings for synchronization using MIDI Clock and Start Stop Continue 00 00 00 000 2120 8 4 4 0011 HIDI US con QUT HAC HODE HTC HODE HIDI CH CLE HASTER HASTER TH P BS SLANE POH gen H cTRLCHG HODE OFF Si EXT BURG FZT LDLEDLEDLDDLU DL 3 Move the cursor to the CTRL CHG MODE area and turn the DATA JOG dial to select 1 out of the possible range of 1 3 The CTRL CHG MODE lets you choose one of three combinations 1 3 that specify how control changes will correspond to the mix parameters of the AW 1600 For details on the contents of each choice refer to page 160 If you want to divide your operations into a separate MIDI channel for each of the AW 10600 s track chan nels choose 1 If you want all track channels to be controlled on a single MIDI channel choose 2 or 3 If you chose 2 or 3 you will also need to set the MIDI CH field to specify the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive the control changes AW1600 Owner s Manual 4 Make settings on your workstation synth so that its built in sequencer will follow exter nal MIDI Clock messages Also set the sequencer to record ready mode For details on how to make these settings refer to the manual for your workstation synth e If your workstation synth has a
71. Ch settings For modes 2 and 3 reception will occur regardless of MIDI channel if MIDI Rx Ch is set to ALL Transmission If Control Change Mode is TX or TX RX control change messages will be transmitted on the MIDI Tx Ch channel when you operate a parameter 1011nnnn Bn Control Change Occccccc cc Control No 0 95 102 119 Ovvvvwvww vv Control Value 0 127 STATUS DATA The control value is converted into a parameter value according to the following equation S total number of steps in the parameter s variable range 128 S X remainder Y INT Y 1 2 2Z If MIDI DATA Z 0 then Value 2 0 If MIDI DATA Z X gt MAX then Value MAX Otherwise Value 2 INT MIDI DATA Z X 5 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn Reception Program change messages will be received if the Program Change Mode is RX or TX RX and the MIDI Rx Ch matches However if MIDI Rx Ch is ALL this message is received regardless of the channel A scene memory will be recalled according to the PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE settings Transmission If Program Change Mode is TX or TX RX a program change will be transmitted on the MIDI Tx Ch according to the PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE settings when you recall a memory number If the recalled memory number has been assigned to more than one pro gram number the lowest numbered program number will be trans mitted STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program No 0 127
72. Displays the waveform of the selected sample 5 TIME Specifies the range of time that will be displayed for the waveform If you select ISEC the distance from the left edge of the screen to the right edge will corre spond to one second If you select SAMPLE the dis play will be at maximum magnification and each pixel in the horizontal direction will correspond to one sample 1 44 100 second 6 AMP Specifies the range of levels that will be displayed for the waveform If you select 0 dB the top and bottom da Bank edges of the screen will be the maximum level Selects the sample bank used for each pad 7 button 2 TRIM button Displays the area near the Start point of the waveform Accesses a popup window that displays the waveform button of the sample Move the cursor to the bank field for the pad whose playback region you want to adjust and select the sample bank Move the cursor to the TRIM button for the pad whose playback region you want to adjust and press the ENTER key The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear In this popup window you can view the waveform of the selected sample and specify the start point playback start location and end point playback end location Displays the area near the End point of the waveform 9 EXIT button Applies the settings and closes the popup window Move the cursor to the Start point and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the playback start point o
73. EQ knob or hold down the EQ knob and use the CURSOR A keys to access the EDIT page of the EQ screen The EDIT page of the EQ screen lets you edit all of the EQ parameters Li H HIC HIGH au 10 0 m 0 50 de H CHL sannanua sooo IB iD BS iC OLDER i Sak 7 a0 Dni un ig ip 1 ON OFF button Switches the EQ on off 2 Response curve Graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ 3 FLAT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to reset the boost cut amount of all bands to 0 dB 4 ATT Attenuation knob Attenuates the signal immediately before it is input to the EQ over a range of 96 to 0 dB This is used mainly to prevent the signal from clipping when you use the EQ to boost a specific frequency region 5 Output meter Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed through the EQ 6 Q knobs Specify the Q steepness at which each band HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW will be boosted or cut The range is 10 0 10 and higher settings will produce a steeper curve 7 F Frequency knobs Specify the center frequency of the boost cut over a range of 21 2 Hz 20 0 kHz G Gain knobs Specify the amount of boost cut over a range of 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB 4 Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial to adjust the value 5 To switch the LOW band type move the cur sor to the LOW band Q knob and t
74. EQUHICE a 7 Raise the STEREO fader play back your digital recorder and check the recording level and monitor level e f you want to lower the recording level access the FADER page of the VIEW screen and lower the on screen faders for input channels 1 2 The GAIN knobs have no effect on input signals from the DIGITAL STEREO INPUT jack 8 When you are finished setting the levels put the AW1600 in record mode and play back your digital recorder Appendix Input library list No 00 Name Initial Data Effect Type Description Initialize to a default state in which EQ DYN and EFFECT are not applied EG Electric guitar 01 Multi Drive AmpSimulate Drive sound usable in a wide range of situations from backing to lead 02 Light Crunch AmpSimulate Light crunch sound suitable for chords that are allowed to ring 03 Studio Lead Dist gt Delay Lead with delay sound with an amp like character 04 Clean Lead Rev gt Sympho Clean and transparent sound 05 Hard Blues AmpSimulate Hard blues sound with rich distortion 06 Melody Drive Dist gt Delay Long sustaining sound suitable for melodies or ballades 07 Pop Ryhthm Mono Delay Clean backing sound with doubling 08 Heavy Rock AmpSimulate Heavy rock sound with all frequency ranges distorted 09 Stack Lead AmpSimulate Sound that simulate
75. Ho Data Ho Data 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list so that the library data or scene you want to rename is enclosed by the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the TITLE button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear e f you selected read only data indicated by a lock icon in step 2 a message of Head Only will appear and you will be unable to edit the name B 5 e e St Z D o c 3 a o Q D 5 D 3 D 3 D o 4 Assign a name to the data Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on assigning a name gt p 25 The edited name will be finalized 76 AW1600 Owners Manual Details on libraries and scene memory Details on libraries and scene memory This section explains how to access each type of library or scene memory and describes the functions that are unique to each of these screens Input library From this library you can recall EQ dynamics and inter nal effect settings to the currently selected input channel Use this when you want to apply EQ dynamics and inter nal effects to the input signal that you are recording Library numbers 00 40 are all read only and 00 is data for initializing an input channel In order to use the input library you will need to insert internal effect 1 or 2 into that input channel Bil Recalling input library data Press and hold the INPUT SEL key f
76. L O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 127Shffle16 128FlipHop 128GarageHs 129Detroit 130Latin8 130Shuffle8 134TecLectro 135 2Step 135lbiza 135TrncHouse D o o D 2 2 x F p peu a gm Iq am re pd pT 9r Iur aaa ee ee ea e ELE A ES eee mm gw E ir JEE E re E nl E ee ee ee gx ir IDEST re Eu eee TI gy eae eee gf ee x ee es gem a mm gem uem ar a a am am opm a a LL xm a eem mm E gll ge Rem ee ae eg rir rj rm rio r o ioO ococ oolooooop oon ooopooPoolorr oooon ooijormlo o o o oIE Co Poy Be jr r r r ir ir OO a Oe oi ml d mal ee rr rr r vr r r rr r rr r r T r r ir rr r r r r r r r r r r rr r r rr r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r rr r r rr r r r r r r rr r r rr r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r 137SambaEns 200 ll AW1600 Owner s Manual 140MedFast8 Sample library list 140Techno 147Drumn Bs 154LatinSwng 170Fast8 Bang Explosn Bell Beep Birds Car Action City Noise Dog Cat Door Action Female Dry Female Wet OOo Ooor Oi ir o oir r ririr Uu OQIO QO r O r Q O r r r r i r UJ O O O O OO OOo r rir ri r D OO Oj O Oo Oooc olo oo0o rr IO 1 O WE Fire Guns Hit Swish Human Action Jungle Amb Laser Buzz Male Dry Night Amb Other Rides Punch Swish Rain1 Ra
77. LEVEL knob and STEREO fader are set to the O dB position the input level will be output without change to the recorder and monitor Recording playing a sound clip Recording playing a sound clip Now that preparations are complete let s record to a sound clip The post fader signal of the stereo output channel can be recorded directly on a sound clip For playback the signal will be sent immediately before the stereo output channel fader EQ and dynamics cannot be applied to the playback of a sound clip e Signal flow when using a sound clip Recording to a sound clip i Metronome MIC LINE INPUT jacks OO0000909007 FU Input channels Stereo output channel SECHER ECKER EH Seeob 000000 bus Mixer section AW1600 Owner s Manual 35 JU D Q O x 2 2 Q E O GN LI O c 2 CL o Recording playing a sound clip Bl Recording a sound clip T In the Locate section press the SOUND CLIP key The CLIP screen will appear where you can record and play sound clips CLIP FUT gt CLIP 0000 000 szizee 4 4 SOUND CLIP 2 2 2 2 peee AKTE Ge ES EIX 0 00 000 0 00 000 11 1 Metronome button Switches the metronome on off 2 Metronome knob Adjusts the volume level of the metronome The value shown above the knob shows the current setting in dB units 3 START button Specifies the current location as the start point of
78. Loop Sampler Sample library Mix parameters for each channel Scene memory Channel library Using libraries and scene memories AW1600 Owner s Manual 73 Basic operation for libraries and scene memories a a e St Z D o RV 3 a o Q D 5 D 3 D 3 D o 74 Basic operation for libraries and scene memories Here are the basic procedures for recalling and storing a library or scene Storing library or scene data Here s how to store the current settings in a library or scene memory e The input library and mastering library and the EQ dynamics or effect libraries accessed from the INPUT SETTING popup window are all read only and therefore have no STORE button 1 Access the desired library page or the scene memory page For details on how to access each library or scene memory page refer to the explanations on page 77 and following The illustration below shows an example of when you have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen Female Wo Female Wo 1 List This area lists the data stored in the library or scene memory The line enclosed by the dotted frame indi cates the data that is selected for operations Read only data is indicated by a lock icon 2 RECALL button Recalls the library data or scene that is selected in the list 3 STORE button Stores the current settings into the location selected in the list 4 CLEAR butto
79. Loop Sampler 8 CH stereo x 4 Internal Effect Section 2 Built in Multi Effect Processors Master Section Total 8 Bus BUS 2 CH AUX 2 CH STEREO 2 CH stereo x 1 EFFECT 2 CH AW1600 Owner s Manual Built in Hard Disk Drive 40 GB 3 5 IDE Maximum Number of Songs 100 Songs Recording Resolution 16 bit 24 bit Linear non compressed Maximum Number of Simultaneous Recording Playback Tracks 8 Recording Tracks 16 Playback Tracks 16 bit 8 Recording or Playback Tracks 24 bit Number of Tracks 144 Tracks 16 Tracks Stereo Tracks x 8 Virtual Faders 45 mm x 13 Display 240 x 650 dot LCD with contrast control MIDI MTC Master Slave MIDI Clock Master MMC Master Slave Program Change Control Change Memory Scene Memory EQ Library Dynamics Library Effect Library Channel Library Sample Library AC Adaptor PA 300 Dimensions W x H x D 455 x 107 x 349 mm Net Weight 6 2 kg Operating Temperature 5 35 C Optional Accessories Foot switch Yamaha FC5 B Mixer Section Input Output MIC LINE INPUT 1 8 balanced XLR phone combo Phantom Power Supply 48 3V Input Impedance 3 ko Nominal Input Level 46 dBu to 4 dBu Minimum Input Level 52 dBu Maximum Input Level 18 dBu MIC LINE INPUT Hi Z 8 unbalanced phone Input Impedance 500 kQ Nominal Input Level 46 dBu to 4 dBu Minimum Input Level 52 dBu Maximum Input Level 18 dB
80. Move the cursor here and press the ENTER key to switch EQ on off 6 DYN Move the cursor here and press the ENTER key to switch dynamics on off 7 ON OFF Move the cursor here and press the ENTER key to switch the channel on off EFF1 except for the stereo output channel 9 EFF2 except for the stereo output channel AUXA except for the stereo output channel 1D AUX2 except for the stereo output channel Move the cursor to these knobs and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the send levels to effect buses 1 2 and AUX buses 1 2 By moving the cursor to the left of the knob and pressing the ENTER key you can switch between pre fader send the pre fader signal to the bus and post fader send the post fader signal to the bus 2 PAN BALANCE knob Move the cursor to this knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the pan or balance in the case of the stereo output channel of the signal that is sent from the channel to the stereo bus or L R bus 3 FADER knob except for the stereo output channel Move the cursor to this knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the level of the signal that is sent from the channel to the stereo bus or L R bus The range is to 6 dB NOTE P e The FADER knob of a track channel will follow the operation of the corresponding panel fader 1 8 or 9 10 15 16 However please note that if you adjust an on screen knob and then operate the panel fader the value will not ch
81. Overall settings for the AW 600 p 169 Recalling library or scene data Here s how to recall load settings from a library or scene Access the desired library or scene mem ory page For details on how to access each library or scene memory page refer to the explanations on page 77 and following The illustration below shows an example of when you have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen EDIT 3 LIERRRY E Female Wo Female Wo 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list so that the library data or scene you want to recall is enclosed by the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall operation COHFIRHRTIGH Recall Fe Lib Eat CANCEL 4 To execute the recall move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The library or scene will be recalled m gt e You have the option of making settings so that the confirma tion popup window does not appear when you perform the Recall operation For details refer to Overall settings for the AW1600 gt p 169 Basic operation for libraries and scene memories Deleting library or scene data Here s how you can delete unwanted library or scene memory data e The input library and mastering library and the EQ dynamics and effect libraries accessed from the INPUT SETTING popup window are all read only and do n
82. THRU or USB connector To access this page repeatedly press the Work Navigation section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key z Q 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pe O 2 Qo and use the CURSOR A l Y keys UTILITY stereo Tea DD zie 4 4 DOD HIDI I J svHC our HAC HODE HTC HODE HIDI CH JL LN IOC ppm HAAJ Ihr Ip HTC GLa srauE FencHe Ar ig FREFER CHE P RUBG OT ere cue HODE OFF USE OFT 00 00 00 00 00 158 AW1600 Owner s Manual and specifying MTC MMC transmission and reception This page contains the following items Ga SYNC OUT Selects the type of MIDI messages that will be output from the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB connector e CLK button If this button is on MIDI Clock and Start Stop Continue and Song Posi tion Pointer messages will be trans mitted while the recorder is running If you turn this button on the MTC but ton will be defeated e MTC button If this button is on MTC MIDI Time Code will be transmit while the recorder is running If you turn this button on the CLK button will be defeated 2 MMC MODE Specifies how MMC will be transmitted received e MASTER button bs button is on the AW1600 will be the MMC master When you operate the transport the corre sponding MMC command will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT THRU or USB connector Use this setting when you want to remotely con
83. The selected dynamics library will be loaded 5 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key 6 If you want to adjust the dynamics settings turn the DYN knob of the Selected Chan nel section Turning the DYN knob immediately after a library has been recalled will simultaneously adjust multiple dynamics parameters to control the dynamics effect The result will depend on the library that you select e If turning the DYN knob does not change the tone check whether dynamics may have been turned off for that channel gt p 96 e If necessary you can also make detailed adjustments to the individual dynamics parameters For details refer to Using libraries and scene memories gt p 73 D D Lus O O D 2 x O AW1600 Owner s Manual 53 g Q A D Q pmj 2 ae 54 AW1600 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Overdubbing This chapter explains how you can record additional performances on other tracks while you listen to the previously recorded tracks This chapter also explains how to switch virtual tracks and save songs About overdubbing Overdubbing is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you monitor the playback of previously recorded tracks The diagram below shows the signal flow when you play back tracks 1 4 and overdub track 5 In this example the signal that is input from MIC LINE INPUT jack 1 is routed t
84. These combine the signals of track input channels and send them to recorder track inputs AW1600 Owner s Manual Quick Loop Sampler section In the Quick Loop Sampler section you can assign stereo waveforms to the four pads and strike the pads to play them back These stereo waveforms are called samples The memories to which the samples are assigned are called sample banks and each pad provides four sample banks A D lll Pad track The AW 1600 can realtime record and play back your strikes on the pads The memory that records these pad operations is called the pad track Unlike the tracks that record audio the pad track simply records the timing at which you pressed a pad or released a pad Overall The smallest unit by which the AW1600 manages a com position is called a song When you save a song on the hard disk all data necessary for reproducing that song will be saved i e not just the audio data but also mixer set tings and the samples used by the quick loop sampler You can return to the original state at any time by loading the saved song ll Scenes and scene memories A scene is a stored set of settings for the mixer section and effects The area of memory that holds the scenes is called scene memory and 96 scenes can be stored for each song Scene memories are saved on the hard disk as part of the song B Libraries A library
85. Users Account 2 Double click the USBdrv folder on the included CD ROM 3 Double click YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver v1 mpkg represents the version number An Authenticate window opens prompting the pass word If the window does not prompt you to enter the pass word click the lock 1con Authenticate Installer requires that you type your passphrase Name Password or phrase Iv Details ERE om i f Cancel E eet CD 4 Enter the password for the Administrator s account If you have not set the password click OK The Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Installer window is displayed e Install YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Installer Introduction Welcome to the Mac OS X Installation Program You will be select Destifatior guided through the steps necessary to install this software Continue AW1600 Owner s Manual D Click Continue The Select a Destination is displayed e Install YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Select a Destination Select a destination disk to install the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver software Introduction Select Destination n pe n Finish Ur Macintosh HD 76 7GB 42 7GB Free Installing this software requires O bytes of disk space You have selected to install this software on the disk Macintosh HD f Go Back
86. add an effect to a specific track be sure to insert the effect you plan to use into the appropriate track channel beforehand gt p 99 Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 In the Quick Navigate section repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR A UH V keys to access the BOUNCE page of the RECORD screen In the BOUNCE page you can select the bounce source tracks and record them via the L R bus onto one or two bounce destination tracks RECORII rr TRACE ce e fg DOE ZE DI quu He 126 0 drd EI S A d 4 TRACK upper line Selects the bounce source tracks 2 Bus L R The two horizontal lines indicate the L R bus signal route This lets you see the on off status of the signals that are sent from the bounce source tracks and see the selected bounce destination track s 3 TRACK lower line Here you can select the bounce destination track s 4 SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all bounce source and bounce destina tion assignments will be cancelled 5 BUS button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the right side of the screen will show a fader for adjusting the output level of the L R bus and a dedicated level meter for the L R bus 6 PITCH FIX button Position the cursor at this button and press ENTER to engage the PITCH FIX mode Use PITCH FIX to correct t
87. and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion COHFIRHRTIGEH Backur Selected Data CRHCEL NOTE P e f previously recorded CD RW media is inserted in the CD RW drive a popup window will ask you if it is OK to erase the media first Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key and the media will be erased e Ifa CD ROM or previously recorded CD R media is inserted in the CD RW drive a popup window with a message of Change Media Please will appear and the media will be ejected Remove the media and replace it with writable media Backing up songs and sample libraries 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Writing to the CD R RW media will begin If you decide to cancel the backup operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key While the backup operation is being executed a popup window will indicate the progress When the backup has been completed you will return to step 3 If the backup data does not fit on a single volume of media a message of Number Ejected Media Insert Blank Media will appear and the media will be ejected Insert a new volume of media Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key NOTE P e You cannot execute the backup operation without selecting data e If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 but ton turned off system data the
88. asking for confirmation and then click OK 4 Click OK to close the System Properties window and then click the Close button to close the Control Panel window D Insert the included CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 6 First make sure the POWER switch on the AW1600 is set to STANDBY then use a USB cable to connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB connector of the AW1600 When the AW1600 is turned on the computer automatically displays the Found New Hardware Wizard 7 If the Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software is displayed select No not this time and then click Next 8 Select Install software automatically recom mended ULT and then click Next The system starts the installation NOTE e Some computers may take a few minutes to show this screen AW1600 Owner s Manual 2s O Q Q Q lt 209 gt xe O D 2 e x 210 About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 Q When the installation is complete the system displays Completing the Found New Hard ware Wizard Click Finish NOTE e Some computers may take about a few minutes to show this screen after the installation is complete 1 Restart the computer The driver has been installed Bl installing on Macintosh computer Start your computer then log in as Adminis trator To confirm that the Administrator account 1s available select System Preferences then
89. assigned to the import destination sample bank If nothing is assigned this will indicate NO REC This field is only for display and cannot be edited e Only 16 bit or 24 bit 44 1 kHz mono or stereo WAV files can be imported Also WAV files having a different bit depth from the song cannot be imported AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 Move the cursor to the From WAVE File field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the WAV file that you want to import WAV files to be imported must first be copied from the computer s hard disk to the Transport folder on the AW 1600 internal hard disk WAV files stored in sub folders within the Transport folder can also be used For details see Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer on page 137 3 Use the To PAD and To BANK fields to spec ify the pad sample bank into which the data will be imported 4 When you have finished specifying the data to be imported move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the operation COHFIRHRTIGH Execute Way IMPORT 7 CANCEL 5 To execute the import move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will begin If you decide to cancel the import move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key e The imported sample will be assigned the same name as the WAV file from which the data was imported You are free to edit this
90. be selected within that screen The name of the currently selected page is highlighted HIDI I ose HIDI g D IH HOD FREFER uze 3 44 BIR EWS x Accessing a screen page channel When you want to edit an internal setting of the AW1600 or to edit a parameter that cannot be operated by a fader or knob shown in the display you will need to access the desired screen and page Press the key or knob for the desired screen The keys and knobs of various sections listed below have their own screens and the corresponding screen will be displayed when you press a key or knob All keys in the Work Navigate section All keys in the Quick Navigate section e The VIEW key of the Selected Channel section All knobs of the Selected Channel section e The SAMPLE EDIT key of the Quick Loop Sampler section e When you switch screens the page that was last used in that screen will be displayed 2 To switch pages within a screen you can either repeatedly press the same key as in step 1 or hold down the same key as in step 1 and use the CURSOR A Y Y keys If there are more pages than can be shown in one screen an arrow like the following will appear in the page display area This arrow means that one or more additional hidden pages exist in that direction To access a hidden page hold down the same key as in step 1 and press the CURSOR key of the same direction as the arrow In pages that
91. blinking area in the screen to the YES button if you want to save the cur rent song or to the NO button if you do not want to save it Then press the ENTER key 4 When the Now safe to turn off message appears turn off the POWER switch located on the rear panel IMPORTANTE e If you turn off the power of the AW1600 without perform ing the above shutdown procedure not only will any unsaved changes be lost but you also risk damaging the data on the hard disk and damaging or drastically short ening the lifespan of the hard disk itself and the internal CD RW drive Please use caution N CAUTION e A small amount of electrical current is flowing even when the power is in STANDBY mode If you will not be using the AW1600 for an extended period of time be sure to dis connect the AC adaptor from your AC outlet AW1600 Owners Manual 11 CU D h O D lt O c Qo perm D 12 AW1600 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Introducing the AW1600 This chapter describes the features of the AW1600 the name of each part and its function and introduces terminology you need to know when using the AW1600 Features of the AW1600 The AW1600 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer multi effect processor hard disk recorder sampler and CD RW drive The following diagram shows the signal flow within INPUT jacks 1 8 Input channels 1 8 Track channels 1 16 Return channels 1
92. button switches Fader Recall Safe between ENABLE and DISABLE states Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch the display between ENABLE and DISABLE 3 CH RECALL SAFE Selects the channel s for which Recall Safe will be enabled Mix parameters of the selected channel s will not change even when another scene is recalled The buttons correspond to the following channels a a e RV Z D o RV 3 a o Q D 5 D 3 D 3 D o e PAD All pad channels e INPUT All input channels s TRACK All track channels RTN Return channels 1 2 OUT auscecsine Stereo output channel 80 ll AW1600 Owners Manual Chapter 9 Mixdown and bounce operations This chapter explains mixdown operations in which you mix previously recorded tracks and record the result on the stereo track This chapter also covers bouncing or ping pong recording of multiple tracks to a mono track or stereo tracks as well as operation of the Pitch Fix function to polish up a vocal track About mixdown and bouncing Mixdown is the process by which the signals recorded on the recorder tracks are mixed to ste reo and recorded on the internal stereo track to complete the song The contents of the stereo track can be used without further processing as material to create an audio CD The diagram below shows the signal flow during mix down The playback of each
93. cable connections FF RESET Rx Clear running status 4 4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 4 4 1 REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE 4 4 1 1 MMC Command Rx Tx function 01 STOP Rx Tx Transport stop 02 PLAY Rx Transport play 03 DEFERRED PLAY Rx Tx Transport play 04 FAST FORWARD Rx TX Transport fast forward 05 REWIND Rx Tx Transport rewind 06 RECORD STROBE Rx Transport punch in record 07 RECORD EXIT Rx Transport punch out OF RESET Rx Tx MMC reset 44 LOCATE Rx Tx Transport locate AW1600 Owner s Manual 5 MIDI format details 5 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception Received when Rx CH matches Used to control Effects Pitch Fix Refer NOTE ON for details STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity ignored 5 2 NOTE ON 9n lt Reception gt Received when Rx CH matches Used to control Effects Pitch Fix Refer below for details Velocity of 0x00 is equivalent to Note Off STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvwww vv Velocity 1 127 On 0 Off Effect control by Note 1 Dynamic Flange Dynamic Phase Dynamic Filter When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI the note velocity both note on and note off is used to control the Modulation frequency width 5 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Reception If Control Change Mode is mode 1 control change messages will be received and transmitted regardless of the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx
94. command However you cannot select CLIP for 1 From TR Also Moves the specified region of data to the specified loca there is no 12 To Times setting tion of the specified track This is similar to COPY but differs 1n that the move source data will be deleted DO ERASE DELETE IMSERT mouit ee EL NENNEN A TR P i 00 00 08 000 00 00 24 000 OW AW1600 Owner s Manual 133 List of editing commands EXCHANGE TIME COMP EXP Time Compression Expansion Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio Exchanges data between the specified tracks track without changing the pitch STEREO Tu 10 00 00 000 2 1a2 1 2 4 0001 ANGE mm E ES SS dh LESCH NE r D JL lz BED IU TRA TTD peee IB ESEC DT 430 Se See ES t PME 4g e i TIME COP TR E P 1 EU TRE 2241 LE EXCHG 3 ExE d Ff LA E II GE E ES E FITCH D t P 1 00 00 06 000 BHESH zn EMFORT KE 00 00 14 045 Olio famn 30 d eee 7 MERGE T Enb 00 00 13 138 009 3 OEE ige For an audio track From Track If you set Ratio 50 To ra From Start From End i EXCHANGE From i TIME Track a s c pn Ho Xie To Track E Parameter list eit you set Ratio 200 EE Explanation From Start From End 1 16 A single audio track 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even num
95. cursor in the text input box to the character that you want to change and turn the DATA JOG dial to select a character When you have finished inputting the name move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to apply the new name NOTE e If you want to add characters to a name that has less than the maximum number of characters move the cursor to the INS but ton and press the ENTER key to insert _ then change the name as required AW1600 Owner s Manual 25 Basic operation on the AW1600 3 O Q c 3 2 Q e D z O O O 26 Using the Selected Channel section You can use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section to directly operate the mix parameters EQ dynamics pan etc of the currently selected channel 1 Use the TRACK SEL keys INPUT SEL keys STEREO SEL keys or pads 1 4 to select the channel that you want to operate When using the IMFUT i Eg OL Selected Channel BJ LIERARY 3 r section you must first select the chan Tm a nel that you want to operate The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the screen The channels correspond to each key or pad as fol lows e TRACK SEL keys 1 8 Track channels 1 8 e TRACK SEL keys 9 10 15 16 Track channels 9 10 15 16 e INPUT SEL keys 1 8 Input channels 1 8 e STEREO SEL key Stereo output channel
96. data STATUS ID No Device ID 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 01000100 44 Locate 00000110 06 byte count 00000001 01 target sub command Ohhhhhhh hh hour Standard Time Code Command Ommmmmmm mm minute Osssssss ss second OfELLLEL ff frame Osssssss ss sub frame EOX 11110111 r7 End Of Exclusive MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA Professional Audio Workstation Date 21 JUL 2004 Model AW1600 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 0 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function 1e 1e mali Basic Default Channel Changed hre 1 1 l H O 16 Default X 1 2 2 Memorized Messages x x Altered Uckck ko ko ck ck k ko k kk k k x BEEN Number True voice x x Velocity Note ON Note OFF Pitch Bend 1 16 21 27 33 34 41 56 Control 63 79 91 93 Change 102 117 Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable d dH Assignable H N Prog o 0 127 o 0 Assignable Change True Uckck ko ko ko ok ko ck ok kk kk System Exclusive ll x NO System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Reset All Cntrls Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset ul i a quarter frame message is transmitted quarter frame message is recognized When MTC Slave mode MMC When BC
97. digital recorder connected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack can be recorded on an AW 1600 track while still in the digital domain Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 As shown in the diagram below connect your digital recorder to the AW1600 Digital recorder MD or DAT DIGITAL STEREO OUT DIGITAL STEREO IN MONITOR OUT DIES AW1600 3 Use the UTILITY key to access the DIN HDD page of the UTILITY screen 4 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL REC ON OFF button and press the ENTER key A message will ask you to confirm your observance of copyright laws If you accept the conditions described in Copyright Notice gt p 6 move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The DIGITAL REC ON OFF button will be switched ON and digital audio data input will be enabled 5 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL PATCH IN field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select 1 2 input channels 1 2 as the destination for the input signal from the DIGITAL STE REO IN jack e If necessary use the INIT page of the MONITOR screen to initialize the input channels 6 Use the Quick Navigation section RECORD key to access the DIRECT page of the RECORD screen and connect input channels 1 2 directly to tracks 1 2 TRACE z gg 00 00 00 000 2126 6 474 TOLD JAA PUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 HIER 3 v dh ox x d dy
98. does not guar antee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit DFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to dis tribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangetho rpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsid iaries class B DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Responsible Party Yamaha Corporation of America Address 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 Telephone 714 522 9011 Type of Equipment Professional Audio Workstation Model Name AW1600 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 this devic
99. don t want to save the current song and press the ENTER key The song bit depth selection window will then appear COHFIRHRTIGEH 2e ect Record bit 1 amp 6 EIT zd EIT CHHCEL ok NOTE e See page 143 for more information on song bit depth quanti zation bits 4 Select either 16 BIT or 24 BIT move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Next a popup window will appear allowing you to specify the items whose settings will be carried over from the current song D D Lus O O D 2 x O COHFIRHRTIOH Se ect tem to Import SCENE LIERREY TEHF CANCEL You may choose one or more of the following items if desired e SCENE button Scene memories e LIBRARY button EQ dynamics effects and channel libraries e TEMPO button Tempo map For example if you have saved effect settings in a library for the current song and would like to use these settings for the new song as well you would turn on the LIBRARY button e You may also import these settings from another song later gt p 151 Use the buttons to choose the items that will be carried over from the current song Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the song AW1600 Owner s Manual 39 Creating a new song Direct recording and Bus recording 6 Assign a name to
100. extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components e Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over 4 1 2 AW1600 Owner s Manual IA A e Avoid locations where the unit will be subject to strong vibration Excessive vibration can damage the internal hard disk and CD RW drive e Do not block the vents This device has ventilation holes at the top to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high In particular do not place the device on its side or upside down Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating possibly causing damage to the device s or even fire e Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Doing so may result in noise both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it e Before connecting the device to other devices turn off the power for all devices Before turning the power on or off for all devices set all volume levels to minimum e Besureto connect to a properly grounded power source A ground screw is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock prevention Be sure to connect the ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains Improper grounding can result in electrical shock Handling cau
101. happen when you operate the keys of the transport section while using the MIDI Remote function e NORMAL button The transport keys will perform the same operations as nor mally play stop or locate etc the current song MTC MMC MIDI Clock messages will be transmitted and received as specified in the MIDI page of the UTILITY screen e LOCAL button The transport keys will play stop or locate the current song However MTC MMC MIDI Clock messages will not be transmit ted or received e REMOTE button The transport keys will not oper ate the recorder but will only transmit the MIDI messages that have been preset for each key e These settings will also apply if you use a foot switch to operate the song transport Using the user defined Remote function The USER page of the REMOTE screen lets you assign your own MIDI messages to each fader and TRACK SEL key To access this page repeatedly press the Work Navigate section REMOTE key or hold down the REMOTE key and use the CURSOR A l Y keys ES e The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while this page is displayed The track channel faders and TRACK SEL keys will not perform their usual functions but will work as specified by the settings you have made in the USER page REHGOTE ER 31 RAC EMO Kei This page contains the following items D TRANSPORT Selects what will happen when you operate
102. itself e SLAVE button If this button is on the AW1600 will be an MTC slave and will follow MTC data it receives at the MIDI IN or USB connector Use this setting if you want to synchronize with a second AW1600 unit or if you want to synchronize the AW1600 with an external MIDI device that can func tion only as the MTC master e When using the AW1600 as the MTC master make sure that the MTC button in the SYNC OUT area is turned on Setting MIDI messages 5 AVRG Average Select one of the following to specify how closely the AW 1600 will follow the incoming MTC data when func tioning as an MTC slave E m The AW1600 will synchronize to the incom ing MTC data at the highest precision How ever if the incoming MTC has significant instability synchronization may be inter rupted or become unreliable OT This setting allows more tolerance of MTC instability than the 0 setting 2 iergert This setting allows the maximum tolerance Use this setting if the MTC master is an external MIDI device that has significant instability e When the AW1600 is functioning as an MTC slave and is operat ing in synchronization to an external MIDI device and the accu racy of the incoming MTC becomes unstable the AW1600 will make slight adjustments in its playback pitch in an attempt to fol low The AVRG parameter specifies the range of MTC variance that will be tolerated 6 OFST Offset When using the AW1600 as an M
103. last used song will be loaded automatically When you turn on the power of the AW1600 with the factory settings a blank song will be loaded so you can start recording immedi ately AW1600 Owner s Manual 27 Loading the demo song o t D 3 5 e t O t 2 o o D 3 o a 28 Loading the demo song Here s how to load the demo song from the hard disk T In the Work Navigate section press the SONG key The SONG screen will appear where you can save or load songs WORK NAVIGATE DN REMOTE UTILITY 2 Either press the SONG key repeatedly or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR V Y keys to access the LIST page In this page you can select a song on the hard disk and load or delete it SOHG zrErEo 6 OO 00 0000 221zo 6 4 4 LI ECEN DAC EO ze IHFORT GET E EHS Loar Weee RAIN IDELETE SAVE f TLG n 1 one za zH 16 suurpunj cor J ned 1 List This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard disk The line enclosed by the dotted frame in the cen ter of the list indicates the song that is selected for operations The highlighted line indicates the song that is currently loaded into the AW 1600 This is called the current song NOTE e Each row of the list will display the song name data size and bit depth 16 24 bit 2 SORT field These three buttons let you select how the songs in the list will be sorted Choose the N
104. library will be loaded and the internal effect EQ or speaker simulator and dynam ics effect will be applied to the input signal Using the input library Input library MIC LINE INPUT jack Internal effect to the bus INPUT LEVEL Input channel NOTE e If the input channel is paired the same settings will be applied to both channels 7 f you want to adjust the effect use the INPUT SEL key to select the input chan nel While you produce sound on your instrument adjust the EQ knob DYN knob or EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 knobs of the Selected Channel section Immediately after you select an input library turning the knobs of the Selected Channel section will control the following items e Turning the EQ knob T Adjusts the amount of boost cut for each EQ band To select the band that will be adjusted use the HIGH key HI MID key LO MID key or LOW key located at the right e Turning the DYN knob Simultaneously adjusts multiple dynamics parameters to adjust the dynamics effect The result will depend on the library that you selected e Turning the EFFECT 1 knob Adjusts the balance of direct sound and pro cessed sound for internal effect 1 e Turning the EFFECT 2 knob Adjusts the balance of direct sound and pro cessed sound for internal effect 2 NOTE f e Depending on the input library you select the level of the input channel may change Re adjust the volume balance
105. mix parameter will change You can select one of the following choices e OFF Control changes will not be transmitted or received ft DEE Control changes will be transmitted and received on MIDI channels 1 16 MIDI channels 1 16 will correspond to AW1600 track channels 1 16 BE egene Control changes will be transmitted and received only on the MIDI channel that is selected in the MIDI CH field This mapping is compatible with the other AW series Lic NE This is the same as 2 in that control changes of only one MIDI channel are received and transmitted but the parameter mapping differs from 2 A single MIDI chan nel will correspond to AW1600 track chan nels 1 16 AW1600 Owner s Manual ES e For details on the mix parameters that correspond to each control change refer to the tables that follow e When you operate a mix parameter of track channel 9 10 15 16 on the AW1600 two types of control changes will be transmitted e When CTRL CHG MODE 1 MIDI CH PARAMETER FADER TRACK CHANNEL 1 ih EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER TRACK CHANNEL 2 ih EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER TRACK CHANNEL 3 Hale EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN TRACK CHANNEL 4 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER TRACK CHANNEL 5 a EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN TRACK CHANNEL 6 E
106. name later gt p 121 e The imported sample will be saved together with the current song e A total of up to approximately 47 seconds approximately 29 seconds in 24 bit songs of samples can be imported into the Quick Loop Sampler If you specify a WAV file that exceeds this amount an error message will be displayed and the import operation cannot be executed e If you import once again into the same pad and sample bank that sample will be overwritten by the newly imported data If you want to keep the previously imported sample you must import the new data into a different pad or sample bank e t is not possible to import samples while the AW1600 is run ning Editing the sample name Editing the sample name Here s how you can edit the sample name that is assigned when you import from an audio CD or WAV file 1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section repeat edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use CUR SOR l V keys to access the SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen SAMPLE terio Tea 00 00 10 000 221ze 6 45a LI FAD IAHE HAME TRIM SLICE EFM b q LIERARY J E 1 RE FhD 1 8 1 C CO ees E CO WEI ACEG_RIFFi DN D EE senes a IR IKEE ALEG_RIFF2 D D lessen B HAL mFBI 4ar Ho REC D D Jean HEHOR HOHITOR TEHF ORIGINAL 1 Bank Selects the sample bank that will be used for each pad 2 Sample name Indicates the name of the
107. numbered tracks will be connected to bus R The screen will display lines to indicate how the sig nals are connected to the track s RECORD track ey 100000000 s izee 4 4 LI DIRECT IMFUT 8 3 8 5 6 76 EUM EOUMICE HIRDOHH FAD l e EQ and dynamics settings will be flat for a track channel whose track has been selected as a record destination e If a single track is selected the pan of the track channel will be centered If a paired track gt p 49 is selected the odd numbered even numbered track channels will be panned to left and right respectively e The connection will be cancelled if you once again press the TRACK SEL key of a currently selected track NOTE D e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as M mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks gt p 143 tracks 9 16 are muted and will not play back e The bit depth of a song can be verified via the SONG screen LIST page 8 For each input channel to which you con nected an instrument or mic press and hold the INPUT SEL key to access the INPUT SETTING popup window and use the GAIN knob to adjust the input level of the signal For details on adjusting the input level refer to Recording to a sound clip gt p 33 Q Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion 10 Raise the track channel fader for the record destinati
108. of data e CLIP Sound clip e 1 16 An audio track e 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST RE The stereo track e PAD A pad track e ALL Audio tracks 1 16 and pad tracks 1 4 NOTE e The data that can actually be selected will depend on the command 4 Select the virtual track or pad that you want to edit If you selected an audio track 1 16 1 2 15 16 STE REO in step 3 the V V TRACK field will appear at the right allowing you to select the virtual track num ber Move the cursor to this field and select a virtual track number 1 8 Virtual track number TE VW I DEun ng nng OOS 00 00 24 000 DI3 EXEC bs ERASE If you selected PAD in step 3 a field allowing you to select pad number will appear at the right Move the cursor to this field and select a number 1 4 Pad number TK FAD H 00 00 08 000 005 00 00 14 000 DDR EXEC 4k ERASE NOTE e For some commands you will need to specify both source and destination tracks What you can do using editing commands WE Specify the editing region Il Execute the command For most commands you will need to set the Start the When you have finished setting parameters execute the beginning of the edited region and End the end of the command edited region parameters to specify the region that will be affected by the comm
109. on Are you using connection cables with built in resistors Does the stereo output channel meter move s the stereo output channel fader raised Is it turned on The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme thresh old or ratio If you are connecting an electric guitar is it connected to the Hi Z jack s the attenuator of the EQ screen or VIEW screen raised Check the level meter movement in the METER page of the VIEW screen f you press the SEL key in the MONITOR screen INIT page that channel will be initialized to default values that allow sound to be output f DIGITAL IN is set to other than DISABLE in the UTILITY screen D IN HDD page and no signal is being input to the DIGITAL INPUT jack a message of WRONG WORD CLOCK will appear and sound will not be output AW1600 Owner s Manual B Input sound is not output s the signal from the external device being input The connection cable from the external device may be broken Are cables connected to both the MIC LINE INPUT 8 XLR TRS connector and the HI Z connector Is the GAIN knob set to an appropriate level s the input channel fader raised Is it turned on The input channel may have been set to DIGITAL IN When recording is the recording destination track fader which adjusts the monitor level raised f you are recording the sound of that inpu
110. p X ul oeJejg SE us Ge 98 F 1 avd HA TdWvs I I IHJ i rod REA 03 I 8 LNO LOx 13S i lauan i i i 19341A HO o tavad n SE GJ YATANVS dOOT MIINO echt 1NO 103138 123uld HO Z4J3 0 paubisse eq jouues ZNYNLIY L343 o paubisse eq jouues JNH 113H i g X Ul 0919 S O ox awar Hiel LO3JJ3 NO I e los awar LEI 193443 193443 I aua Z NHOL3H 123433 TVNH3 LNI 3avosvo SNG oy lt Tvxvoo g NI O3H3LS 1V LIOIG 1N0 193410 H2 o o g x UI ouojy S e ATNO is i l S uogonpeg uies O3 m imi Im i ES E eve I I N ds Ed os wer D D av SEEN INANI o NO 5 o o LHASNI ee SE all o WOLNVHd DEE gr 1ndNI LLNdNI INIT H sng 7Sna8 AW1600 Owners Manual 227 MEMO 228 AW1600 Owners Manual MEMO AW1600 Owner s Manual Il 229 MEMO 230 ll AW1600 Owner s Manual For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser a Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col
111. pad track is muted and the pad is set to LOOP TRIGGER the pad will play if you simply press the PLAY key to play back the recorder This means that you can use this feature as a rhythm machine even without recording on a pad track Grid Recording Step Recording the Pads Here we ll describe how pad performances pad events can be recorded to the pad track via offline non realtime operation Since pad events can be recorded at the beginning of each mea sure this method is useful when you want to align pad timing with the top of each measure Either press the Quick Navigate section RECORD key repeatedly or use the CUR SOR l Y keys while holding the RECORD key to select the RECORD screen PAD page ize 474 MOUI 2 Move the cursor to the GRID button and press ENTER The GRID REC popup window will appear The pad tracks will be displayed on a measure grid CAHCEL EHEC The grid symbols have the following meanings Eege Measure in which a pad event is already recorded er Measure in which a pad event has been recorded via grid recording e Blank Measure in which no pad event is recorded NOTE e A maximum of 999 measures can be displayed edited in the GRID HEC popup window AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 To enter a pad event move the cursor to the measure on the grid for which you want to enter the event then press the appropriate pad e will appear on the grid at the corre
112. point the End point will automati cally move back KS If you select SEC or T C as the counter display format e When the AW1600 transmits MTC to an external device the Start point will be the basis the zero point of the time code that is gen erated The Start point will also be the basis measure 1 beat 1 for the measures displayed in the counter the Start point will be the basis the zero point of the time and time code that are displayed This means that if you change the Start point the display will change as follows depending on the counter display format 0 Relative zero point This locate point stores the relative zero position When e When you create an audio CD the Start and End points can be you press the RTZ kd key in the transport section you used to specify the region of the stereo track that will be written to e P ups the audio CD p 102 will move to this location If the song is in the initial state the relative zero point will be the same as absolute time 00 00 00 000 but you can change this if desired by using key operations or operations in the screen If you select REL as the counter display format the cur rent location will be displayed with the Relative Zero point as 0 AW1600 Owners Manual f 65 Using the locator The following procedure shows how to register the current 3 To move to a locate point you registered location in one of the locate points and then move the press t
113. point and markers that were assigned within the AW1600 song to divide a single continuous song into multiple tracks for writing For example this is convenient when you have recorded a live performance as a single song and want to assign track numbers while leaving the playback in continuous form Start 1 2 End L d i i Start 1 2 End Song B j Y Marker off EN HEN Audio CD Track1 Track2 Track 3 Track 4 NOTE e A track shorter than four seconds cannot be written to an audio CD If you use start point end point markers to divide a song into multiple tracks make sure that each track is at least four seconds long es f the length of the stereo track exceeds the writable length of the media you can create an audio CD by adjusting the start point end point so that the region is within the allowable length gt p 106 Media that you write using Disc At Once will be finalized automatically and can be played back by a CD RW drive or CD player that supports that type of media However no further data can be written to a disc that was written using Disc At Once Basic settings for the CD RW drive Basic settings for the CD RW drive Before you actually write data to a CD you will need to make basic settings for the CD RW drive In the Work Navigate section repeatedly 2 Move the cursor to the AUDIO WRITE press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR A keys to
114. sample that is assigned to the currently selected sample bank 3 NAME button Opens the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can edit the name of the sample 2 Move the cursor to the Bank field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the sample bank whose name you want to edit The sample name is displayed at the right 3 Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear You may use only capital letters numerals and the underscore character 4 When you have finished editing the name move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The popup window will close and the new name will be applied XI Ex c C o Q O D x 9 2 O AW1600 Owner s Manual 121 Trimming the playback region Trimming the playback region Here s how you can view the waveform of the sample assigned to a sample bank and adjust the playback start and end points T In the Quick Sampler Section repeatedly 4 Waveform display press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CUR SOR l V keys to access the SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen ANFLE Fan 1 IL DD 2 252 2 4 BREUI FAD ane HAME TRIM SLICE EFM mh LIBRARY 1 ACORUH_EAS DN CO mem x CO DEI ACEG_RIFFi C3 O sal oss Se TR MIS ACEG_RIFF2 DN g E e l en IB Ho MFBRIIaRICHORUS 1 D D DN WH MEMORY HOWITOR TEMPOS ORIGINAL IC We
115. screen where you can quickly select the signal to be monitored or switch the stereo track playback on off Access indicator This indicator indicates the access status of the internal hard disk When the hard disk is being read or written this indicator will light N CAUTION e Never turn off the power of the AW1600 when the access indi cator is lit Doing so will not only damage the data on the inter nal hard disk but may also damage the hard disk itself When you want to turn off the power of the AW1600 you must per form the shutdown procedure gt p 11 2 Contrast Adjusts the brightness of the display CD SELECT key Hold down this key and press a pad 1 4 to select a pad for operations 2 Pads 1 4 Each of these pads plays back the sample that has been assigned to it 3 SAMPLE EDIT key This key accesses the SAMPLE screen where you can make settings and perform operations for the quick loop sampler Bi Mixer section Parts of the AW1600 and what they do 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 e e co z st C T O O 2 O O A 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 C TRACK SEL keys 1 8 2 TRACK SEL keys 9 10 15 16 3 STEREO SEL key Use these keys to select the mixer track channels or recorder tracks that you want to control Bl Selected Channel section c EQ knob Turning this knob will adjust the EQ equalizer gain for the currently selected channel You can press this kno
116. section repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR V keys to access the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD screen 2 Press the INPUT SEL key or pad that cor responds to the input channel or pad chan nel you want to use to add that channel as a mixdown source g4 00 00 00 000 2 125 4 4 0011 HASTERING LIERARY PI P F3 FH D D a D si si D 3 In the Selected Channel section repeatedly press the PAN BAL knob or hold down the PAN BAL knob and use the CURSOR V keys to access the PAN page of the PAN screen IMFUT 4 Je 00 00 00 000 ac Sos drd MOLT rat OP oO oO o we we ww we d FHASE HMH up HH HH HH HH HH H H PAH 2 k ipa OO oe ex Qo Qo GE SENG IB TITRES TE TIS Se g ZH KRIER FEI FE EZ FH ILE X Q O 2 Q 2 CL o O c O D O O D Q CT O 2 o NOTE P e If the page you see is different than shown above make sure that input channels pad channels are selected as the object of your operations This is shown in the upper left of the screen If track channels are selected press one of the INPUT SEL keys or pads 4 Move the cursor to the PAN knob of the channel you want to use and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the pan setting 92 AW1600 Owner s Manual D In the Selected Channel section repeatedly press the VIEW key or hold down the VIEW key and use the CURSOR A WT ke
117. simulation MID RANGE Simulation of a cabinet with distinctive mid range AW1600 Owner s Manual 179 Mastering library list gt oO O D 2 e x 180 Initial Data Mastering library list Description Initialize to a state in which EQ and DYN are not applied VITAL MIX Standard mastering effect that enhances the overall loudness creating a mix with extended low and high ranges Use on the two track mix for any type of song SOFT COMP Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness without greatly changing the original nuances dynamics Ideal for songs in which the mid and low ranges are important HARD ATTACKY Limiter that emphasizes the attacks and produces an overall flattened feel Ideal for songs that emphasize the rhythm SOFT ATTACKY Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness and emphasizes the attacks without greatly changing the origi nal nuances dynamics Ideal for songs in which the low and mid ranges are important and that emphasize the rhythm LO FI Limiter that produces a lo fi character DARK SOFT Soft limiter that produces the slightly flattened feel characteristic of the 60 s and 70 s Ideal for Beatles type rock of the 60 s and 70 s or more recently for a Vincent Gallo feel DARK HARD Hard limiter that produces a strongly flattened feel characteristic of the 60 s and 70 s Ideal when you want to make the
118. song sound like 60 s or 70 s rock such as the Beatles BRIGHT Compressor that produces a boosted high range LO BOOST Compressor that produces a boosted low range HARD LIMIT Limiter that produces an extremely flattened feel Ideal for hard edged songs LIMITER Limiter without EQ Ideal when you need only limiting NARROW Limiter that produces a sound like that of a small AM radio DIST AW1600 Owner s Manual Limiter that distorts the sound within the effect EQ library list EQ library list These are the preset equalizer settings provided by the library EE 001 Bass Drum 1 Emphasizes the low range of the bass drum and the attack created by the beater 002 Bass Drum 2 Creates a peak around 80Hz producing a tight stiff sound 003 Snare Drum 1 Emphasizes snapping and rimshot sounds 004 Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes the ranges of that classic rock snare drum sound 005 Tom tom 1 Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a long leathery decay 006 Cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending the sparkling decay 007 High Hat Use on a tight high hat emphasizing the mid to high range 008 Percussion Emphasizes the attack and clarifies the high range of instruments such as shakers cabasas and congas 009 E Bass 1 Makes a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low freque
119. sound clip will not be restored if you recall the song data ES e A popup window will also ask you to confirm that you want to exit the CLIP screen if you press a key in the Work Navigate section or Quick Navigate section while playback is stopped in the CLIP screen e The recorded contents of the sound clip are stored for each song AW1600 Owner s Manual KS Oo O c O V e O T O KS O pus O O D PE 37 NC Recording to a sound clip 38 AW1600 Owners Manual Chapter 5 Track recording This chapter explains how to create a new song and record the audio signal from an instrument or mic connected to the AW1600 onto the first track of your song Creating a new song In order to begin recording on the AW1600 you must first create a new song e When you start up the AW1600 for the first time an empty song will be loaded automatically If you use this automatically loaded song the procedure described here is not necessary T In the Work Navigate section either press the SONG key repeatedly or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR A WT keys to access the LIST page IU IHFORT Egg SETUF FOIMT SS DELETE spurpunja coEv JLHEH 2 Move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song COHMFIRAATION Save Current Song 3 Move the cursor to YES to save the current song or NO if you
120. specified in the SONG screen TEMPO page B The sound is not what you loaded or the sound is different depending on whether you are stopped or playing If the playback mode is set to LOOP the sound will play according to the monitor tempo specified in the SAMPLE screen SETUP page while the recorder is stopped and will play according to the song tempo while the recorder is playing E The sound you loaded only plays part of the way Have you made trim settings to shorten the Start End region f the playback mode is set to GATE the sample will play only while you continue pressing the pad If the playback mode is set to LOOP and Slice is turned off the sample will play only for the length of a measure AW1600 Owner s Manual B The display indicates MEMORY FULL and you can t import Access the SAMPLE screen MEMORY page and check the amount of used memory Execute ERASE or EXTRACT to increase the amount of free memory E WAV files to be imported are not displayed Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from the song 16 bit WAV files will not be displayed for a 24 bit song and 24 bit WAV files will not be displayed for a 16 bit song WAV files with sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz will also not be displayed MIDI operations E Can t exchange MIDI data Are the MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly A MIDI cable or USB cable may be broken s the power turned on for the tran
121. the following locate points in out points These locate points are used to specify the region for auto punch in out gt p 59 Normally the beginning and end of the recording you last performed will be automatically set as the In point and Out point However you may change these points as desired Start point 00 00 00 00 00 Counter display format ABS 00 00 00 00 00 100 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 SEC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 T C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 0 A B points RNCHECORONCECONCHONCNCN ON These locate points are used to specify the region for the A B Repeat function p 70 The A point and B point can be set to any point in a song either by pressing a key Start point 00 00 05 00 00 or by operations in the screen Counter display format ABS 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 SEC 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 9 Start end points These locate points normally correspond to the beginning and end of the song When you create a new song the Start point will initially be set to absolute time 00 00 00 000 When you record the end of the song will automatically be set as the End point If you record past lt O C fe gt amp C VT O v S Q gt GA 2 E gt T C 123 59 55 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 eooooo O0O000 C the previously set End
122. the A point and B point This is useful when you want to repeatedly play back a certain region of the song while you adjust the mix 1 Register the A point and B point to the loca tions at which you want the repeated play back to start and end For details on how to set the A point and B point refer to Using markers p 67 e If you set the B point earlier than the A point the B gt A region will play repeatedly While the transport is stopped press the REPEAT key The REPEAT key will light and the A B Repeat function will be on The song will automatically locate to the A point NOTE P e The A and B points must be at least one second apart If they are closer than this a message of REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE will appear when you press the REPEAT key and repeat playback will not be possible AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 To begin repeat playback press the PLAY gt key Playback will begin from the A point When you reach the B point you will automatically return to the A point and continue playback e Playback will stop automatically when the A B region has been repeated 99 times e If you press the REPEAT key while the song is playing repeat playback between the A and B points will begin auto matically regardless of the current position 4 To stop playback press the STOP W key Playback will stop but the A B Repeat function will remain turned on When the A B Repeat func
123. the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR uf keys to access the TEMPO page The TEMPO page lets you create a tempo map that specifies the tempo and time signature of the song The tempo and time signature that you specify here will be the basis for the measure beat display counter the internal metronome and the MIDI clock messages generated by the AW 1600 LIST IHFORT LOCATE SETUP ilnELETE FOIHT TEMFO SHUTDHH D o Lus O O D 2 x O Tempo map events These are the events recorded in the tempo map When you create a new song a tempo map event of time sig nature 4 4 and tempo 120 will be created at the beginning of the song measure 1 beat 1 Move the cursor to the TEMPO field of the event and turn the DATA JOG dial to set the tempo value You can set a tempo in a range of 30 250 BPM If necessary move the cursor to the METER field and turn the DATA JOG dial to change the time signature You can set a time signature in a range of 1 4 8 4 ES e t is also possible to change the tempo or time signature dur ing a song For details refer to Song management gt p 143 e It is also possible to use the Quick Loop Sampler as a rhythm machine instead of the metronome For details refer to Using sample libraries gt p 113 AW1600 Owners Manual 47 Recording on a track Recor
124. the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key While data is being written to the media a popup win dow will indicate CD Writing When writing is completed a popup window will ask you whether you want to finalize COHFIRHRTIGEH Final ize This Medid CANCEL NOTE P e Ifan error message of BUFFER UNDERRUN appears while writing a buffer underrun has occurred In this case either decrease the writing speed to 4x or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to the ENABLE position p 103 e If you enabled the writing test in Basic settings for the CD RW drive p 103 a writing test will be performed before the data is actually written If a problem occurs during the writing test an error message will appear e Copy prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD that is created Q To finalize the disc move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you do not want to finalize the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key This completes the writing process e O Q O Wa Le Wa O E Ces Wa Be O AW1600 Owner s Manual 105 Writing audio data Disc At Once O e D A gt e RV RV c ex Oo U 106 Writing audio data Disc At Once Here s how to use the Disc At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD R RW media Use this method if you do not want to create
125. the following presets e 00 Cubase 01 Logic e 02 Sonar 03 ProTools These presets let you use the AW1600 as a physical con troller for various software sequencers e TRACK SEL key operations will control mute on off operations on the sequencer software Fader operations will control the volume of the sequencer software tracks You will need to install the appropriate setting file into your sequencer software and make the necessary settings For details refer to the Appendix section About the CD ROM included with the AW 1600 gt p 209 04 Volume RecTr Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone generator or the recording tracks of an external recorder e TRACK SEL key operations will transmit MMC com mands to select recording tracks Fader operations will transmit Volume control changes CC 07 AW1600 Owner s Manual e 05 Volume Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone generator e TRACK SEL key operations will transmit Volume control change messages CC 07 e When you turn a TRACK SEL key off dark volume 0 will be transmitted e When you turn a TRACK SEL key on lit green the volume value corresponding to the fader position will be transmitted e When a TRACK SEL key is on operating the fader will transmit Volume control change messages CC 07 06 XG 1 16 07 XG 17 32 08 XG 33 48 09 XG 49 64 These presets let you use t
126. the keys of the transport section while using the MIDI Remote function 2 Selected channel Indicates the name of the channel that is currently selected for operations e When you operate a fader 1 8 or 9 10 15 16 or a TRACK SEL key 1 8 or 9 10 15 16 the displayed contents of the page will change to the corresponding channel 3 Fader TRACK SEL key function name Displays the name that 1s assigned to the currently dis played fader or TRACK SEL key 4 NAME button Edits the name that is assigned to the fader TRACK SEL key Move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key and the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear AW1600 Owner s Manual V Cc 9 O c gt Zeen gt z gt O 165 Using the MIDI Remote function z 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pe O 2 LI 166 5 ALL INIT button Resets all MIDI messages assigned to the faders TRACK SEL keys to the initial settings To initialize move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key 6 FADER button If you turn this button on the MIDI message assigned to the fader of the currently selected channel will be dis played This button will automatically be turned on when you operate the fader of a track channel 7 SEL SW button If you turn this button on the MIDI message assigned to the TRACK SEL key of the currently selected channel will be displayed This button will auto
127. the left of this value is displayed the locate point or marker that was passed most recently 4 Counter right side This indicates the current location within the song in units of measures beats The measures beats are calculated according to the tempo and time signature specified in the tempo map for the song The current tempo and time sig nature are displayed at the left of this value 5 Main screen The information displayed in this area will depend on the key that was last pressed The following types of object are displayed in the main screen e Cursor The blinking frame within the display LEVEL is called the cursor When an object in the screen is enclosed by the cursor E that object is selected for operations AW1600 Owner s Manual 9 Buttons Buttons in the display are used to HAVEFORH switch a parameter on off to select ET one of multiple choices or to exe cute a specific function A button that is currently on will be dis played in black with white text A button that is currently off will be displayed in white with black text e Knob fader parameter display area The knob fader parameter display area within the dis play is used to edit the value of the corresponding parameter LEWEL FADER REN TIHE Cy IH TDL 36 nz Knob fader parameter display area Page display area Most screens are divided by func tion into two or more pages The page display area lists the pages that can
128. the song for details on 7 To create the new song move the cursor to assigning a name gt p 25 the OK button and press the ENTER key A new song will be created and you will return to the SONG screen LIST page e If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key you will return to the SONG screen LIST page without creating a new song e You may also edit the song name later gt p 145 Direct recording and Bus recording Instruments mics connected to the AW1600 can be assigned to tracks in one of the following two Ways E Direct recording With this method input channels are assigned to tracks in a one to one correspondence This method requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels you use However this method has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume pan stereo position and tone of each instrument after it has been recorded zi Q Q s lt D Q O x CL 2 Q Synthesizer rhythm machine a Stereo output channel Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Mixer section 40 El AW1600 Owners Manual Direct recording and Bus recording E Bus recording With this method you can send multiple input channels to the L R bus and assign the mixed signal to one or
129. to the NAME button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to edit the song name SS CANCEL 4 Input the new name Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The new name will be applied and the popup window will close For details on inputting a name p 25 AW1600 Owner s Manual c ab E o CH O c O o 145 CD 5 a 3 RV 5 Q D D 5 t 146 Editing various settings for the song Editing various settings for the song Here s how to make various settings for a song such as switching protect on off and selecting the counter display format and time code format NOTE P dure load the song whose settings you want to edit T In the Work Navigate section press the SONG key The SONG screen will appear 2 Repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR l V keys to access the SETUP page SONG track 1 10 00 00 000 2 126 440010 LIST dcugREHTsOMG SRU_Boogje SSE i IHFORT ed e E PROTECT IBEIT HO EENE a FAINT 3 counter pisPLav ETERCeEL Sec Cc Jen d TEMPO 1 TT rsttass 30 SHUTDHH J TIHE CODE EASE 24 J EE TROU This page contains the following items a PROTECT button Switches protect on off 2 COUNTER DISPLAY Selects the display format for the counter that appears in the center of the t
130. to the From WAVE file field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the WAV file that you want to import To move to a lower level display the 9 icon in this field then move the cursor to the ENTER button in the screen and press the ENTER key To move to the next higher level display the E icon in this area then move the cursor to the UP button and press the ENTER key 8 If you are importing from audio CD or CD Extra use the From Start and From End fields to specify the region that will be imported AW1600 Owner s Manual D E E o x O 141 Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files Q Use the To TR To V TR and To Start fields to specify the track number virtual track num ber and starting location into which the data will be imported 10 When you have finished making settings move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion COHFIRHRTIGH Execute CD IMPORT 7 cer Ca 11 To execute the import operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will begin If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key import ing will be cancelled ES e Even after you press the ENTER key you can press the UNDO REDO key to return to the state prior to importing as long as you have not executed any editing or recording opera tion since the import N
131. track is sent to the stereo bus passes through the stereo output channel and is recorded on the stereo track At this time you also add the signals from pad channels 1 4 and input channels 1 8 e Signal flow during mixdown Recorder section ic i PHONES O O OUT O O O UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV MIC LINE il i INPUT jacks Track Channels DNE 1 16 channel Stereo bus v c KS Ces C Ben ab Q O O c gt O O O c O Ke X aj el BI 4 Pad Input gea DAU EERI Eis r r 1 2 3 as STEREO vv v Mixer section AW1600 Owner s Manual 81 About mixdown and bouncing Bounce is the process by which the signals recorded on The diagram below shows the signal flow during bounc multiple tracks are mixed to the stereo bus and re ing This process differs from mixdown in several points recorded on one or two other tracks This process is also you use the L R bus instead of the stereo bus only the called ping pong recording track channels are the recording sources and that the recording destination is one or two vacant tracks This diagram shows an example in which the track 1 8 signals are bounced to tracks 9 10 After bouncing you can switch the virtual tracks for tracks 1 8 and use these tracks to record other in
132. tracks 1 16 2 From V TR 1 8 Specify a point Beginning of the audio track region that will be written 1 From TR Virtual track number 3 From Start Specify a point End of the audio track region that 4 From End will be wrtteh Displays the name of the file to which the data will be written Up to eight alphanumeric characters 5 File Name 1 The name of the individual source track or odd numbered track in the case of a pair will be assigned by default 3 Move the cursor to the From TR field and select the audio track that you want to write If you select 1 16 the current tracks of tracks 1 16 will be written as separate monaural WAV files If you select 1 16 the single specified track will be written as a monaural WAV file If you select 1 2 15 16 or ST the specified pair of tracks or the STEREO track will be written as a ste reo WAV file 4 If you selected 1 16 1 2 15 16 or ST as the source for exporting move the cursor to the From V TR From Start and From End fields and specify the virtual track number and region that will be exported e If you selected 1 16 as the export source the current tracks for all sixteen tracks will be exported automatically It is not possible to specify the virtual track number for each 5 When you have finished setting the param eters move the cursor to the EXEC button and press t
133. two tracks This method requires fewer tracks However you will need to decide on the final volume pan and tone of each instrument at the time of recording You will not be able to adjust these independently after recording Synthesizer rhythm machine wm 33336300 D E O O O o x Stereo mee output channels je channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STEREO Recorder section Track 1 man ERR Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Mixer section Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 NOTE e The way in which you assign the input signals to tracks will depend on the method you choose AW1600 Owners Manual 41 I Q Q s lt D Q O x Q 2 Q Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 Connect instruments mics to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 3 In the Quick Navigate section either press the RECORD key repeatedly or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR l V keys to access the DIRECT page of the RECORD screen QUICK NAVIGATE RECORD MONITOR The INPUT SEL keys and TRACK SEL keys will blink red 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e Xe Xe 490 X X XA i194 v4 vex v ex4 v 4 534 vx CTT D Co EA PX PAX FA XA PA PA pA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 STEREC E odi 4 KL dy a e 4 fib 4 di 4 4 4 ZE AE Sib i gt al J The screen will indicate how i
134. use a setting of 16 if the shortest note value in the original phrase is a sixteenth note a setting of 12 for eighth note triplets or a setting of 8 for eighth notes e f the Slice function is OFF the waveform will play from the beginning of the measure without being divided If the wave form is longer than one measure it may not play completely 4 Move the cursor to the MONITOR TEMPO field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select SONG The MONITOR TEMPO field selects one of the fol lowing as the basic tempo at which the phrase will be played if you play the sample while the recorder is stopped ORIGINAL The original tempo of the sample shown in the BPM field e SONG The tempo specified by the tempo map e 30 250 The numerically specified tempo If you select SONG the playback timing of each seg ment will be adjusted according to the tempo that is specified by the tempo map for the current location Using the Slice function The following diagram shows how for a sample with an original tempo of 100 BPM the playback timing of each segment will change at a song tempo of 120 BPM or 80 BPM When song tempo 120 Original sample tempo 100 VA When song tempo 80 segment N D Strike the pad to hear the result If the playback of the sample is broken in an unnatural way go back to step 3 and try changin
135. use the Disk Utility to temporarily un mount the appropriate volume and then mount it again AW1600 Owner s Manual 7 Open the appropriate drive folder and copy the required WAV files or directly edit the WAV files using a waveform editor applica tion To access the Transport folder open the AW 1600 2 drive To directly access WAV files on the AW1600 open the Song folder on the AW1600 1 drive and the Song folder on the AW1600 2 drive These fold ers contain folders bearing the names of the recorded songs extension AWS and those folders further con tain folders labeled Audio that contain the actual audio data To backup a complete song to the com puter simply copy the folder bearing the name of the song you want to backup to the computer Refer to Song Folder Organization on page 144 for information on how the folders are organized e Verification and repair of the internal hard disk can be carried out from the computer From a Windows computer enter the chkdsk command at the command prompt or from a Macin tosh computer running OS X use the Disk Utility First Aid function e For 24 bit songs the audio data contained in the Audio fold ers is stored in 32 bit WAV format If your waveform editor application cannot handle 32 bit data first export the WAV file s to the Transport folder WAV files imported or exported via the Transport folder are automa
136. 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 95 E DELAY LCR Parameter DELAY L 0 0 2730 0 ms Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Left channel delay time DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 95 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 O ef Q Q lt 189 Effects Parameters E ECHO Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB G L 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain plu
137. 00 000 2 1ze 6 4 4 IL LIT SACH EE Eorra z4 BH 24 PT E1 5H 16 pua m mu eas TEMPO CEACE Teen Fi SHUTDHH SB This page contains the following items C LIBRARY button Imports all libraries into the current song 2 SCENE button Imports all scenes into the current song 3 TRACK button Imports the audio data of a single track into the current song 4 TEMPO MAP button Imports the tempo map into the current song 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song from which you want to import data The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the song you have selected as the import source NOTE e The songs whose bit depth differs from the current song can not be imported B importing library scene tempo map data 4 Move the cursor to either the LIBRARY SCENE or TEMPO MAP button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the import operation COHMFIRAATIOM Import Selected temz SS 5 To execute the import move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will begin When the data has been imported you will return to the screen of step 2 Bil importing a specific track 4 Move the cursor to the TRACK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to select the track to be imported 2e ect 2 0lBCE Track K l DLE MEN TRACE 1 WTR MAME EU Th 1 SS E Song management E oe i TRACK Spec
138. 00 Owner s Manual Chapter 11 Quick loop sampler This chapter explains how to use the Quick Loop Sampler section About the quick loop sampler The AW1600 contains a quick loop sampler that lets you play stereo waveforms samples by striking the four pads QUICK LOOP SAMPLER See m m m Each pad 1 4 has four sample banks A D to which you 9 Signal flow when using the Quick Loop can assign samples By switching the sample bank for Sampler each pad you can use up to sixteen different samples Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 hall one T STEREO AUX OUT MONITOR OUT B B B Lag wll UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV L5 a IEs Re I Sample banks When you strike a pad 1 4 the assigned sample will be sent via pad channel 1 4 to the stereo bus For each pad channel you can adjust the EQ dynamics and effects 1 2 send levels just as you can for the track channels or input channels Pad Stereo channels output channel XI Q c o Q O D x 9 2 O Stereo bus Mixer section You can load samples into the pads from the sample library a library for the Quick Loop Sampler load a por tion of an audio track or audio CD or load a WAV file AW1600 Owners Manual 111 About the quick loop sampler A sample can be played back in one of two ways One In addition you can choose either Gate mode which shot mode plays the sample once from start to end
139. 00 is in Stereo Track Playback mode this operation cannot be exe cuted THIS SONG IS PROTECTED This song is protected and cannot be edited or recorded TOO MANY REGIONS The maximum allowable number of regions has been exceeded UNDO COMPLETED Undo cancellation of the previous operation has been executed USB STORAGE MODE NOW Since the AW1600 is in USB Storage mode this operation cannot be executed WRONG WORD CLOCK AW1600 Owner s Manual An inappropriate word clock is being received from the connected device to which you are synchronizing A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track E Popup messages ALL Song Data Corrupt Format INT HDD Display message list The file system is corrupt The internal hard disk will be initialized Audio Data Too Short The sample is too short Buffer Underrun A buffer underrun error was encountered while writing to the CD CD Import Prohibited Enable DIGITAL REC Can t import from a CD because DIGITAL REC is prohibited CD or HD Access Error An error was encountered while accessing the internal hard disk or CD RW drive CD RW Drive Not Found A problem occurred with the CD RW drive Change Media Different Archive ID The medium contains the wrong backup file Insert the correct medium Change Media Wrong Media Order Please exchange the media The order of media
140. 025 027 Female Vo 1 Use as a template for female vocal Adjust the HIGH or H MID setting according to the voice quality 028 Female Vo 2 This is a variation on program 027 029 Chorus amp Harmo Use as a template for a chorus It makes the entire chorus much brighter 030 Total EQ 1 Use on the STEREO bus during mixdown For more effect try it with a compressor 031 Total EQ 2 This is a variation on program 030 032 Total EQ 3 This is a variation on program 030 Also use these programs for stereo inputs or external effect returns 033 Bass Drum 3 This is a variation on program 001 The low and mid range is removed 034 Snare Drum 3 This is a variation on program 003 It creates rather thick sound 035 Tom tom 2 This is a variation on program 005 Emphasizes the mid and high range 036 Piano 3 This is a variation on program 013 037 Piano Low Use for the low range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo Use with program 038 038 Piano High Use for the high range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo Use with program 037 039 Fine EQ Cass Use for recording to or from cassette tape to make the sound clearer 040 Narrator Use for recording a voice reading a text 041 128 e The EQ programs were programmed for recording acoustic musical instruments If you are using them for a samp
141. 1 16 1 2715 16 or ST their location relative to the audio data 2 8 From PAD and 40 To PAD can be selected only if TR PAD AW1600 Owner s Manual 132 List of editing commands 3 Measure lock function Start Measure Lock 7 End Measure For an audio track Lock Measure Lock allows a measure beat to be specified within a region Start End to be copied so that it aligns with the specified measure beat in the copy destination For example in a situation in which you have an From abstract or rubato segment before the in tempo performance begins Track you can Measure Lock the beginning of the in tempo segment so that it is copied to the appropriate location in the destination To use the measure lock function To Track move the cursor to the measure dis jS oog CIA play field of From Start or From End au 000 DIJI o To Start specify the measure beat location that Ab GR lE iL MOVE will be the reference point for the Wold B3d lx 1 From matching and press the ENTER key Track MER 2 3 RN f a A lock icon will appear beside the value that you specified and the measure lock function will be turned on for From Start or From End This can be turned on for either Start or End not both To ae e e T While the measure lock function is on the value of that measure dis Track play format setting will be fixed and cannot be modified In this state if you use the counter display format f
142. 1 EXIT button Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press ENTER to exit from the PITCH FIX mode and return to the BOUNCE page AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 BYPASS button To monitor the vocal track prior to pitch correction move the cursor to this button and press ENTER 3 From TR Indicates the track to be edited the source track This field is only for display and cannot be edited 4 To TR V TR Indicates the track and virtual track to which the pro cessed source track will be recorded the destination track This field is only for display and cannot be edited 5 CTRL Selects the method of pitch correction shift from the three ways below e SCALE Specify the scale via received MIDI notes to adjust the pitch For example if you play a chord on a connected MIDI keyboard the pitch is shifted by the notes included in the chord e NOTE The pitch is changed according to the received MIDI note e PANEL This lets you adjust the pitch by speci fying a scale from the keyboard on the display 6 TYPE Sets this to an appropriate value to maximize the accu racy of the pitch change of the original signal Gener ally this should be set to Normal however for low vocals set this to Male and for high vocals set it to Female T DETECT This determines the time resolution for pitch change The shorter the setting the more quickly the pitch change is recognized The longer the set
143. 188 Effects Parameters Effects Parameters E REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE Parameter REV TIME Range Description 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E R BAL 0 100 Balance of early reflections and reverb 096 ER 100 reverb HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD 0 02 ms 2 13 s Gate open time DECAY 6 0 ms 46 0 s Gate closing speed MIX BAL 0 100 E EARLY REF Parameter TYPE Range Description S Hall L Hall Random Revers Plate Spring Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
144. 19 O Q A O O O WA Q D 120 Importing From a Computer To the Pads Importing From a Computer fo the Pads WAV files imported into the AW1600 from a computer via the USB interface can be assigned to the pads B importing WAV files from a computer With the AW1600 connected to a computer via a USB cable copy the required file s from the computer s hard disk to the Transport folder in the AW1600 For details see Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer on page 137 WE Assigning WAV files to the pads 1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section repeat edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR V YV keys to access the WAV IMPORT page of the SAMPLE screen ED HauIMPORT sean o CH Weg nn We TE IHF HAVE d eae poe LISTEH IB MA IHF EHEC 05 DUU p 30 MEMORV wenn P EIERE een PE 48 FAL 1 EAHE A C HO REC LR This page contains the following items a From WAVE File Specifies the WAV file that will be imported 2 LISTEN button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the currently selected WAV file will be played back repeatedly 3 To PAD Selects the pad number 1 4 to which the WAV file will be imported 44 To BANK Selects the sample bank A D to which the WAV file will be imported 5 NAME Indicates the name of the sample that is currently
145. 2 Pad channels 1 4 DIGITAL STEREO IN jack Buses L R AUX buses 1 2 Effect buses 1 2 Stereo buses L R Stereo output channel Recorder input patching x2 x16 x16 Quick loop sampler Recorder WAV File Import e e co z lt C T O O 2 O O La the AW1600 STEREO AUX OUT jacks DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack x2 Le Effect 1 N Internal effects x2 Ao Effect 2 x2 CD Play CD Write Data Backup Restore CD RW drive Now let s take a more detailed look at each section of the AW1600 Bl Mixer section Full fledged mixer with 36 input channels The AW1600 contains a digital mixer with a total of 36 input channels including analog inputs x 8 stereo digital input x 1 recorder tracks x 16 and effect returns x 2 Audio quality is guaranteed by 24 bit AD DA and 32 bit internal processing A Hi Z input jack for directly con necting an electric guitar or bass is also provided Totally redesigned operation The AW1600 is designed to be operated directly by the musician guitarist vocalist drummer etc With a mini mum number of steps you can assign input signals to tracks switch the monitor signal and record with effects EQ and dynamics processing applied Four band EQ and dynamics processors on each channel Four band full parametric EQ and dynamics processing is provided on virtually every channel You can recall the desired
146. 2 RECALL button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to load the currently selected data 3 EXIT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window e You can also access the EQ library by pressing the EQ knob of the Selected Channel section For details refer to Using libraries and scene memories p 73 AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the library that you want to use and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the library recall operation COHFIRHRTIGH Recall Fe Lib Fuss CANCEL 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The selected library will be loaded 5 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key 6 If you want to adjust the EQ settings press the HIGH key HI MID key LO MID key or LOW key of the Selected Channel sec tion to select the band and turn the EQ knob to adjust the amount of boost cut e f turning the EQ knob does not change the tone check whether EQ may have been turned off for that channel gt p 95 e If necessary you can also adjust the frequency and Q param eters of each band For details refer to Using libraries and scene memories gt p 73 Using the dynamics library Using the dynamics library The dynamics library contains dynamics settings suitable for a variety of instruments As for the EQ l
147. 4 Switching a button ondoft 25 Editing a value in the display 25 jalelWiir aie rc EE 25 Using the Selected Channel section 26 3 Listening to the demo song 27 Connect external devices and turn on the power 27 Loading the demo song 28 Playing the demo song 29 Mixing the demo song 30 4 Recording to a sound clip 33 Connecting your instrument or mic 33 Adjusting the input level cccccceeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeeees 34 Recording playing a sound clip 35 9 Track recording 39 Creating a new song ccccccccceeeeeaseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaas 39 Direct recording and Bus recording 40 Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording 42 Assigning input signals to tracks Bus recording 45 Enabling the metronome nnsnonennnnennennnnnensnnnnnnnnnnnne 47 Recording On a WACK ONE TR 48 Pairing input channels track channels 49 Using the input Iran 50 Using th EQ library NR OE 52 Using the dynamics library sse 59 B Overdubbing 55 About overdubbing cccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaaeeeeeees 55 Assigning the input signal to a track 56 Instantly recalling an EQ library 56 Instantly recalling a dynamics library
148. 5 5 1 e Logic Pro 7 0 1 e Nuendo 3 0 1 e Nuendo 3 0 1 e Sonar 4 0 1 Producer e Protools TDM 6 7 Edition 1 Use the setting file from the included CD ROM to map the AW1600 s faders TRACK SEL keys transport keys to the Logic key commands Track assignments must be made within Logic as appropriate for your system 2 Select the CS 10 settings as the MIDI controller type For details on the CS 10 settings ask Digidesign AW1600 Owner s Manual V Cc 9 O c gt Zeen gt z gt O a 163 Using the MIDI Remote function z 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pe O 2 LI 164 To access the PRESET page of the REMOTE screen repeatedly press the Work Navigate section REMOTE key or hold down the REMOTE key and use the CUR SOR A Vr V keys ES e The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while this page is displayed The track channel faders and TRACK SEL keys will not perform their usual functions but will work as specified by the preset you have selected in the PRESET page OH TRAMSFORT E ILL rj iecit Protool WOT umer Re Tr This page contains the following items 1 List Select one of the ten presets shown in this list The line enclosed in the dotted frame is the currently selected pre set When you turn the DATA JOG dial to select another preset the MIDI message assignments will be switched immediately The AW 1600 provides
149. 6 0 s Decay speed LSHT 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds gt xe O D 2 e x 194 l AW1600 Owners Manual Effects Parameters E REV CHORUS Parameter Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEP 0 100 Pitch modulation depth AM DEP 0 100 Amp modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV CHO 0 100 Reverb and chorus balance 0 chorus 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 E REV CHORUS Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
150. 68 LO MID key 19 Loop MOQE esie ratto pense 112 123 Beie 19 M Manual punch in out 59 VARK t 20 MARK SEARCH key 20 MAKET EE 67 Adjusting the position 68 Erasing NER T RET 69 Teo g MEHREREN 67 ET MNT 68 Beete EEN 68 LOCATOR button 68 Locator point marker display area 68 MARKER E 68 MARKER button 68 MEAS EE 69 POSITION siepe epor o ponto geen 68 MARKER button 68 Mastering library 78 library A E 180 Recall eee 78 MASTERING LIBRARY popup window 78 MEA S ERR ER TERR 68 BY CCIE EOS 101 SIAC E 109 message list 206 metronome ener 47 Metronome button 36 47 Metronome knob 36 MIC LINE INPUT jack 21 33 MIC LINE INPUT jack Hi Z 21 33 ru m t 157 misc EE 158 CTRL CHG MODE 160 DEV device number 159 IN PORT CELER 158 MIDI e m ONES 160 MIDI data format 215 MIDI Remote 163 MMC MODE rn 159 MTC MODE een 159 OUT PORT EE 158 PGM CHG MODE 160 SOULS aocucsonccimdtkc ix Debe Uc ms dk 158 SYNG OUT EE 158 WMG we 158 MIDI data format
151. 69 Bl Playing a sound clip To hear the content that you recorded in the sound clip press the PLAY P key The region from where you began recording to where you stopped recording will play repeatedly To stop press the STOP W key If you record again the previ ous data will be overwritten In the CLIP screen the keys of the Transport section will have the following functions Function Returns to the location at which you began recording If the CLIP button is on this returns to the Start point RTZ tal key Rewinds the current location toward the beginning You will stop when you reach the location at which you began recording or the Start point REW lt lt key Fast forwards the current location You will stop when you reach the location at which you stopped recording or the End point FF gt gt key Stops playback recording rewind or fast STOP W key forward Starts playback Pressing this key during playback does nothing PLAY gt key If you hold down this key while stopped and press the PLAY We key recording will begin Pressing this key during play back does nothing REC 0 key e You will not hear the metronome and pads 1 4 while a sound clip is playing However you can still monitor the signals of input channels 1 8 2 If you want to change the playback region of the sound clip stop at the location that you want to specify as the Star
152. 99 starting at bo ACK E UT ch a the beginning of the song If you register a new marker between two existing markers subsequent markers i This icon will remain visible until you play or rewind will be automatically renumbered upward fast forward past the previous or next locate point or marker location Register a new marker Markers that you register are displayed in the TRACK lt O C fe gt amp o Oo i et Q Ww 2 9 G screen VIEW page or PAD page as shown below ES 1 z E a E TRACK FAD rE 201 4128 8 4 4 IE EZ TRACE Fao x iL E r Ho REC 1 l z m amp is m m ES e Marker settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the DO o g Marker icon SOng e Markers other than the marker displayed at the left of the e Markers can be deleted gt p 69 or moved gt p 68 as counter are shown as icons without a number and indicate desired their approximate location e If you press the MARK key at a location in which a marker has already been registered the display will indicate CAN NOT SET MARK and a new marker will not be created e When creating an audio CD you can use markers to divide the stereo track into the tracks that will be written to the audio CD gt p 102 AW1600 Owners Manual 67 lt Q SCH O c o p lt O D LI O A 2 fo lt o Q Q A 68 Adjusting the position of a locate point or marke
153. ALING NAR DEKSEL PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPNAD STR LEN R FARLIG VARO KURSSI 3B N KYV JA N KYM T N AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE L KATSO S TEESEN CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM Handling the CD R RW media Please observe the following points when handling the disc Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost the drive to malfunction or the printed label to become blurred e Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight high temperature or high humidity e Do not touch the recording surface of the disc Hold the disc at the edges e Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disc Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may scratch the disc e If the disk surface needs cleaning wipe gently from the center to the outside of the disk with a soft damp cloth then gently wipe off remaining moisture in the same way with a clean dry cloth Do not write on the disc or affix labels to it Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents Do not bend or drop the disc AW1600 Owner s Manual 9 6 Internal Hard Disk Precautions During some hard disk operations a small amount of vibration might be felt at the control panel and y
154. AME button sort alphabetically OLD button sort by save date or SIZE button sort by size AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song The Only One EE STEREO 3 II 2 1z26 5 4 4 LI BEEN prora IHFORT ee ee ZE mur MAGA oep DELETE SAVE spuurpunj3 coEv JLHEH J THES RAIN 4 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the screen and press the ENTER key ET A popup window like the following will appear This window asks you whether you want to save the current song COHFIRHRTIOH Tem a Dur t m 5 Move the cursor to either YES save the cur rent song or NO don t save the current song and press the ENTER key The song data will be loaded and The Only One will become the current song NOTE e If you select NO any changes that you made to the current song since you last saved it will be lost You re the Only One Timothy Akers Playing the demo song Playing the demo song Here s how to play back the demo song you loaded and adjust the monitor level Either press the VIEW key repeatedly or 3 Press the PLAY W key hold down the VIEW key and use the CUR SOR l Y keys to access the VIEW screen METER page RTZ REW FF m m SELECTED CHANNEL iem d H y STOP P REC The demo song will begin playing and the level of each track channel will be displayed in the METER page of the VIEW screen 4 To adjust the mo
155. B points are not specified CANNOT DEFEAT MUTE Mute cannot be disengaged because the simultaneous playback limit will be exceedced CANNOT REDO Redo re execution of an operation is not possible CANNOT SET MARK It is not possible to specify a mark at an already specified position CANNOT UNDO Undo cancellation of an operation is not possible CD PLAY MODE NOW Since the AW1600 is in CD Play mode this operation cannot be executed CH PARAMETER INITIALIZED The mixer parameters of the channel have been initialized DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received DISK BUSY The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough or the reading speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented DISK FULL There is insufficient space on the internal hard disk IN OUT POINTS NOT FOUND Auto punch recording cannot be performed because in out points are not specified IN OUT POINTS REVERSE ORDER In out points are set in wrong order IN OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE The auto punch in out interval is too short It cannot be set less than approximately 100 msec LIBRARY FOR EFFECT2 ONLY The selected parameter is for Effect 2 only LIBRARY PROTECTED The selected parameter is protected LIBRARY READ ONLY The selected parameter is read only LOCATE POINT ERASED Th
156. C For details on the settings in this case refer to the section that follows Recording playing AW1600 mix operations on the worksta tion s sequencer AW1600 Owner s Manual v E gt D O i Ben o T x o C e e co z st ab X ES CH E GA 171 c a 2 Q J 2 D Z O O O t 2 D gt lt t D 2 D Q D O D o 172 Using the AW1600 with a workstation synth Recording playing AW1600 mix operations on the workstation s sequencer Here s how you can synchronize the AW1600 and the built in sequencer of your workstation synth and use the sequencer to record play the fader and pan operations you perform on the AW 1600 Since operating the AW1600 s mix parameters will cause a large number of control change messages to be transmit ted we will use MIDI Clock which uses less data as the synchronization signal rather than MTC Connect the AW1600 and your workstation as shown in the following diagram MIDI Clock Control change aE MIDI OUT MIDI IN Dp oE WUES worm mio MIDI OUT Synthesizer with built in sequencer Control change AW1600 2 In the Work Navigate section use the UTIL ITY key to access the MIDI 2 page of the UTILITY screen Turn on the MASTER but ton in the MTC MODE area and turn on the CLK button in the SYNC OUT area With these settings the
157. DATA JOG dial to select the program change number whose assignment you want to change 3 Move the cursor to the scene in the list and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the correspond ing program change number Using the AW1600 with a workstation synth 4 Repeat steps 3 4 to assign the desired scenes to other program change numbers e If you want to reset the scene assignments to the initial set ting move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the ENTER key Bil Iransmit program changes to switch scenes Connect the AW1600 and your workstation synth as shown in the diagram below a MM Olio ic i i MIDI IN MIDI OUT sm TERR AW1600 Synthesizer with built in sequencer Program change 2 In the Work Navigate section use the UTIL ITY key to access the MIDI 2 page of the UTILITY screen 00 00 00 000 2 126 a a EE HIDI 1 zen OUT HHC HODE HTC HODE HIDI CH I3 Hm i HIDI cel tga tag T l RS SEN SLAVE TzteurEl PH i FREFER H CTRL CHG UsE HODE OFF OF2T 00 00 00 00 00 3 Set the PGM CHG MODE field to RX With this setting the AW1600 will receive program changes 4 Move the cursor to RX in the MIDI CH area and select the MIDI channel on which MIDI messages will be received 5 Transmit a program change message from your workstation synth to the AW1600 on
158. DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE Parameter TYPE Range Description Type A Type B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 AW1600 Owner s Manual Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Effects Parameters E MONO DELAY Parameter Description DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time FB
159. EL key for the channel that you want to initialize When you press a key or pad the upper line of the screen will indicate CH PARAMETER INITIAL IZED and the corresponding channel will be initial ized Channel library 00 will be recalled An initialized channel will have the following mix parameter settings Input channel Pad channel Track channel Phase no change no change no change 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB EQ ON ON ON EQ parameters Attenuation default flat default flat default flat Dynamics on off EK OFF OFF Dynamics type Dynamics parameters COMP COMP COMP no effect no effect no effect If paired L channel 2 L16 R channel R16 If unpaired center L channel L16 R channel R16 If paired L channel L16 R channel R16 If unpaired center 0 dB 0 dB no change If FADER FLIP is set to TRACK in the UTILITY screen PREFER page Editing the EQ parameters The chapters entitled Track recording and Overdub bing explained how to load an EQ library and use the Selected Channel section EQ knob to make adjustments Here s how you can make more detailed adjustments to the EQ parameters Press an INPUT SEL key a pad 1 4 a TRACK SEL key or the STEREO SEL key to select the channel whose EQ you want to adjust 2 If desired load library data from the EQ library 3 Repeatedly press the Selected Channel section
160. EO track while recording on other tracks E Noise is present in the recorded signal The oscillator may be functioning e Does the word clock setting match for the AW 1600 and the external device s Go to the RECORD screen in the Quick Navigate section and check the recording source and recording destination E Can t select a record track The number of 24 bit song tracks that can be recorded or played simultaneously is limited Something wrong with the sound E Signal from the INPUT 8 jack is too loud A conventional line level signal may be connected to the Hi Z jack B Sound is distorted Is the GAIN knob set correctly The connection cable from the external device may be broken The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be raised excessively The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised exces sively The EQ or dynamics processor may have been set to pro duce an extreme gain boost Did you record at an appropriate level Go to the VIEW screen METER page and check the level meter movement s the word clock setting correct for both the AW1600 and the external device s An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in use B The volume of a particular channel increases or decreases Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate A scene recall may be specified in the SONG screen TEMPO page
161. ER Effects library list Description Dynamically controlled filter Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI Dyna Phaser Bl Combined Effects Rev4 Chorus DYNA PHASER REV CHORUS Dynamically controlled phase shifter Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI Description Reverb and chorus in parallel Rev gt Chorus REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel Rev gt Flange REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel Rev gt Sympho REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in series Rev gt Pan REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan in parallel Delay ER DELAY ER Delay and early reflections in parallel Delay gt ER DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections in series Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel Delay gt Rev DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb in series Dist gt Delay DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay in series Bl Other Effects pee Multi Filter MULTI FILTER Three band parallel filter 24 dB octave 2 3 C Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 187 gt xe O D Q x
162. ER LIERRE ELE EE GE EIER Wl Rezet ob az Ho Data ES e Data for parameters that do not exist in the recall destination channel will be ignored e f the recall destination is the stereo output channel or a paired channel the parameters will be the same for the L and H chan nels with the exception of Phase and Pan phase and pan set tings will not change Scene memories Scene memories recall the effect parameter and mix parameter settings of all channels Scene number 00 is read only data used to initialize the current scene Scene numbers 01 96 are writable data Bl Recalling a scene memory In the data entry control section repeatedly press the SCENE key or hold down the SCENE key and use the CURSOR A Wf keys to access the LIBRARY page of the SCENE screen a PROTECT button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the Protect setting will be switched on off for the scene selected in the list Scene data for which Pro tect is turned on 1s indicated by a lock icon and cannot be edited or deleted AW1600 Owner s Manual Using libraries and scene memories 79 Using the Recall Safe function Using the Recall Safe function You can specify that specific faders or specific channels will be excluded from Recall operations when the scene is changed either manually or from an external MIDI device This function is called Recall Safe For exampl
163. F or REMOTE ON Normal 3 AW1600 settings and operation 3 1 MIDI Setup Set basic MIDI operation 3 1 1 MIDI OUT Turn on off the MIDI output other than MTC MIDI CLOCK 3 1 2 IN PORT Specify the input port for MIDI communication 3 1 3 OUT PORT Specify the output port for MIDI communication 3 1 4 THRU Set the MIDI through function 3 1 5 SYNC OUT Turn on off the output of MTC MIDI CLOCK 3 1 6 MMC MODE Select whether the AW1600 will be the MMC MASTER or SLAVE 3 1 7 MMC Dev Specify the ID number that will be used when transmitting or receiv ing MMC commands 3 1 8 MTC SYNC MODE Select whether the AW1600 will be the MTC MASTER or SLAVE E O Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 215 MIDI data format gt oO O D 2 e x 216 3 1 9 MTC SYNC AVERAGE When the AW 1600 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE this setting specifies how it will follow the MTC data Set this to O if the incom ing MTC data has a highly accurate timing set this to 1 or 2 if the timing of the incoming MTC data is not as accurate such as when receiving MTC from a software sequencer 3 1 10 MTC SYNC OFFSET When the AW 1600 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE this setting adds an offset to the received MTC data The received time code value shifted by this amount will correspond to the location indicated by the internal time code of the AW1600 3 1 11 MIDI Tx Ch This sets the MIDI channel that will normally be
164. FF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER TRACK CHANNEL 7 ih EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN TRACK CHANNEL 8 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 9 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 10 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 11 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 12 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 13 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 14 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 15 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND TRACK CHANNEL 16 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND e When CTRL CHG MODE 2 PARAMETER NO ASSIGN Setting MIDI messages PARAMETER CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 1 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 2 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 3 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 4 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 5 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 6 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 7 CHANNEL Oo 4 Oo O1 BR PO OO CHANNEL INPUT 8 CHANNEL CHANNEL PAD 1 CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL PAD 2 CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL PAD 3 CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL PAD 4 CHANNEL NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 1 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 2 NO ASSIGN MASTER STEREO OUT NO
165. GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO C 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 E STEREO DELAY Parameter DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Left channel delay time FB GL 99 to 99 Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB G R 99 to 99 Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 WMOD DEL AY Parameter DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH
166. HRETER ITI LIERARY oe Initial Data WS 50FT COMP H HARD HTTHCHE e The mastering library contains data for loading EQ dynamics settings into the stereo output channel For details refer to gt p 78 AW1600 Owner s Manual v c KS Ces C Ben ab Q O O c gt O I2 O c c O O LES 83 Preparing for mixdown X Q O 2 Q 2 CL o O c O D O O D Q CT O 2 o 84 D If you want to adjust the pan of each track channel repeatedly press the Selected Channel section PAN BAL knob or hold down the PAN BAL knob and use the CUR SOR A l V keys to access the PAN page of the PAN screen In this page you can set pairing phase and pan for each channel ous uu FHASE HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH Pan In ACE Lea 00 00 00 000 126 4754 FOLD AIA HU OUT FAH PUE po PE oe ex Qo Qo ces aa 5 TT 3T HH MR loe E y 5 B 1 B S 10 11 Ig 131H 15 IB TL Fi D PAIR Indicates the paired status of adjacent odd numbered even numbered channels A heart symbol indicates channels that are paired and a broken heart symbol indicates channels that are not paired You can also set or defeat pairing in this page by moving the cursor to a heart symbol and pressing the ENTER key e Track channels 9 10 15 16 and pad channels 1 4 always function as paired channels Pairing cannot be defeated for these channels 2 PHASE Switches the phase of
167. I tracks are continuous from 1 16 If you set the value to an invalid track an unused track the panel knobs buttons or sliders may be shaded If this occurs set the value back to the correct track About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 E Macintosh users NOTE P e In order to use a remote file the corresponding software must be installed e Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in the explanation below may differ depending on the software you are using Installing the Cubase Nuendo remote setup file For Cubase Nuendo the procedure is the same as for the Windows version p 212 Installing the Logic Pro preference file 1 Start up Logic Pro 2 In the menu bar select Logic Pro menu gt Preferences gt Key Commands 3 The Key Commands window will open In the menu bar select Options Import Key Commands 4 A dialog box will appear Select the Logic preference file Logic Preferences from the included CD ROM and click the Open but ton When you import the file the following settings will be made O00 Key Commands V MIDI Remote Show all 3 Command Key v Global Commands Record 0 Modifiers vi Q Shift eRecord Repeat lz cert Record Toggle cc 16 11 X Opt Capture Last Take as Recording Cmd Learn by Key Label Learn by Key Position Capture Last Take as Recording Play CC 16 11 Pause S
168. KER button and press the ENTER key Markers will be enabled for that song and a flag icon will appear at the right of the list ES e Markers can be enabled disabled independently for each song e When you use markers to divide a stereo track the location of the divisions will be specified in units of 1 75 second NOTE P e Note that if markers are enabled the track numbers shown in the list will not match the number of tracks written to the CD e A maximum of 99 tracks can be written to an audio CD If for example markers are enabled for the song you write to CD track 1 and this song contains 98 markers it will not be possi ble to write any more songs to that CD H RW media Writing audio data Disc At Once 8 Repeat steps 5 7 to select the songs that will be written to track 2 and following ES e When you move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key a new song will be added at the end of the existing songs e By using the INS button instead of the NEW button you can insert a new song immediately before the song that is selected in the list e You can use the DEL button to delete the currently selected song from the song list NOTE e When you add a song to the song list the same song will always be initially selected Change this as desired Q Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm COHFIRHRTIGEH Hr te
169. LK Sync mode MIDI remote ALL messages can be transmitted Appendix Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No AW1600 Owner s Manual 219 gt O O D Q x 220 Specifications Specifications Bl General Specifications Frequency Response 0 1 3 dB 20Hz 20kHz MIC LINE INPUT to STEREO AUX OUT GAIN min Total Harmonic Distortion measured with 20kHz LPF Less than 0 03 1kHz 10dBV MIC LINE INPUT to STEREO AUX OUT GAIN min Dynamic Range measured with IHF A 109 dB typ DA Converter STEREO AUX OUT 103 dB min DA Converter STEREO AUX OUT INPUT CH SEL all off 103 dB typ AD DA MIC LINE INPUT to STEREO AUX OUT 97 dB min AD DA MIC LINE INPUT to STEREO AUX OUT GAIN min AD Converter 24 bit Linear 64 times Oversampling DA Converter 24 bit Linear 128 times Oversampling Internal Processing 32 bit Sampling Frequency Internal 44 1 kHz 696 6 External 44 1 kHz 1096 6 Audio Input Section MIC LINE INPUT 8 CH XLR phone combo DIGITAL STEREO IN 2 CH coaxial stereo x 1 Audio Output Section MONITOR OUT 2 CH stereo x 1 PHONES 2 CH stereo x 1 STEREO AUX OUT 2 CH stereo x 1 DIGITAL STEREO OUT 2 CH coaxial stereo x 1 Mixer Input Section Total 36 CH MIC LINE INPUT 8 CH Internal Effect Return 4 CH stereo x 2 Track 16 CH Quick
170. MODE been set to MASTER Does the DEVICE NO match E Can t receive MMC messages e Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector n the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page has MMC MODE been set to SLAVE Does the DEVICE NO match E Can t use the preset remote settings Depending on the sequencer that you want to control you may need to make settings on the sequencer For details refer to page 209 e Select the connector and port to be used MIDI connector USB connector port 1 2 in the UTILITY screen MIDI 1 page Song operations E Can t save a file s there sufficient space on the internal hard disk to create a new song Did you perform the correct shut down procedure when you last turned off the power Disconnecting the power without performing the shutdown operation will shorten the lifespan of the hard disk and CD RW drive may damage the hard disk and CD RW drive and disc and may result in loss of data s the internal hard disk be subjected to strong physical shock ll AW2816 backup files cannot be saved e Songs with a large data size cannot be saved Try execut ing the Optimize function from the SONG screen LIST page E Song file size is unnaturally large Even after you use recorder editing operations to erase a track or other data that sound file will remain on the disk Execute the Optimize command in the SONG screen LIST page CD operations B Can t create an audio CD es s CD R RW me
171. NG screen where you can save or load songs and perform the shut down procedure 2 CD key This key accesses the CD screen where you can write or play an audio CD and backup or restore data E Quick Navigate section QUICK NAVIGATE RECORD MONITOR g 74o E Display This is a backlit liquid crystal display that indicates the current operating status or the settings of the various parameters The screens that are displayed will depend on the front panel keys and knobs that are operated E Quick Loop Sampler section QUICK LOOP SAMPLER Bee D EN 18 AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 TRACK key This key accesses the TRACK screen where you can check whether each track contains data and switch the virtual tracks that will be used for recording and playback 4 EDIT key This key accesses the EDIT screen where you can copy or erase tracks 5 REMOTE key This key accesses the REMOTE screen where you can use the front panel faders and TRACK SEL keys to con trol an external MIDI device or sequencer software on your computer 6 UTILITY key This key accesses the UTILITY screen where you can make MIDI oscillator and digital input settings and for mat the hard disk RECORD key This key accesses the RECORD screen where you can quickly assign the signal to be recorded to the input of each track and make settings for recording 2 MONITOR key This key accesses the MONITOR
172. NUDGE TIME e BEFORE Play back repeatedly ending at the cur rent location for the duration specified by the NUDGE TIME NUDGE MODE BEFORE NUDGE MODE AFTER Current location Current location 7 NUDGE TIME Specifies the duration Nudge Time that will be played repeatedly by the Nudge function The nudge time can be set in a range of 25 800 ms in 1 ms millisecond steps SOUND CLIP TIME Selects the recording time for the Sound Clip function This can be set in a range of 30 sec 180 sec in 30 sec second steps e The SOUND CLIP TIME setting is used when you create a new song You cannot change the recording time for the sound clip function after the song has been created PREROLL TIME Specifies the duration preroll time that will be played back before the punch in point when you use Auto Punch in This can be set in a range of 0 5 seconds POSTROLL TIME Specifies the duration postroll time that will be played back after the punch out point when you use Auto Punch in This can be set in a range of 0 5 seconds z 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pe O 2 LI 170 ll AW1600 Owner s Manual Chanter 15 Using the AW1600 with external devices This chapter describes various examples of how you can use the AW1600 in conjunction with external devices Using the AW1600 with a workstation synth There are numerous ways in which you can use the AW1600 together with a wor
173. OR key and using the CURSOR A Y Y keys gy HEDBEREERL 2 11e6 5 4 4 BOE Ed SELECT CH FOR OHJOFF TRACE The MONITOR screen ON OFF page lets you switch each channel on off A channel that is switched off in this page will not be sent to the stereo bus or AUX bus and will be muted e This mute function switches muting on or off for the mixer track channels Recorder track playback can be muted via the TRACK screen VIEW page gt p 48 Mixing the demo song 5 Press the TRACK SEL key s for the track channel s that you want to mute You may select more than one channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 I J I Y i i For example if you press TRACK SEL keys and 3 the screen will change as follows and track channels 1 and 3 will be muted At this time TRACK SEL keys 1 and 3 will go dark The graphic in the display will also indicate this 7 e The TRACK SEL key you press last will always light orange regardless of the mute status This indicates that this channel is the selected channel p 26 TRACE rg HIEDBIERIEE RN Tree 474 DOLE SELECT CH FOR OHJOFF e In this page pressing the STEREO SEL key will have no effect 6 To cancel the muted state press the same TRACK SEL key you pressed in step 5 to make the indicator light green 7 If you want to monitor the playback of just a specific track access the MONITOR screen SOLO page by either repeatedly pressing the MONI
174. OTE e You cannot execute the Import operation while the AW1600 is running RV Q Q D a 5 e 142 AW1600 Owner s Manual Chanter 13 Song management This chapter explains how to perform song management operations such as copying deleting backing up and restoring songs About songs E Song Organization On the AW1600 your recorded compositions are managed in units called songs When you save a song on the hard disk the audio data the sample data used by the quick loop sampler scene memories and the data for each library are all stored together By loading a saved song you can return it to the original condition at any time You can store as many songs on the internal hard disk as its capacity allows Songs stored on hard disk are divided into a song file containing all the basic setup information for the song and WAV files containing the audio data E Song Bit Depth The AW 1600 allows the bit depth of individual songs to be set to either 16 or 24 bits 24 bit songs are capable of pro viding higher audio quality than 16 bit songs but the fol lowing limitations on the number of simultaneous record playback tracks apply Max Simultaneous Max Simultaneous Song Bit Depth Record Tracks Play Tracks 16 bits 24 bits For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two and the number of simultaneous playback tracks is 16 for 16 bit song
175. Perc CPS 024 Sampling BD CMP 025 Sampling SN CMP 026 Hip Comp CPS It is effective to apply these programs to sampled sounds such as from a CD ROM that are used among acoustic instruments so that they will not seem to lack power and clar ity Four variations are provided for Perc BD SN and for looped materials Hip Comp 027 Solo Vocali CMP 028 Solo Vocal2 CMP These are variations that are suitable for solo vocal sources 029 Chorus CMP This variation of Vocal is suitable for choruses 030 Compander H CPH 031 Compander S CPS A template for the compander program 032 Click Erase EXP Expander to remove click track sounds that may bleed out of the monitor headphones the musicians are using 033 Announcer CPH Hard compander reduces the level during the interval between the words making the voice sound even 034 Easy Gate GAT A template for the gate program 035 BGM Ducking DUK Ducking background music for voiceovers typically keyed from the announcer s channel 036 Limiter 1 CPS 037 Limiter 2 CMP A limiter template 1 has a slow release and 2 is a peak stop ping type 038 Total Comp1 CMP 039 Total Comp2 CMP 040 Total Comp3 CMP Since these presets are effective in restraining the overall level or improving the overall definition it is useful to apply them to the stereo output during mixdown You can apply the ses presets to a stereo source and adjust them t
176. Q c Q 5 e t 3 D Z h D 24 Basic operation on the AW1600 Basic operation on the AW1600 This section explains basic operations on the AW1600 Viewing the display The display of the AW1600 shows the following informa tion HIE I OFCILLATOR ASSIGH ee enne eee AICI g HAVEFORH LEVEL nus GE X Seen ems E EE E fa EFF Gest D IH HDD TN ten n IB FREFER c EUZ LR anananas VTT eio Jj inue eT 1 Elreeeetesmeem emen 4 use Bell neet pop zi AUH EFF Bis LR 1 Screen name This is the name of the currently selected screen 2 Selected channel This indicates the mixer channel that is selected for opera tions The display has the following significance es TRACK 1 8 Track channels 1 8 e TRACK 9 10 15 16 Track channels 9 10 15 16 e INPUT 1 8 Input channels 1 8 STEREO siessnicinusiiviensessnanss Stereo output channel e PAD 1 4 Pad channels 1 4 Operating the knobs or keys of the Selected Channel sec tion will edit the parameters of the channel that is selected here 3 Counter left side This indicates the current location within the song When the AW 1600 is in the default state this counter will indi cate the absolute time the time from where you began recording the song in units of hours minutes seconds mil liseconds At
177. SEND page of the EFF1 screen will no longer show return channel pages 1 4 To adjust the balance between the original sound and the effect sound use the MIX BAL parameter that is shown in the last parameter page e You can also insert an effect by using the effect insert field in the CH VIEW page of the VIEW screen gt p 94 x Q Oo z 3 aV 2 e o le c 5 O o Oo Kei D o O 5 o 100 AW1600 Owner s Manual Chanter 10 Creating an audio CD This chapter explains how you can use the CD RW drive to create an audio CD and how to play back an audio CD Creating an audio CD On the AW1600 you can select one or more songs on the hard disk and write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD R RW disc in CD DA format The CD R RW media to which you write this data can be played by the CD RW drive or a conventional CD player in the same way as any audio CD NOTE e Some CD players that do not support CD R RW media may not be able to play back a CD you create In order to create a CD you must first register one or more songs in a track list and then write the virtual track cur rently selected for the stereo track of each song the eur rent track to the CD in the order specified by the track list Types of media that you can use with the CD RW drive A maximum of 99 tracks areas on CD media to which audio data can be written individually can be written to
178. SIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN AW1600 Owner s Manual MASTER STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN Using the MIDI Remote function Using the MIDI Remote function About the MIDI Remote function The AW 1600 provides a MIDI Remote function that lets you use the controls of the top panel to transmit the desired MIDI messages By using the MIDI Remote function you can use the AW 1600 as a physical controller for a computer program or MIDI tone generator MIDI messages can be assigned to the following controls Mixer section e Faders 1 8 9 10 15 16 e TRACK SEL keys 1 8 9 10 15 16 Transport section RIZ I key s FF PP key e PLAY b gt key e REW lt lt key e STOP W key e REC 0 key Of these the MIDI messages assigned to the faders and TRACK SEL keys can be freely reassigned You can assign the following types of message E Messages that can he assigned to faders A MIDI message whose value Control change changes in a range of 0 127 can be number 7 assigned to each fader For exam transmit ple if you assign control change 7 volume to a fader you can move Value 127 A the fader to control the volume of a MIDI tone generator C Y Value 0 E Messages that can he assigned to the TRACK SEL keys A MIDI message whose value changes between the two states of 0 or 127 can be assigned to each TRACK SEL k
179. ST Track to CO7 CRHCEL 10 To begin writing move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key While data is being written to the media a popup win dow will indicate CD Writing When writing is completed the CD R RW media will be ejected and the following popup window will appear COHFIRHRTIGEH Hi i te Once Hare CRHCEL NOTE P e If you enabled the writing test in Basic settings for the CD RW drive p 103 a writing test will be performed before the data is actually written If a problem occurs during the writing test an error message will appear Q O Q O gt Wu Le c O E Ces Wa Ben O e Copy prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD that is created 11 If you want to create another CD with the identical contents insert a new volume of media and move the cursor to the OK but ton and press the ENTER key Writing will begin again Alternatively you can move the cursor to the CAN CEL button and press the ENTER key to exit the writing process AW1600 Owner s Manual 107 Finalizing CD R RW media D Q Q Q Q c Q O O O 108 Finalizing CD R RW media Here s how to finalize CD R RW media that you wrote using Track At Once so that the disc can be played by a CD RW drive or a CD player e CD R RW media written by the AW1600 using Track At Once and not yet finalized cannot be played by a
180. STER AUX 2 NO ASSIGN MASTER EFF 1 NO ASSIGN MASTER EFF 2 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN BALANCE STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND TRACK 1 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND TRACK 2 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND TRACK 3 CHANNEL TRACK 1 EFF1 SEND TRACK 4 CHANNEL TRACK 2 EFF1 SEND TRACK 5 CHANNEL TRACK 3 EFF1 SEND TRACK 6 CHANNEL TRACK 4 EFF1 SEND TRACK 7 CHANNEL TRACK 5 EFF1 SEND TRACK 8 CHANNEL TRACK 6 EFF1 SEND TRACK 9 CHANNEL TRACK 7 EFF1 SEND TRACK 10 CHANNEL TRACK 8 EFF1 SEND TRACK 11 CHANNEL TRACK 9 EFF1 SEND TRACK 12 CHANNEL TRACK 10 EFF1 SEND TRACK 13 CHANNEL TRACK 11 EFF1 SEND TRACK 14 CHANNEL TRACK 12 EFF1 SEND TRACK 15 CHANNEL TRACK 13 EFF1 SEND TRACK 16 CHANNEL TRACK 14 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 15 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 16 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO AS
181. TC slave this parameter shifts the absolute time within the AW 1600 forward or backward relative to the incoming MTC The range is 24 00 00 00 00 to 24 00 00 00 00 OFST 00 00 00 00 00 Incoming time code 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 100 00 20 00 00 Time code TT A4 R pop 100 00 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 display ABS Song JD 000 OWOOO OD OFST 00 00 05 00 00 Incoming time 00 00 10 00 00 100 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 code Time code 90 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 100 00 25 00 00 display ABS i i Song AJ 9 OOOOO000000 OFST 00 00 05 00 00 Incoming time 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 code i 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 Time code 00 00 05 00 00 display ABS Song JEONEONGNONSONCNONONONONGE e The OFST setting has no effect on the MTC that is transmitted from the AW1600 s MIDI OUT THRU or USB connector AW1600 Owner s Manual v Cc 9 O c Se Zeen gt z gt O c 159 z 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pe O 2 LI 160 Setting MIDI messages 7 MIDI CH Selects the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages such as program changes and con trol changes This area contains the following two items e TX Selects the transmit MIDI channel in a range of 1 16 While MIDI messages are being transmitted the chara
182. TOR key or by holding down the MONITOR key and using the CURSOR AV L keys STEREO 6 00 00 00 000 2 1ze 6 4 4 DO SELECT CH FOR SOLO J IHFUT I Bed 4 566 188 FI FB P zT RACE d AH bb 1 B BH le LI 15 16 The SOLO page of the MONITOR screen lets you mute all other channels while listening to only a spe cific channel This is called the solo function When you sol a channel in this page the signals of the remaining channels will be muted and will no longer be sent to the stereo bus or AUX buses AW1600 Owner s Manual O c O V O D O X BS O O D Kr um 31 Mixing the demo song E o t D 3 5 e t O Lem 2 o o D 3 o O ES e 32 8 Press the TRACK SEL key of the track channel that you want to solo 1 2 3 4 5 6 For example if you press TRACK SEL key 3 the screen will change as follows and channels other than track channel 3 will be muted At this time TRACK SEL key 3 will light orange and the other TRACK SEL keys and INPUT SEL keys will go dark 7 TRACE 2 e WILD 000 221z6 6 474 TOLD SELECT CH FOR SOLO IHFUT 8 3 4 5 B 1 B Fl F8 F3 FY A Sr gr g Ve rg pr de ges p Sr de den om Gs srTRacke d T TRACE 2 3 4 5 E 1 B Sl 00 122 DIN 15 moe e on m on d ds on on on on on n d omn cr on zT NOTE e Only one channel can be soloed at a time Q To cancel soloing press the currently sele
183. UTILITY screen HID l 055 STORAGE HIDI 2 ost DIH HDD FREFER WS i eg E CH e Before turning the Storage mode on make sure that no MIDI data is being transferred via the USB connection from and to your computer AW1600 Owner s Manual 137 RV Q Q D a ae 138 Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files 5 Move the cursor to the CONNECT button and press the ENTER key The USB file transfer mode USB Storage mode will be engaged and the display shown below will appear Most of the AW1600 functions are temporarily off while this mode is engaged HID 356 STORAGE HILI g niu D IH HOD FREFER USE i ti Pl ce LJ D Display the AW1600 internal hard disk on the computer screen In the case of Windows XP The two windows will appear AW1600 1 H Windows can perform the same action each time you insert a disk or connect a device with this kind of file a Music files What do you want Windows to da gt Play using Windows Media Player Take no action C Always do the selected action e If the windows shown above do not appear choose to display the AW1600 1 and AW1600 2 drives from the Windows gt Start gt My Computer menu In the case of Mac OS X The AW 1600 1 and AW 1600 2 drive icons will appear on the desktop AW1600 2 AW1600 1 e f the icons are not displayed properly
184. a CD Before you can import you will need to disable this prohibition in the D IN HDD page of the UTILITY screen J 1z8 8 474 MOUI IMT HDD F RHRT 00 00 AUTO SAVE 44 ID k HIDI I DIGITAL IH FATCH VARI PITCH HIDI 2 DISRELE ER REES n O FREFEF d USE DIGITAL nec prr 2 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL REC button and press the ENTER key A message will ask you to confirm that you will observe the applicable copyright laws COHFIRHRTIGH OBSERVE Corwvright Notice Hei tten in Owner es Manual CRHCELI AW1600 Owner s Manual long as you have not executed any editing or recording opera 3 Carefully read Copyright Notice p 6 and if you accept these terms move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The button display will change from OFF to ON and digital recording and importing from a CD will be enabled NOTE e The DIGITAL REC button will return to the OFF setting each time you turn on the power 4 Insert a CD into the CD RW drive You can import data from the following types of media e Audio data CD DA Audio CD e CD Extra only the first session of CD DA Mixed Mode CD only CD DA data of the second and later tracks WAV files e ISO9660 Level 1 format CD ROM CD R CD RW Mixed Mode CD The directory name and file name cannot use charac ters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters and the _ underscore characte
185. a USB cable and copy the WAV files that have been exported to the Transport folder to the com puter Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer Connect the AW1600 to the computer using a USB cable and copy the WAV files that have been exported to the Transport folder to the computer or copy files from the computer to the Transport folder It is also possible to directly access and edit audio data using waveform editing software and backup complete songs to the computer Make sure that your computer meets the following requirements VES rc Windows XP Professional Home Edition SP1 or higher or Mac OSX 10 3 or higher e USB Interface USB 2 0 NOTE e A USB 1 1 interface can also be used but in that case file transfer will occur at USB 1 1 speed 2 Make sure the POWER switch on the AW1600 is set to STANDBY then connect the AW1600 to the computer via a USB cable 3 Turn on the AW1600 No driver installation is necessary for WAV file trans fer If it 1s the first time you have connected a USB cable on a Windows machine however you may see a message prompting you to install a USB MIDI driver Even if you will not send and receive MIDI messages via the USB cable install the USB MIDI driver as described on page 209 D E o D x O FE 4 Repeatedly press the Work Navigate sec tion UTILITY key or hold down the UTIL ITY key and use the CURSOR A Wf keys to access the USB page of the
186. a dotted frame indicates the step 8 to which the Undo function will return the song rede Ge dee OF PONY arter undoing back to a certain step the undo redo data subse quent to that step will be erased For example if you undo the previous three steps and then perform a recording or editing operation the undo redo data for the previous steps 1 and 2 will be erased e If you have already cancelled recent operations using the Undo function before displaying the Undo list previous steps may not remain at all AW1600 Owners Manual 61 Switching virtual tracks Q lt Q c o D 5 ie 62 Switching virtual tracks Each audio track 1 16 contains eight virtual tracks After overdubbing a solo part you can switch the virtual track for that track and record a different take while preserving the previously recorded content Here s how to switch the virtual track that is selected for a track T In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR WT keys to access the V TR page In the V TR page you can switch the virtual track 1 8 that will be used for recording playback by each audio track 1 16 TRACE 1 i IL ee E SIE l 5 B 1 B 3 ID t tt tt Frog og og og gd enu I AGE EO Ss pon 230 UR III I EE be EE a AE Je III ez III um TRACK Indicates the track number 1 16 2 V TR Indicates the st
187. access the SETTING page of the CD screen D Fap 1 fy OOOO 2126 8 4 4 II j CD RH AUDIO HRITE DATA HRITE J HEDIAERASE SPEED x 1 nrc J FERFECTLY UHDERRUH per PROTECT La a CD RW MEDIA ERASE Erases the data that was written to CD RW media For details refer to Erasing CD RW media gt p 109 2 AUDIO WRITE SPEED Selects the speed at which audio data will be written to CD R RW media 3 TEST button Specifies whether a writing test will be performed when you execute writing 4 WRITE button Specifies whether the actual writing operation will be performed 5 UNDERRUN PROTECT button SPEED field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the writing speed You can select either x8 eight times as fast as audio playback or x4 four times as fast as audio playback Normally you should use x8 and drop down to x4 if errors occur during writing Use the TEST button and WRITE button to select the writing operation s The TEST button and WRITE button specify whether a writing test and or the actual writing operation will be performed The combination of buttons that are on will determine the operation s that will occur as fol lows e Only the TEST button on Only a writing test will be performed e Only the WRITE button on Mm Writing will occur immediately e Both the WRITE button and TEST button on First a writing test will be perfo
188. ack sound clip or audio CD playback B Playback pitch is wrong VARI PITCH may be adjusted s the synchronized external device operating on the same sampling frequency 44 1 kHz s the master device operating in a stable way You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH com mand s an effect such as HQ Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a monitor channel E A small amount of noise is produced when a song is played back on a different AW1600 unit A small amount of noise may be heard at the beginnings and ends of audio regions when a song created on an AW 1600 unit with Version 1 1 firmware is played back on an AW T1600 with Version 1 0 firmware Please update all AW 1600 units you are using to the latest firmware ver sion Information on the latest firmware version as well as update procedure can be found at the internet address below http www yamahasynth com Recorder operations E When you press the PLAY key it blinks and playback does not occur s the AW1600 set to MTC SLAVE Access the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page and check the set ting ll Something goes wrong with the sound when you use the FF key or REW key Differences in the number of simultaneously played tracks will affect the way in which the sound is heard when these 2 controls are operated m Q ll Can t edit a recorded track z The song may be protected Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded AW1600 Owne
189. ack two bus recorded tracks as a single stereo track 1 Hold down the INPUT SEL key or TRACK 3 To defeat pairing hold down the INPUT SEL key of one channel that you want to SEL key or TRACK SEL key of one of pair and then press the other INPUT SEL the channels and press the other INPUT key or TRACK SEL key SEL key or TRACK SEL key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you 1 2 3 4 want to cancel pairing Wo See E GK 2 E ET Sab O 4 To cancel pairing press the OK button If E ecd eoe e d c you decide not to cancel pairing move the o S PER ase em posee es LL oss Ss cursor to the CANCEL button and press the x D ENTER key E CY CO g e In the case of paired channels setting the pan to far left or far right will produce nominal level The levels before and after e passing through Pan will be the same In the case of paired A popup window will appeal asking you to confirm channels setting the pan to center will produce nominal level the pairing COMFIRAATIOH Hake Pair IHPUT 1 E RESET ETH IHFUT z 1 CHHCEL 2 Move the cursor to one of the following but tons and press the ENTER key e INPUT TRACK x gt y x odd number y even number Copy the settings of input track channel x to y and pair them e INPUT TRACK y gt x x odd number y even number Seen Copy the settings of input track channel y to x and pair them e RESET BOTH ee Initializ
190. acked up to CD H HW media but you can execute the restore operation only for 44 1 kHz 16 bit songs 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to select all of the other AW series songs that you want to restore 8 To execute the restore operation move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key The restore operation will begin While the song data is being loaded a popup window will indicate the progress NOTE D e When a song with the same name already exists the name of the restored song will automatically be changed For exam ple if O01_Song already exists the song name will be altered as in 001 SongO 001 Song etc W 5 e 3 D D e D 3 D t 156 ll AW1600 Owners Manual Chapter 14 MIDI and utility functions This chapter explains basic MIDI related settings functions that use MIDI and various utility functions What you can do using MIDI On the AW1600 you can use MIDI to do the following things e Synchronize operation with an external device You can synchronize an AW1600 song with the playback of an external device such as a MIDI sequencer by exchanging synchronization messages such as MTC MIDI Time Code or MIDI Clock with the external device Remote control of the transport You can transmit MMC MIDI Machine Control mes sages from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device to the AW1600 to remotely control the AW 1600 s transport Converse
191. al number You can select the following val ues es 00 FF hexadecimal Corresponds to the actual value of the MIDI message that is transmitted e END Indicates the end of the MIDI message When you operate a fader or TRACK SEL key the MIDI message starting with the first byte and ending with the byte that precedes END will be transmitted e SW TRACK SEL key only Mm Indicates the on off status of the TRACK SEL key The byte you specify as SW will be transmitted as 7F hexadecimal when the key is turned on or 00 hexadecimal when the key is turned off e FAD Indicates the current position of the fader If the message is assigned to a fader the byte you specify as FAD will be transmit ted as a value of 00 7F hexadecimal corresponding to the fader position when you operate the fader If the message is assigned to a TRACK SEL key this byte will be transmitted as a value corresponding to the current posi tion of the fader when the TRACK SEL key is turned on and will be transmitted as a value of 00 hexadecimal when the TRACK SEL key is turned off ES e The MIDI message assigned to a single fader or key cannot be longer than sixteen bytes e Ifa SW byte is not assigned to a TRACK SEL key the MIDI mes sage you input will be transmitted only when you turn the key on In this case you will normally use the UNLATCH setting e When you use the LEARN button to ass
192. alent e Does not function when the MTC MODE is SLAVE or while the REW a FFI gt P J or JOG ON key is being used e When a record track is assigned in the RECORD screen the func tions are switched in the following order PLAY We Punch In Punch Out STOP B When Auto Punch in Out is engaged however the order becomes Punch In STOPIE 9 MIDI IN connector MIDI OUT THRU connector These connectors allow MIDI messages to be exchanged with external devices MIDI IN receives MIDI messages MIDI OUT THRU can be internally switched to function either as a MIDI OUT jack which transmits MIDI mes sages generated within the AW1600 or MIDI THRU jack which re transmits messages that are received at the MIDI IN jack di PHANTOM 48V CH1 4 and CH5 8 Switches Independent phantom power switches are provided for the XLR type MIC LINE INPUT connector groups 1 through 4 CH1 4 and 5 through 8 CH5 Turn phantom power to the appropriate connectors ON when using one or more phantom powered condenser microphones N CAUTION e Be sure to turn the phantom power switches off when phan tom power is not required e Make sure that no equipment other than phantom powered microphones is connected to the XLR inputs of the input group for which phantom power is turned on Applying phan tom power to devices that are not phantom powered can cause damage Balanced dynamic microphones however can usually be connecte
193. amics processing is applied The depth of this change will depend on the library that is recalled 3 If you want to access the screen for a parameter and edit it in greater detail press one of the five knobs or the VIEW button Pressing each knob or button will access the following screens SELECTED CHANNEL Press the EQ knob The EQ screen will appear Press the DYN knob The DYN screen will appear Press the EFFECT 1 knob The EFF 1 screen will appear Press the EFFECT 2 knob The EFF 2 screen will appear Press the PAN BAL knob The PAN screen will appear Press the VIEW key The VIEW screen will appear EQ screen EDIT page EDIT ATT FLAT CG DAE Lo L FAID H FID HIGH Si Loi GO L SHL 5 6 r 0 10 i GO HHL z F1 CH 50 0 Oh 150k j 4 00k CA ID Dk dra 55i vni e anim nm gpeg 4 Move the cursor in the screen to the desired parameter and use the DATA JOG dial or the ENTER key to operate the parameter e If you change individual parameters in the DYN screen the parameter that you operate last will be assigned to the DYN knob e If you want to return to the state in which turning the DYN knob will adjust multiple parameters simultaneously you must once again recall the library containing the dynamics settings you recalled prior to editing in the DYN screen Chapter 3 Listening to the demo song When the AW1600 is shipped from the factory its hard disk contains a demo
194. amp M Display P 18 REMOTE UTILITY LES QUICK LOOP SAMPLER EO EFFECT ied NO 2 KE wem Gier SD 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STEREO 6 o 5 o 10 15 5 20 10 30 20 40 50 40 60 70 oo oo 15 16 STEREO 9 10 11 12 13 14 Quick Navigate section Quick Loop Sampler section Mixer section Transport section Locate section P 18 P 18 P 19 P 21 P 20 B input output section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN MONITOR PHONES Xr Xr Xr Xr Xr Xr BS M T Vi T Mc inc pt T Me in Ge v ME T bet v Mt D GAIN knobs 1 8 3 MONITOR PHONES knob These adjust the sensitivity of the signals that are input This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from from the rear panel MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack 2 INPUT SEL keys 1 8 These keys select the mixer input channel that you will operate e Pressing and holding an INPUT SEL key will display the INPUT SETTING popup window allowing you to make settings for the corresponding input channel AW1600 Owners Manual 17 e t Ken O Q c Q 5 a t 3 D Z h D Parts of the AW1600 and what they do E Work Navigate section SONG CD o j La TRACK EDIT e t II o REMOTE UTILITY oe JL lt C SONG key This key accesses the SO
195. an also be used to change the character of a vocal sound AW1600 Owner s Manual E Quick Loop Sampler section The AW 1600 has a built in pad type sampler You can assign sixteen stereo waveforms to the four pads with sample banks Audio tracks from the hard disk or WAV files from a CD ROM disc or computer can be loaded The timing at which each pad is pressed can be recorded on a dedicated pad track and edited later Drum phrases from the sample library can be assigned to pads and you can then record pad operations to use this function as a simple rhythm machine The maximum polyphony is four stereo notes and the maximum playback time is a total of approximately 47 seconds approximately 29 seconds in 24 bit songs of ste reo for the entire Quick Loop Sampler B CD RW drive A dedicated CD RW drive is installed in the AW 1600 You can produce an audio CD from the stereo tracks of the songs recorded on the hard disk Markers assigned within a song can also be used as the track numbers of the CD You can even use advanced techniques such as assigning more than one track number within a single song The CD RW drive can also be used to backup restore songs to play back audio CDs and to load WAV data from a CD ROM E Connecting to a Computer The AW 1600 can be directly connected to a computer via the built in USB interface This allows WAV format audio files to be copied between the AW1600 and computer for convenient managemen
196. and 7 Move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key 5 To specify the beginning of the region to be A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera edited move the cursor to the desired digit tion of the Start field and turn the DATA JOG dial COMFIRMATION T The Start End parameters are displayed at the right of Beier EE l the TR field Start parameter a ONUS fagi EEEE 8 Move the cursor to the OK button to exe cute the command or move the cursor to TR w 1 HODDRDDD DOS the CANCEL button to cancel without exe EHEC EC ind cuting Then press the ENTER key End parameter end of the region to be edited e Even after you press the ENTER key to execute the com mand you can press the UNDO REDO key to return to the state prior to executing the command You can use this func tion to compare the original data with the results produced by executing the command You can set the Start End parameters in terms of the counter display format the value at the left or in units of measures beats the value at the right Move the cursor to the digit that you want to change and turn e f as a result of executing a command a track no longer con the DATA JOG dial to set the value tains any recorded data the name of that track will change to NO HEC 6 To specify the end of the region to be edited move the cursor to the desired digit of the End field and turn the DATA JOG dial ES
197. and LOW key of the Selected Channel sec tion to select the EQ band and turn the EQ knob to adjust the amount of boost or cut e f necessary you can make detailed adjustments to EQ parameters such as the center frequency and Q gt p 95 Instantly recalling a dynamics library e Setting the mix balance and pan Instantly recalling a dynamics library A dynamics library can be instantly recalled in the same way as an EQ library T In the Selected Channel section press down the DYN knob and turn it SELECTED CHANNEL Turn while pressing When you turn the DYN knob to left or right while pressing it the LIBRARY page of the DYN screen will appear Baze5 5dammling SH BSG iF Comp CLEARS RECALL SEI srose az8 S010 Vocals d TYPE COHF 29 Chorus 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select a DYN library Then move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The selected library will be loaded 3 If you want to adjust the dynamics effect turn the DYN knob in the Selected Chan nel section ES e In the same way you can press and turn the EFFECT 1 knob or EFFECT 2 knob in the Selected Channel to recall an effect library O c fs 2 oO XI D gt O e If necessary you can make detailed adjustments to the dynamics parameters gt p 96 setting the mix balance and pan Here s how to set the volume balance and pan for the previously recorded tracks and the t
198. ange until the fader passes the current value OUTPUT LEVEL only for the stereo output channel Move the cursor to this knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the output level of the signal that is sent from the stereo output channel to the STEREO AUX OUT jacks and MONITOR OUT jacks The range is 9 to 0 dB NOTE P e The OUTPUT LEVEL knob will follow the operation of the panel STEREO FADER However please note that if you adjust the on screen knob and then operate the panel fader the value will not change until the fader passes the current value AW1600 Owner s Manual Initializing a channel The mix parameters EQ dynamics pan etc of a chan nel can be reset to their default settings in a single opera tion This function lets you start mixdown or bounce operations with the track channels zeroed and provides an easy way to reset the levels back to the nominal setting if you can no longer hear any sound 1 In the Quick Navigate section repeatedly press the MONITOR key or hold down the MONITOR key and use the CURSOR V keys to access the INIT page TERED DH IOFF soLn i EUM g 00 00 22 914 2 125 2 4 4 DiE SELECT CH FOR INITIALIZE IHFUT 2 3 4 5 B 1 B Fl Fe Fa ST IHIT In this page you can separately initialize the mix parameters of input channels 1 8 pad channels 1 4 or track channels 1 16 2 Press the INPUT SEL key pad or TRACK S
199. annot be read into 24 bit songs 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window will open Move the cursor to the ALL but ton and press the ENTER key When the library has been loaded the popup window will automatically close e When the popup window is open you can move the cursor to the 1SAMPLE button and press the ENTER key to select and load just a single sample from the library 4 Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion 5 Strike pads 1 4 You can play the samples that are assigned to sample bank A of each pad ES e Of the sample libraries saved on the hard disk when the AW1600 is shipped most drum pattern libraries that are set to Loop mode have the Slice function turned on If you load this type of library you only need to press the pad and the tempo of the drum pattern will match the tempo of the song This lets you use the Quick Loop Sampler similarly to a drum machine AW1600 Owner s Manual XI aD cx o Q O D x 9 2 O 113 Using sample libraries e Recording playing a pad performance O Q A O O O WA Q S D 114 NOTE P e If a sample is assigned to a pad that pad will light while the sample plays when you press it However if no sample is assigned nothing will play and the pad will not light You can either assign a sample to the pad or switch the sample bank e f the pad lights when you strike a pad but yo
200. ansient edge of percussive sounds Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound backwards For ducking this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is ducked almost immediately With a slow attack time ducking fades the signal Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through For ducking this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired Dynamics library list Dynamics library list These are the preset dynamics settings provided by the AW1600 For details on the function of each parameter refer to page 182 001 A DrBD CMP 002 A DrBD EXP 003 A DrBD GAT 004 A DrBD CPH Use these presets to apply CMP EXP GAT or CPH respec tively to the bass drum of an acoustic drum kit 005 A DrSN CMP 006 A DrSN EXP 007 A DrSN GAT 008 A DrSN CPS These presets modify preset programs 1 4 for use with a snare drum 009 A Dr Tom EXP Expander for acoustic toms automatically reduces the volume when the toms are not played helping to differentiate the bass and snare drums
201. arate from the counter of a conventional song 5 Play your instrument in time with the metro nome e The metronome sound will not be recorded in the sound clip If necessary you can move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the volume level of the metronome sound e In addition to an instrument connected to the MIC LINE INPUT jacks your performance on the quick loop sampler pads can also be recorded e The knobs keys of the selected channel are active even while the CLIP screen is displayed If necessary you can record the signal processed by EQ and dynamics gt p 50 6 To stop recording press the STOP W key The display will show S and E symbols to indicate the start point and end point IHFUT CLIP IIEZRH33 2 122 5 4 4 SE CLIF LIF J2728 8 did HETREO O O4E 9 0 00 000 2TART Dap pen Penn ye e With the default settings of the AW1600 a maximum of 30 seconds can be recorded in a sound clip If you continue recording for longer than 30 seconds the last 30 seconds of your playing before you stopped recording will be recorded However the counter display during recording will continue to advance e In the UTILITY screen PREFER page you can specify up to 180 seconds as the maximum length that can be recorded in a sound clip You are free to make this setting before creating a new song but this cannot be changed once the song has been created gt p 1
202. ards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device e Use only the specified AC power adaptor PA 300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha e Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it e Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The device contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION e o not expose the device to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands If you notice any abnormality e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e
203. ark If this input channel is not yet assigned to a track all TRACK SEL keys will blink red This blinking indi cates that the tracks can be selected as the recording destination 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN l Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly lt a p S S p gd E EI EI EI EI E tA N d N N NV N N N A N LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC Uii III ICT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e 4 4v deo 4 Sib o4 4v dv al E E T T S T o Ee E In the screen the se symbol for that input channel will be high lighted 9 100 11 12 4 4 S o IHEUT L 13 14 15 16 STEREC gt 4 gt gt Ci cle EH v ec A LW e You can also select an input channel by moving the cursor to the ge symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the ENTER key e If you select an input channel to which a track is already assigned only the corresponding TRACK SEL key will blink red e If you press and hold the INPUT SEL key of an input chan nel the INPUT SETTING popup window will appear allowing you to make settings for the corresponding input channel To exit this window and return to the previous screen move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key 5 Press the TRACK SEL key of the track on which you want to record The selected input channel and track will be connected inte
204. ary EE Fin Dynamics library EE 78 ege 78 Mastering library esee 78 Sample DUAN EE 78 Channel library sees 79 Scene Memories nens 79 Using the Recall Safe function 80 H Mixdown and bounce operations 81 About mixdown and boumncmg 81 Preparing for MIXAOWN sssssssssnessssrnnrrrnsrrrrrrnnnrrrrreee 83 Using the internal effects via send return 85 Recording on the stereo track ssssuuse 87 Bounce ping pong recording procedure 88 Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix 89 Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations ssssssseseerr errereen 92 Adding input signals or pad performances during mixdown 92 Using meters to check the level of each channel 93 Viewing all parameters for a certain channel 93 Initializing a channel 94 Editing the EQ parameters 95 Editing the dynamics parameters 96 Editing the parameters of an internal effect 97 Inserting an effect into a track channel 99 AW1600 Owner s Manual 7 10 Creating an audio CD 101 Creating an audio CD iscccsicscacsertcertectencuiececdrmteancessetee 101 Types of media that you can use with the CD RW drive
205. ase the effect insertion Selects the location from which the signal from each channel will be sent to insert effect 1 Move the cursor C HFIRHBRTIOH 1 i BeTedse EFE Insect to this area and press the ENTER key to switch between the following two settings EG e PRE pre fader The signal from immediately before the fader will be sent 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press POST post fader A The signal from immediately the ENTER key after the fader will be sent Insertion of insert effect 1 into that channel will be cancelled and now you are free to use this effect in the mixer section via send return AW1600 Owner s Manual 85 Using the internal effects via send return x Q O z 3 RV 2 e o c 5 O o O O D A St 5 o 86 NOTE P e f the page you see is different than shown above make sure that track channels are selected as the object of your opera tions This is shown in the upper left of the screen If input channels pad channels are selected press one of the TRACK SEL keys 4 Move the cursor to the PRE POST field in the screen and press the ENTER key to specify the location from which the signal will be sent from each channel to internal effect 1 Select POST if you want the volume of the effect sound to be affected by the fader position Select PRE if you want to set the volume of the effect sound inde pendently of the fader position
206. atus of virtual tracks 1 8 The virtual track that is currently selected for each track is indi cated by a 6 symbol Of the virtual tracks that are currently not selected those that have been recorded are indicated by O and those that have not yet been recorded are indicated as AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 Use the CURSOR A J Via 9 keys to select the virtual track number that you want to assign to the desired track 3 Press the ENTER key The symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly selected virtual track This virtual track will now be used for recording playback TRACK E A8 I IL H are zea 4 4 M014 ITRACE 15 16 UTE Bd GERS Ae UU ti dE Ee ZI Bop yah en EE EE EE CERERE T ee 1rrririirig RO Eat aa aar 1 mE EE Si d H 5 B 1 H 4 If you want to assign a name to each virtual track repeatedly press the Work Navigate TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR A keys to access the VIEW page TRACE E jTRACE HUTE usur LU TE2B1 11 HETRO D D 4E es 5 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select a track number 6 Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the virtual track Assign a new name to the virtual track For details on how to assign a name refer to page 25 Sav
207. aution when deleting a song e You cannot delete a song for which protect is on or delete the current song the highlighted song If you want to delete such a song you must first turn off the protect setting or switch the current song 5 To execute the copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will prompt you to enter new song name 6 Enter a new song title move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The song you selected in step 3 will be copied and you will return to step 2 If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the copy operation will be cancelled lll Io delete a song 4 Following step 3 move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the delete operation COHFIRHRTIGE Delete Selected song 5 To delete the song move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The song you selected in step 3 will be deleted and you will return to step 2 If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the delete operation will be cancelled e If you have selected the current song as the song to be deleted a popup window will warn you that it is not possible to delete the current song c ab E o CH G O c O o AW1600 Owners Manual fl 147 Optimizing a song CD 5 a 3 3 Q D D 5 t 148 O
208. ay is selected as the counter display for mat you can move the current location forward or backward in millisecond units If time code display is selected you can move in sub frame units Current location Song track Nudge time e Even while using the Nudge function you can use locate points or markers to change the location or register locate points or markers gt p 65 4 To turn off the Nudge function press the JOG ON key or the transport section STOP W key The JOG ON key will go dark and the Nudge func tion will be turned off 5 If you want to change the playback duration or the playback mode repeatedly press the Work Navigate section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key and use the CURSOR l Y keys to access the PRE FER page of the UTILITY screen UTILITY track 1 00 00 00 000 szize e Asa DI HIDI I STORE COMFIRH EI NUDGE NODE BEFORE HIDI EIJ RECALL CONFIRM Eg nupcE TINE S00 Hs osc Ou DEI POUT COPYRIGHT fT oun CLIFTIME 30 SEC FARAH DISFTINE 2 SEC PREROLLTIHE 4 SEC usec p B usE FADER FLIF TRACE FO ZTREULL TIHE NUDGE MODE Specifies the region of sound before or after the cur rent location that will be played by the Nudge func tion 2 NUDGE TIME Specifies the duration of the region that will be played by the Nudge function 6 To change the playback duration nudge time move the cursor to the value of the NUDGE TIME field and
209. b to access the EQ screen where you can adjust all of the EQ settings 2 DYN knob Turning this knob will adjust the dynamics depth for the currently selected channel You can press this knob to access the DYN screen where you can adjust all of the dynamics settings 4 Faders 1 8 5 Faders 9 10 15 16 Normally these faders adjust the playback level of each recorder track By changing the internal settings you can also use these faders to control the input levels of input channels 1 8 and pads 1 4 6 STEREO fader This adjusts the output level of the stereo bus 3 EFFECT 1 knob 4 EFFECT 2 knob Turning these knobs will adjust the amount of signal that is sent from the currently selected channel to the internal effects 1 and 2 1 e effect send levels 1 and 2 You can press these knobs to access the EFF1 or EFF2 screens where you can adjust the parameters of the internal effects 5 PAN BAL knob Turning this knob will adjust the pan of the currently selected channel or the balance of the stereo output chan nel You can press this knob to access the PAN screen where you can adjust pan for multiple channels 6 HIGH key 7 HI MID key LO MID key 9 LOW key These keys select one of the four EQ bands HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW to be adjusted VIEW key This key accesses the VIEW screen where you can check the level of each channel or perform on screen adjust ments t
210. back minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV FLG 0 100 Reverb and flange balance 0 flange 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 O C Q Q Q lt 195 Effects Parameters E REV gt FLANGE Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and flanged reverb balance 0 flanged reverb 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E REV SYMPHO Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left righ
211. base Nuendo 2 Inthe menu bar select Devices menu gt Device Setup 3 The Device Setup window will appear Select Add Device gt Generic Remote Device Setup MIDI Machine Control Slave Time Display CM Motormix Generic Remote JLCooper 5 10 ILCooper MC5 3000 Mackie Baby HUI Mackie Control Mackie HUI Radikal SAC zk Roland MICR amp Steinberg Houston 4 The Generic Remote setting display will appear Set the MIDI Input and MIDI Out put filed MIDI Output your MIDI output device MIDI Input your MIDI input device Device Setup Devices 0 MIDI Al MIDI Inputs Default MIDI Parts Max DirectMusic Controller 1 7 127 Windows MIDI Fader 2 Controller 2 z 7 iI Remote Devices Fader 3 Controller ER fs i a Feat Eeer 7 127 Transport Fader 5 Controller 5 7 127 Time Display Fader 6 Controller 6 7 127 CH Video Fader 7 Controller 7 7 127 o _ Em Video Player Fader amp Controller 8 7 KE Zeg VST Audiobay Fader 9 Controller Ly s SES Es oe Diver Faderl Controler 10 7 127 i VST Outputs Fader 11 Controller 11 7 127 Fader 12 Controller H 127 MST System Link NOTE P e The content that is shown for MIDI Input and MIDI Output will depend on the MIDI device s you are using For details refer to the owner s manual for the MIDI devic
212. bered audio tracks D From TR The stereo track 1 8 Exchange source virtual track 2 From V TR BU ber Up to eight Exchange source virtual track 3 Name alphanumeric name display only characters E Parameter list 1 16 A single audio track 4 To TR 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks Parameter Explanation 1 8 Exchange destination virtual track number 1 16 A single audio track 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track 2 From V TR 1 8 Virtual track number 5 To V TR Up to eight Exchange destination virtual CD From TR 6 Name alphanumeric track name display only characters o Q Q D a 2 e 1 The items that you can select in 4 To TR copy destination track will depend on the 1 From TR copy source track setting 3 From Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region If 1 From TR is a single audio track 1 16 you can select only a sin 4 From End Specify a point End of the edited region gle audio track 1 16 If 1 From TR is ST or 1 2 15 16 a pair of adjacent audio tracks you can select only 1 2 15 16 a pair of adjacent audio tracks Specify a point Specify the length to which the 5 To End selected region will be com pressed or expanded NOTE 50 200 Specify the percentage by which 6 To Ratio the
213. button and press the ENTER key Information will be read from the inserted CD R RW media When the information has been read a display like the following will appear CD HRITE COFLAY ERCEUF SETTING 3 SYSTEH E ERE CUTE zxH2 E311a4 3 J dam SOBA 16e 1 List This area lists the data that has been backed up on the CD R RW media The symbols at the right of the list indicate whether an item of data has been selected 6 or disabled O for restore 2 PAD button When this button is off the list will show the songs that were backed up on the CD R RW media When this button is on the list will show the sample libraries that were backed up on the CD R RW media 3 ALL button You can use this button to select all the data that appears in the list If you turn this button on and then turn the ENABLE DISABLE button on all data dis played in the list will be selected for restore 4 ENABLE DISABLE button Selects whether an item of data will be selected for restore ENABLE or not selected DISABLE AW1600 Owner s Manual 5 SYSTEM button Selects the system data AW 1600 settings you make in the UTILITY screen for restoring 6 EXECUTE button Executes the restore operation NOTE e You cannot operate the items in the RESTORE page until the inserted CD R RW media has been read 5 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the data that you want to restore Then move the cursor
214. ce number matches or is 7F If the transport is recording then punch out will occur STATUS ID No Device ID 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd da Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000111 07 Record Exit EOX 11110111 r7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 8 MMC RESET lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when song loading is finished lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW 1600 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F MMC related internal settings will be reset to the power on state STATUS ID No Device ID 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00001101 OD Reset EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive AW1600 Owner s Manual 5 13 1 9 MMC LOCATE TARGET lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when a locate related key such as MARK SEARCH IN OUT is pressed a FF REW operation is performed when the transport returns to the auto punch pre roll point or when repeating lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches The transport will locate to the time code position specified within the command
215. cenles 200 Troubleshooting ECT 202 Display message jet 206 About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 209 MIDI data format uec curro tentoria ta kn pk EO Rn Erba Reed 215 MIDI Implementation Chart 219 OCC a OS RETE 220 Klee lg CENE Tm 222 MAO ER NE 223 Block diagram eee Tm 227 Chapter 1 Before you start This chapter explains what you should know before you begin using the AW1600 Ben TM V 2 O gt D O m introduction B Check the included items The AW1600 package contains the following items If any are missing please contact your dealer e The AW1600 AC adaptor PA 300 Owner s manual this book e CD ROM B Copyright Copying of commercially available music sequence data and or digital audio files for any purpose other than your own personal use is strictly prohibited E Irademarks Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc USA in the United States and other countries Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corpora tion USA in the United States and other countries Cubase SX and Nuendo are trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies AG Logic is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc USA in the United States and other countries SONAR is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone Sys tems Inc ProTools is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid Technology Inc and affiliated compani
216. ch marker Regardless of any areas of silence the entire region from the Start point to the End point will be written 3 INS button Inserts a new song in front of the song currently selected in the list 4 NEW button Adds a song at the end of the song list 5 DEL button Deletes the selected song from the list 6 EXECUTE button Executes writing to the CD media e f data has already been written on the CD RW media that you insert a popup window will appear immediately after step 3 asking whether you want to erase the data Move the cur sor to the OK button if you want to erase the entire media or to the CANCEL button if you want to cancel execution Then press the ENTER key 5 Move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key The song list will show information track number song name size of the stereo track for the song that will be written to track 1 of the CD 6 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the song list and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song that will be written to track TRACK 3 DEDE IE 5 tzizee 474 BF I DATA JOG NOTE P e When you turn the DATA JOG dial you will see only songs for which the current stereo track contains data e Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not be displayed 7 If you want the stereo track of the selected song to be divided into CD tracks at the location of each marker move the cursor to the MAR
217. ck 3 LIBRARY button Accesses the mastering library 4 Stereo bus Indicates the on off status of the channels being sent to the stereo bus The numbers within the screen corre spond to the following channels INPUT 1 8 Input channels 1 8 e P1 P4A Pad channels 1 4 e TRACK 1 16 Track channels 1 16 3 Use the INPUT SEL keys IMPUT 4 TRACK SEL keys and pad REC keys 1 4 to select the chan LIE nels that you want to send to xi the stereo bus IHFHT 1 The screen will change as follows SAFE REC each time you press a key or pad IHPUT Z repeatedly ST NOTE P e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as M mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks gt p 143 tracks 9 16 are muted and will not play back ES e All channels will be turned on by default However in order to obtain the best S N ratio you should turn off any channels that you are not using e You can also add the signals of the input channels or pad channels to the mixdown gt p 92 4 If you want to use the mastering library move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and press the ENTER key The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will appear Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the desired library data then move the cursor to the RECALL but ton and press the ENTER key
218. clearly 010 A Dr OverTop CPS Soft compander to emphasize the attack and ambience of cymbals using overhead microphones It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played helping differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly 011 E B finger CMP Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a fin ger picked electric bass guitar 012 E B slap CMP Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a slap electric bass guitar 013 Syn Bass CMP Compressor to adjust and or emphasize the level of a synth bass 014 Piano CMP 015 Piano2 CMP Pianol brightens the sound to make it stand out slightly Piano2 uses a deeper threshold setting producing a more consistent overall level and sense of attack 016 E Guitar CMP Suitable for electric guitar chording or arpeggios Try various adjustments depending on your tone or playing style 017 A Guitar CMP Compressor intended for acoustic guitar playing rhythm chords or arpeggios 018 Strings1 CMP 019 Strings2 CMP 020 Strings3 CMP Compressor suitable for strings Numbers 19 and 20 can also be used on low range instruments cello contrabass 021 BrassSection CMP Compressor intended for brass sounds with fast and strong attack 022 Syn Pad CMP This has a restraining effect on sounds that tend to become diffuse For example this is ideal for some rich sounding synth pads that conversely lack definition 023 Sampling
219. ct track 2 4 6 or 8 bus R will be con nected If you select track 9 10 15 16 bus L will be connected to the odd numbered track and bus R will be connected to the even numbered track e f you move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key all connections will be cancelled e EQ and dynamics settings will be flat for the track channels of the tracks you select as the recording destination Bounce ping pong recording procedure Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix e If you select an unpaired track the pan of the track channel will be at the center position If you select paired tracks the pan of adjacent odd numbered even numbered track chan nels will be spread to left and right respectively 6 Raise the STEREO fader and the faders of the track channel s you selected as the bounce destination to the 0 dB position 7 Press the RTZ I key to rewind the song Then hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY b gt key The song will begin playing back and will be recorded on the bounce destination track s H While you record the song raise the faders of the bounce source track channels to an appropriate level Adjust the pan EQ and dynamics of each track channel as neces sary e The bounce destination faders will not affect the content that is recorded However the bounce source faders specify the volume balance that will be recorded e When Auto Punch in out is engaged
220. cted TRACK SEL key lit orange once again NOTE P e While playing the demo song the level or the on off status of a channel you adjusted manually may return to its previous setting This is because the Scene function has switched the state of the mixer settings and is not a malfunction gt p 149 You can use the Recall Safe function to temporarily prevent scenes from being recalled gt p 80 AW1600 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Recording to a sound clip The AW1600 has a Sound Clip function that lets you record and play back independently of the recorder section You can use a sound clip to quickly record and play back your performances on an audio source connected to the AW1600 or on the pads This is an ideal way to capture ideas for a song or arrangement or to record a simple accompaniment for practicing a part This chapter explains how an instrument or mic connected to an input jack can be recorded as a sound clip Connecting your instrument or mic First the instrument or mic that you want to record must be connected to a MIC LINE INPUT jack The various types of jack are compatible with the following sources MIC LINE INPUT XLR jacks 1 8 These are XLR type balanced input jacks Use a male XLR lt gt female XLR cable to connect your mic direct box or a guitar bass preamp that has a balanced output jack Balanced cable male XLR lt gt female XLR MIC LINE INPUT XLR jacks 1 8 Electr
221. cters TX will be highlighted RX selects the receive MIDI channel in a range of 1 16 or ALL If you select ALL MIDI messages of all MIDI channels will be received Omni mode While MIDI mes sages are being received the characters RX will be highlighted PGM CHG MODE Switches program change transmission and reception on off If program change reception is on the AW1600 will recall the corresponding scene when it receives a program change at the MIDI IN or USB connector If program change transmission is on the AW1600 will transmit the corresponding program change from the MIDI OUT THRU or USB connector when a scene is recalled on the AW 1600 You can select the following choices s OFF Program changes will not be transmitted or received e TX Program changes will only be transmitted e RX Program change will only be received e TX RX Program changes will be transmitted and received e In the SCENE screen PC TABLE page you can specify the scene number that will correspond to each program change number gt p 173 CTRL CHG MODE Specifies how control changes will be transmitted and received If control change transmission and reception are enabled the corresponding control change will be transmitted when you operate a mix parameter fader pan effect send etc for track channel 1 16 on the AW1600 When a control change is received the corresponding
222. d sample EXTRACT button Discards the unused portions before the start point and after the end point of the specified sample O E O 9 el e O o RV z o D ges e For details on how to adjust the start point and end point of a sample refer to page 122 2 Move the cursor to the PAD BANK fields and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the pad and sample bank 126 l AW1600 Owner s Manual Chapter 12 Track editing This chapter explains how you can edit the audio data recorded in an audio track and how to edit the pad events recorded in a pad track What you can do using editing commands The AW1600 provides various editing commands for editing the recorded audio tracks and pad tracks Editing commands are functions that let you specify a track or region and delete or move the data of that track or region The AW 1600 provides the following editing commands ERASE Erases the data of the specified region e DELETE Deletes the data of the specified region Any data that fol lows the deleted region will be moved forward by the cor responding distance e INSERT Inserts blank space into the specified region e COPY Copies the data from the specified region to the desired location of the desired track e MOVE Moves the data from the specified region to the desired location of the desired track The move source data will be erased EXCHANGE Exchanges data between the specified tracks
223. d without adverse effect To prevent speakers damage turn power amplifiers or pow ered speakers off when switching phantom power on or off It s also a good idea turn all master faders and output volume controls down to minimum The noise generated when phan tom power is switched on or off can damage system compo nents and may even cause hearing damage if amplified to sufficiently high levels 2 Ground Screw For maximum safety the ground screw should be properly connected to a confirmed ground point Proper grounding will also ensure minimum hum noise and interference 3 POWER switch This switches the power between ON and STANDBY NOTE e When switching the power of the AW1600 between ON and STANDBY you must follow the Turning the power on off gt p 11 procedures described DC IN connector Connect the included AC adaptor PA 300 to this connec tor N CAUTION e Use only the included AC adaptor PA 300 for this unit Using other types may be a fire and electrical shock hazard Front panel B CD RW drive Parts of the AW1600 and what they do D Eject switch This switch ejects the disc tray 2 Eject hole This hole allows you to open the disc tray manually 3 Access indicator This indicator will light while the CD inserted in the drive is being accessed AW1600 Owner s Manual e e co z st C T O O 2 O O A 23 t Ken O
224. de the S N ratio and may cause the sound to distort e You can also use the INPUT LEVEL knob in the INPUT SET TING popup window to adjust the volume balance of the input channels e Normally the panel faders are dedicated to the track chan nels However by changing an internal setting you can use the faders to control the input levels of the input channels gt p 169 Enabling the metronome Enabling the metronome Before you begin recording set the tempo and volume of the metronome If you will not be using the metronome while recording you can skip the following procedure 1 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR V V keys to access the VIEW page jTRACE HUTE 4L H o FEC 1 TRACK ippuT 1 3x OOOO 2 1z28 6 a a LI TLT Atel 1 Metronome button Switches the metronome on off 2 Metronome knob Adjusts the metronome volume level The current value is shown above the knob in dB units 2 Move the cursor to the metronome button and press the ENTER key The metronome will be turned on 3 When you press the PLAY key to begin playback the metronome will begin sound ing As necessary move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the metronome level If you want to change the tempo or time signature press the STOP key to stop playback and perform the following procedure 4 In
225. des 103 test tone pm 167 Text input OX ac cece cssapencnscueseteice 29 Text palette 25 Nd 72 TIME CODE BASE 146 tone generator module 174 Elsa 17 Data entry control section 20 Br s ri 18 Input output section 17 Locate section 20 Mixer section 19 Quick Loop Sampler section 18 Selected Channel section 19 Transport section 21 Work Navigate section 18 Track At OnGe iens e noice 102 VAIO REN a 104 Track editing 127 Basic procedure 128 TRACK field 48 TRACK key esses 18 Track recording aiit endorse 39 Bus recording 41 Creating a new song 39 Direct recording 40 MUTE button oiicsesiai ee bereiten 48 NAME button ironia 48 PANNO E Eeer 49 TRACK MENG opos aureas 48 Track name 48 Track view TT 48 WAVE BETEN uci oro deitas 48 TRACK SEL key 19 Trigger mode inire 112 Troubleshooting 202 Turning the power on off 11 POWER SWC scies seva dote vaa 23 UNDERRUN PROTECT button 103 Biller lee Lu E 61 Biver 61 UNDO LIST popup window 61 UNDO REDO key
226. dia inserted The inserted CD R may have already been finalized e sa signal recorded on the stereo track The stereo track must be at least four seconds long Have you saved a song after the stereo track has been recorded E An audio CD you created does not play back on a conventional player An audio CD you created you not play back on a conven tional player unless the disc has been finalized E Audio recorded on CD RW media does not play back on some players n order for audio data recorded on CD RW media to be played back the player must support CD RW Contact the manufacturer of the player regarding CD RW support B The sound skips while playing an audio CD that you created Depending on the CD R media you use there may be dif ferences in the quality of the completed CD Troubleshooting WAV File Transfer To and From a Computer E The computer doesn t recognize the AW1600 hard disk e Is the USB cable properly connected e Is your computer running the appropriate operating sys tem Windows XP Professional Home Edition SP1 or higher or Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Operation is not guaranteed with other operating systems e Is the USB storage mode turned ON E Can t find WAV files copied from the com puter to the Transport folder Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from the song Have you copied WAV files with sampling fre quency other than 44 1 kHz E Can t find WAV files cop
227. diagram below shows an example of when input channel 1 is assigned to track 5 TRACK 5 g4 00 00 00 000 2126 0 4 4 DO 1 J IMF UT g AH Bb d D A be d H sp e sr e e The number of tracks that can be assigned in a 24 bit song is limited gt p 143 e In this example we will use direct recording in which one input channel is assigned to one track However you may also use bus recording in which multiple input channels are sent to the L R bus and recorded on one or two tracks Instantly recalling an EQ library The chapter entitled Track recording explained how to access the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen and load an EQ library to change the EQ This section explains how you can instantly recall an EQ library Press the INPUT SEL key of the input channel for which you want to use a library The corresponding input channel will be selected for operations 2 In the Selected Channel section press down the EQ knob and turn it SELECTED CHANNEL Turn while P pressing AW1600 Owner s Manual When you turn the EQ knob to left or right while pressing it the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen will appear B25 Female Wo 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select an EQ library Then move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The selected library will be loaded 4 If you want to adjust the EQ settings use the HIGH key HI MID key LO MID key
228. diately before the fader will be sent e POST post fader The signal immediately after the fader will be sent 3 AUX2 knobs Adjust the send level of the signals that are sent from each channel to AUX bus 2 4 PRE POST lower line Select the location from which the signal is sent from each channel to AUX bus 2 Move the cursor and press the ENTER key to switch between PRE and POST Raise the AUX knob 1 of each channel to an appropriate level and switch the PRE POST setting in the upper line as desired With the settings so far the signal from the track chan nel will be sent from AUX bus 1 via the STEREO AUX OUT jack to the external effect processor 7 Use the Quick Navigate section RECORD key to access the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD screen and make the settings shown below a 11 00 00 000 2 1ze 0 4 4 TOLD HASTERING LIERREY t Po Fg Kei ELE e With these settings the unprocessed sound of track channels 1 16 and the effect sound returned to input channels 3 4 will be sent to the stereo bus and mixed You can monitor these signals via the MONITOR OUT jacks AW1600 Owner s Manual V E gt D O i Ben D T x o C e e co z st ab X ES CH E GA 175 Using external effects e Signal flow when using an external effect processor Recorder section STEREO AUX OUT UNBAL 10dBV MONITOR OUT UNBAL 10dBV AUX bus 1 Stereo
229. ding on a track Now that you have completed your preparations let s record on a track 1 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly 2 In the Transport section hold down the zi Q Q s lt D Q O x CL 2 Q 48 press the TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR WT keys to access the VIEW screen TRACK ur 7 JA HMD DDT T Lon GK 2420 8 4 4 0011 Track view Graphically indicates the presence of data and markers in tracks 1 16 pad tracks 1 4 and the stereo track 2 TRACK field Selects the track that you want to operate in the screen You can select 1 16 audio track 1 16 ST stereo track or PAD 1 4 pad track 1 4 NOTE e Changing the track here will not change the track to be recorded 3 MUTE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to mute the currently selected track NOTE e This mute function switches muting on or off for the recorder track playback This also affects the number of simultaneous playback tracks in the recorder section gt p 143 It s a good idea to mute all unused tracks e Since 24 bit songs allow a maximum of 8 playback tracks gt p 143 mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 9 16 e Mixer track channels can be muted via the MONITOR screen ON OFF page gt p 31 4 Track name If you selected 1 16 or ST in the TRACK field this area displays the name that has be
230. display a list of parameters for multiple channels the screen may be divided into a page for the input channels pad channels and a page for the track channels since not all of the parameters can be shown in a single screen In this case use the INPUT SEL keys pads 1 4 or TRACK SEL keys to select the channels that you want to view Switching a button on off Here s how to switch a button in the screen on off T Use the CURSOR keysto osciLtatox move the cursor to the HAVEFORA LEV desired button in the OFF MATTH G screen AHA d 2 Press the ENTER key O gt CILLATOR The button will be switched on HAWEFORHA LE off T If you move the cursor to a but Li kHz ton that executes a specific func IB tion and then press the ENTER key that function will be exe cuted Editing a value in the display Here s how to edit the value of a fader knob or parameter shown in the display 1 Use the CURSOR TYFE keys to move the cur BEVEEBE HALL i REV TIHE L FF sor to the desired l fader knob or param 2a2z eter value a IH OL DIFF 36 nz 2 Turn the DATA JOG TYFE dial to edit the value PE EBE HALT REN TIHE LO RF 3 52 i IH I OL DIFF x 36 Jems Basic operation on the AW1600 inputting text When you create a new song or save a scene memory or library setting a popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name for the song or setting e e co z
231. dium number Invalid Parameter The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range Invalid Region An invalid region has been specified Marker Interval Under 4 sec Since the song length divided by the markers would be less than four seconds you cannot divide it with a marker Media Too Small Cannot Save The medium does not have enough space available to save the data No Data The selected region does not contain data No File Can t save erase or edit the title because no file is found No Media Media has not been inserted No Pad Memory There is no more free space in sampling pad memory No Region No region is found No Song to Write No songs to write to the CD have been selected No Stereo Track There is no song that includes a master track longer than four seconds Not 44 1kHz 16Bit Song The song cannot be restored since it is not a 44 1 kHz 16 bit song z Number Ejected Media Make a note of the number of the medium which has been writen to then insert a 3 Insert Blank Media blank medium En Number of Media Exceeds Limit The maximum numberof media that can be handled at the same time has been exceeded AW1600 Owner s Manual J 207 Display message list gt oO O D 2 e x 208 Protected Can t edit the file because it is protected Read Only File Can t save erase or edit the title because the file i
232. down the PAN BAL knob and use the CURSOR V keys to access the AUX OUT page of the PAN screen In this page you can select one of the following as the signal that will be output from the STEREO AUX OUT jacks STEREO eerte Stereo bus default AUX 1 2 AUX bus 1 2 Move the cursor to the AUX 1 2 button and press the ENTER key The AUX bus 1 signal will be output from the L chan nel of the STEREO AUX OUT jacks and the AUX bus 2 signal will be output from the R channel of the STEREO AUX OUT jacks 4 As shown in the following diagram connect 3 your external effect processor to the AW1600 Effect processor MIC LINE INPUT 3 4 STEREO AUX OUT L d MONITOR 5 OUT AW1600 e If you make the above connection with the STEREO fader raised before performing steps 2 and 3 oscillation may occur Please use caution Press the PAN BAL knob twice to access the AUX page of the PAN screen g4 00 00 00 000 22125 4 4 TT MG Oi ie GER PEDIS FHEHE Fl F1 CD AUX 1 knobs Adjust the send level of the signals that are sent from each channel to AUX bus 1 2 PRE POST upper line select the location from which the signal is sent from each channel to AUX bus 1 Move the cursor to the desired channel and press the ENTER key to switch between the following two settings e PRE pre fader The signal imme
233. e gt oO O D 2 e x 214 AW1600 Owners Manual MIDI data format MIDI data format 1 Functions 1 1 Scene Change The settings of the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE specify the scene that is recalled when a Program Change message is received The settings of the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE specify the program number that is transmitted when a scene is recalled If more than one program number has been assigned to that scene memory number the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted 1 2 MMC Control These messages allow basic recorder operations such as STOP PLAY REC LOCATE If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER MMC commands will be transmitted according to the operation of the transport If you select MMC SLAVE the internal recorder will oper ate according to the received MMC commands 1 3 Effect Control Depending on the type of effect note on off messages can be used for control These settings are made for the parameters of each effect 1 4 Pitch Fix Control When the Pitch Fix mode is engaged note on off messages can be used to control pitches 1 5 MIDI Clock transmission If you set MIDI OUT to MIDI CLOCK MIDI clock messages can be transmitted during playback or recording In MIDI Clock transmission mode Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue commands will also be issued and during playback or recording MIDI Clock will be transmitted according to the MIDI
234. e and load it into internal effect 1 hold down the EFFECT 1 knob and use the In this example we will select a reverb type library CURSOR l Y keys to access the SEND page of the EFF1 screen aai Reverb Hall im The SEND page of the EFFI screen will appear a IERAF Yaa Reuerb Boom a LI EEE PACS A TITLE rat A REPERE STAGE 3 Press the EFFECT 1 knob once to access the SEND page of the EFF1 screen If insert effect 1 is connected via the mixer section nates cc Eeer send return the following items will be added to the SEND page of the EFFI screen D EFF INSERT Inserts cancels an insert effect for a specific channel The display will indicate on for a channel into which an effect is currently inserted ES e If the page you see is different than shown above make sure S EF 3 m m m j 48 l S S TL Ia mi n T IBILR that input channels are selected as the object of your opera tions This is shown in the upper left of the screen If track channels are selected press one of the INPUT SEL keys v c KS Ces C Ben ab Q O O c gt O O O c O O LES 3 Move the cursor to the EFF INSERT field of D EFF the channel into which effect 1 is inserted Adjusts the send level of the signal that is sent from and press the ENTER key each channel to insert effect 1 A popup window will ask you to confirm that you 2 PRE POST want to cancel rele
235. e this is convenient if you are performing a mixdown while switching scenes but want to control specific channels manually 1 In the data entry control section repeatedly 2 Select the fader s or channel s that you press the SCENE key or hold down the want to set to Recall Safe and turn the cor SCENE key and use the CURSOR WT responding button s on highlighted keys to access the RCL SAFE page of the SCENE screen 3 If you selected a fader in step 2 move the cursor to the ENABLE DISABLE button and e press the ENTER key to switch the display to ENABLE Fader or channel Recall Safe has now been enabled The selected fader s and or channel s will not be affected by scene recall operations until you change this setting SCEHE Jieur 3 30 HUDD 2212586 4 4 LI FADER RECALL att CH RECALL AFE n ran r fe 3 s visage d SG sc qnin a INPUT AHAHAH Dee LIE moO Dex x CACACE Eem 1 FADER RECALL SAFE e The settings of the RCL SAFE page are shared by all songs Here you can select the fader s for which recall safe will be enabled The fader s you select here will not change even when another scene is recalled These buttons correspond to the faders as follows e PAD IA Pad channel 1 4 faders e INPUT 1 8 Input channel 1 8 faders e TRACK 1 8 9 10 15 16 Track channel 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 faders 2 ENABLE DISABLE button This
236. e AIXA bus section DYN knob or hold down the DYN knob and use the CURSOR keys to access the EDIT page of the DYN screen e You will not be able to select LEFT if you have selected input channel 1 pad channel 1 track channel 1 or the stereo out put channel e Dynamics settings and operation are linked for paired chan nels and for the stereo output channel In this case dynamics processing will operate simultaneously for both channels if either channel exceeds the threshold level THRESHOLD RATIO our GhIH EM 7 JE Si E EI erc eee IB ATTACK RELEASE KEHEE 77 77 2 diu amz Sams z cRLEILE B I I L GR Gain Reduction Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the dynamics processor in a range of 18 dB to 0 dB 6 Output meter 1 ON OFF button Switches dynamics on off lt Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed o TYPE through the dynamics processor 2 Indicates the currently selected dynamics type The displayed indication has the following meaning D Parameters l Here you can edit the parameters of the dynamics pro e e COMP Compressor cessor The type of parameters and their ranges will e EXPAND Expander differ depending on the dynamics processor type For 3 GATE tectorio Gate details on the types of parameter and their function e e COMPAND H Compander
237. e PLAY gt key Alternatively press the foot switch The song will begin playing At this time the track playback sound of the recording destination track channel will be sent to the stereo bus so you will not be able to monitor the input signal 5 Atthe point where you want to begin recording hold down the PLAY B key and press the REC 09 key or press the foot switch once again and begin playing your instrument The recording destination track will switch from play back to recording punch in The recording source INPUT SEL key and the recording destination TRACK SEL key will light red and the signal of the corresponding track channel will switch from the track playback to the input signal 6 At the point where you want to stop record ing press the PLAY B key or press the foot switch The recording destination track will switch from recording back to playback punch out 7 To stop playback press the STOP W key or press the foot switch H To listen to the newly recorded content locate to a point just before the punch in point and press the PLAY B key Q If you are satisfied with the newly recorded content save the song For details on sav ing p 63 If you decide to re do the recording press the UNDO REDO key to cancel the recording and repeat steps 4 9 The following diagram shows the manual punch in out procedure D fs 2 oO XI D gt O
238. e both input track channels and pair them e CANCEL NONE Cancel pairing When input channels are paired all mix parameters other than the GAIN knob and phase pan settings will be linked When track channels are paired all mix parameters other than the phase pan settings will be paired Oper ating just the odd numbered fader will adjust the level of both odd numbered even numbered channels While channels are paired the even numbered fader has no effect AW1600 Owner s Manual 49 Using the input library Q Q s lt D Q O x CL 2 Q 50 Using the input library The input library is a library of settings used to apply internal effects EQ or dynamics settings to the input signal when you want to record the processed signal Here s how to apply input library settings to the signal of an input channel Press and hold the INPUT SEL key of the input channel for which you want to use the input library to access the INPUT SETTING popup window 4 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the desired input library data The input library data is organized into the following categories Number Abbreviation Category Data for initializing the input channel Data suitable for electric guitar Data suitable for acoustic guitar Data suitable for bass 2 Move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and press the ENTER key The following popup window will appear
239. e data will be imported 3 From Start Specifies the beginning of the region that will be imported 4 From End Specifies the end of the region that will be imported 5 To PAD Selects the pad 1 4 to which the data will be imported 6 To BANK Selects the sample bank A D to which the data will be imported D NAME Indicates the name of the sample that is currently assigned to the sample bank you specified as the import destination If no sample is currently assigned this will indicate NO REC This item is for display only and cannot be edited Move the cursor to the From TR field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select one of the following as the import source track e 1 16 Import monaural audio from a track 1 16 e 1 2 15 16 Import stereo audio from tracks 1 2 15 16 SP m Import stereo audio from the stereo track e If you import monaural audio from a track 1 16 the same sample will be assigned to the left and right channels 4 Move the cursor to the V TR field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select a virtual track 1 8 as the import destination 5 Move the cursor to the From Start and From End fields and turn the DATA JOG dial to specify the start and end of the region that will be imported The units by which you specify the location will depend on the current counter display method For details on the counter display refer to page 146 6 Move the cu
240. e locate point has been erased LOCATE POINT SET The locate point has been set MARK POINT ERASED The mark has been erased MARK POINT SET The mark has been set MEMORY FULL There is no more free space in sampling pad memory MIDI IN DATA FRAMING ERROR Invalid MIDI data may have been received MIDI IN DATA OVERRUN Invalid MIDI data may have been received MIDI RX BUFFER FULL Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle MIDI TX BUFFER FULL Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle MTC SLAVE MODE NOW Since the AW1600 is in MTC Slave mode this operation cannot be executed NO MARK LEFT The allowable number of marks has been exceeded RECORD TRACK NOT SELECTED Recording cannot be performed because you have not selected a record track RECORDER BUSY The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating RECORDER RUNNING NOW Since the recorder is recording or playing this operation cannot be executed REDO COMPLETED Redo re execution of the previous operation has been completed REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE The repeat interval is too short It cannot be set to less than one second SELECTED PAD NOT ASSIGNED No sample is assigned to the selected pad SOUND CLIP MODE NOW Since the AW1600 is in Sound Clip mode this operation cannot be executed STEREO TRACK PLAYBACK MODE Since the AW16
241. e may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus pected This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA FCC DoC IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not cor respond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 wires PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other haz
242. e name Contents file name Demo song Backup file for restoring the internal hard disk to its fac tory set condition AW16 000 TAR Sample library Cubase Nuendo remote setup file Setting file for remotely con trolling the Cubase Nuendo software from the AW1600 Logic preference file Setting file for remotely con trolling the Logic software from the AW1600 Remote SONAR template file Setting file for remotely Windows only controlling the SONAR soft ware from the AW1600 Yamaha USB MIDI USBdrv_ Driver Driver file for exchanging MIDI messages between the AW1600 and a com puter via a USB cable About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 Installing USB MIDI driver If you are connecting the AW1600 to your computer via a USB cable for MIDI message transmission and reception you need to install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver El System Requirements OS Windows XP Professional Home Edition SP1 or higher or Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Bl installing on Windows XP 1 Start your computer to launch Windows then log in as Administrator 2 Click the Start button and then click Con trol Panel If the control panel appears as Pick a category click Switch to Classic View in the upper left of the win dow All control panels and icons will be displayed 3 Go to System Hardware Driver signa tures Driver signature options select Ignore Install software without
243. e s you are using AW1600 Owner s Manual 5 Click the Import button 6 A dialog box like the following will appear Select the Cubase Nuendo remote setup file Yamaha AW1600 Remote xml from the included CD ROM and click the Open but ton Import Generic Remote D Remote Cubase Look in C3 Cubase Yamaha AW e Remote File name Yamaha Aw ED Remote Files of type Generic Remote ml v Close the Device Setup window Fader and TRACK SEL key operations can be used to control Cubase Nuendo audio tracks Create new projects with more than 16 audio tracks Installing the Logic preference file Start up Logic 2 In the menu bar select Options menu Preferences Key Commands 3 The Key Commands window will open In the menu bar select Options Import Key Commands 4 A dialog box will appear Select the Logic preference file Logic32 prf from the included CD ROM and click the Open button When you import the file the following settings will be made E Key Commands aera Function only available as Key or MIDI command j Global Commands Num Record Record Repeat Num Record Toggle Num Capture Last Take as Recording Capture Last Take as Recording amp Play Jain 119 Num Em Play Delete Pause 416 118 Num O Stop s Space Play or Stop 416 118 Home Rewind Ux wel 117 End Forward MipiRemote Home Fast Rewind End Fast Forward
244. e the track channel faders and the STE REO fader to set the audio tracks to an appropriate level for monitoring 4 Locate the song to the point at which you want to begin recording 5 To begin recording on the pad track press the PLAY M key The recording will begin running and pad event recording will begin Recording playing a pad performance D Play the pads while you listen to the audio tracks play back Pad events will be recorded on the pad tracks The pad events that are recorded will appear in the pad track view in realtime e Pad tracks record only the pad on off status 7 To stop recording press the STOP W key The recorder will stop 8 To play back the events that were recorded on the pad tracks move the cursor to the track status button and press the ENTER key several times to switch the display to sl Q Locate to the point from which you want to start playing back and press the PLAY P key The pad track s will play back in synchronization with the recorder If you want to re do the recording repeat steps 6 9 It is also possible to re record just a specific region of a pad track In this case the newly recorded pad events will overwrite the previously recorded events How ever you need to be careful since this will also affect any overlapping pad events before or after the re recorded region e The contents of a recorded pad track can be edited in a vari ety of ways using editi
245. e undo redo audio data and unused sample data of the song you selected in step 2 will be deleted and you will return to step 1 If you decide not to execute the optimize operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key Creating a tempo map Creating a tempo map The tempo map contains data to change the tempo or time signature at the beginning of the song or at any measure or beat within the song The measure beat display counter the Quick Loop Sampler the internal metronome and the MIDI clock data generated within the AW1600 are all based on this tempo map The AW1600 s tempo map can also record data to switch scenes gt p 73 or Pad sample banks gt p 111 You can use this to switch scenes as the song progresses or to switch the sounds that are played by the Quick Loop Sampler ES NOTE P Bl Editing a tempo map event When you create a new song the following tempo map event will be input at the beginning of the tempo map the first beat of the first measure Time signature 4 4 Tempo 120 0 e Pad sample bank Pad 1 A Pad 2 A Pad 3 A Pad 4 A e Scene number not assigned Here s how to edit the values of this tempo map event T In the Work Navigate section press the SONG key The SONG screen will appear 2 Repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR I V keys to access the TEMPO page In this page you can input o
246. ecording will be registered as the In point and the location at which you last stopped recording will be registered as the Out point eh In the Locate section press the AUTO PUNCH key The AUTO PUNCH key will light and the Auto Punch in out function will be enabled You will auto matically locate to a point a specific distance the pre roll time ahead of the In point This point is called the pre roll point 7 To rehearse the auto punch in out press the PLAY M key D The PLAY P key will light and playback will begin from the pre roll point 2 When you reach the auto punch in point the REC 9 key will begin blinking and the signal that you are monitoring from the recording destination track channel will switch from the track playback to the input signal recording source However recording will not actually occur 3 When you reach the auto punch out point the REC 0 key will go dark and the signal that you are monitoring from the recording destination track channel will return to the track playback 4 When you reach a point that is a specific distance the post roll time after the Out point this point is called the post roll point you will return to the pre roll point and stop ES e If you turn the Locate section REPEAT key on before step 7 operations 1 4 of step 7 will be repeated up to fifteen times The A B Repeat function is disabled during this time If you
247. ed WAV files via AW1600 USB cable Transport folder for WAV files Quick Loop Sampler sample data Audio tracks Internal hard disk WAV files Audio CD CD RW drive 136 AW1600 Owner s Manual e Either the Windows XP SP1 or Mac OS X 10 3 or higher operating system is required for computer WAV file management with the AW1600 gt p 137 Exporting WAV files The WAV files corresponding to the audio tracks you want to transfer to a computer must first be exported to the Transport folder on the internal hard disk drive Once these files have been transferred to the computer they can be edited using appropriate waveform editing software or imported into a DAW application for further processing or integration with other projects T In the Work Navigate section press the EDIT key The EDIT screen will appear 2 Repeatedly press the EDIT key or hold down the EDIT key and use the CURSOR A V keys to access the EXPORT page This page shows the following information STEREO pA DIEDIECEL UE 22186 1 z DOEI m EXPORT Je rT or SES H T COMP ff T p P 00 00 08 000 D 00 00 14 045 DU FITCH J TR EXPORT EEE MERGE 3 K HAVE FILE CYU_TR 1_1 LR Parameter Explanation 1 16 A single audio track 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track 1 16 The current track of
248. ed by a CD track Do not confuse them with the frames used in MTC or SMPTE 4 LISTEN button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the specified region of the currently selected CD track will be played back repeatedly 5 To PAD Selects the pad number 1 4 to which the audio mate rial will be imported 6 To BANK Selects the sample bank A D to which the audio material will be imported D To NAME Indicates the name of the sample that is currently assigned to the import destination sample bank If nothing is assigned this will indicate NO REC This field is only for display and cannot be edited AW1600 Owner s Manual XI Ex c C o Q O D x 9 2 O 117 O E O 9 O e O o RV z o D 118 Importing from an audio CD WAV file to a pad When importing from a WAV file SETI HEB IMPORT CD IHF mm lg TR mp HAVE FILELS Cup PU e LITER IB HAL InF 3 EREC Dn ae HiS AA 30 Er Foi 2 ERME R CORUH_BASI Ce 1 From WAV File Specifies the WAV file that will be imported If the media contains folders directories move to the folder that contains the WAV file you want to import and then specify the desired WAV file The following icons will be displayed e uw Indicates that a WAV file is selected Adi es RR Indicates that a folder in the same level is selected Sr DEN Indicates that the folder for the
249. ed for importing This field is for display only and cannot be changed 4 LISTEN ENTER UP button The name and function of the button displayed here will change depending on the item that is selected by the From WAVE file parameter If a WAV file EJ is selected The LISTEN button will be displayed allowing you to hear the WAV file repeatedly If a folder in the same level L3 is selected The ENTER button will be displayed allowing you to move into that folder If the next higher folder t_ is selected The UP button will be displayed allowing you to move to the next higher folder To TR 6 To V TR 7 To Start These fields are the same as when you are importing from audio CD or CD Extra NOTE P e If a Mixed Mode CD is inserted in the CD RW drive a popup window will appear allowing you to select AUDIO CD DA or WAVE WAV files to import Move the cursor to the button for the data that you want to import and press the ENTER key e Only 16 bit or 24 bit 44 1 kHz mono or stereo WAV files can be imported e When the import source is an audio CD or CD Extra disc and the song is 24 bit the audio data will be automatically con verted to 24 bit format during the import operation e When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press the ENTER key there will be a slight time lag while the data is read from the CD before you hear it 7 If you are importing a WAV file move the cursor
250. ed locate point except for the Relative Zero Start and End points or marker NOTE e A locate point that you erase cannot be recovered Bl Erasing a locate point To erase a locate point hold down the CANCEL key in the Locate section and press the corresponding locate key IN OUT key A B key That locate point will be erased and a message of LOCATE POINT ERASED will be displayed for a time aL O C Fo gt amp O O v S Q gt rum GA 2 E gt Bl Erasing a marker You can erase a marker in one of two ways using key operations or in the screen To erase a marker using key operations locate to the marker that you want to erase Then hold down the CAN CEL key of the Locate section and press the MARK key The corresponding marker will be erased and a mes sage of MARK POINT ERASED will be displayed for a time To erase a marker by operations in the screen access the list of markers in the POINT page of the SONG screen select the marker that you want to erase move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key AW1600 Owner s Manual 69 Repeatedly playing a specific region the A B Repeat function lt Q SCH O c Qo p lt O D LI O h Ki fo lt oO Q Q A 70 Repeatedly playing a specific region the A B Repeat function The AW1600 provides an A B Repeat function that repeatedly plays the region between
251. ell as the level below the width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping CompanderH CPH and CompanderS CPS parameters Parameter Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 15 points O to 120 121 points 18 to 0 36 points 1 to 90 90 points 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points Attack ms Outgain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is deter mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter Ratio controls the amount of companding the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level The hard compander CPH has a fixed ratio of 5 1 for expansion and the soft compander CPS has a fixed ratio of 1 5 1 for expansion Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is companded almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial tran
252. en assigned to the virtual track If nothing has been recorded a name of NO REC will be assigned 5 WAVE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the waveform of the currently selected track will be displayed This button will appear only if you have selected 1 16 or ST in the TRACK field 6 NAME button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the track AW1600 Owner s Manual REC key and press the PLAY P key The metronome will begin sounding and the counter display will advance In the track view within the screen the vertical line that indicates the current location will advance toward the right 3 Play your instrument in time with the metro nome The metronome sound will not be recorded on the track If necessary move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the met ronome volume level 4 To stop recording press the STOP W key I In point and O Out point symbols will appear in the track view of the VIEW page indicating the loca tion of the most recent recording operation The UNDO REDO key of the data entry control sec tion will light This indicates that you can press the UNDO REDO key to execute the Undo function 5 To hear the recorded content from the beginning press the RTZ I key to return the counte
253. epeat steps 3 7 58 f AW1600 Owner s Manual Punch in out If you make a mistake while overdubbing you can re record just the region in which you made the mistake This process is called punch in out Punch in out can be performed either as manual punch in out in which you switch between recording and playback manually or as auto punch in out in which recording and playback will switch automatically when you reach the locations you specify beforehand Manual punch in out Here s how to perform punch in out using the keys of the transport section or a foot switch 1 If you want to perform punch in out using a foot switch connect a separately sold foot switch Yamaha FC5 or equivalent to the rear panel FOOT SW jack 2 Access the DIRECT page of the RECORD screen and make sure that your instru ment mic is assigned to the track on which you want to punch in At this time the INPUT SEL key of the recording source and the TRACK SEL key of the recording destination will blink red TRACE 5 e 00 00 00 000 2126 0 474 TOLD DIRECT E 5B 18 ELE 5 6 7 B HIRED EJUHCE s 3 Locate to a point earlier than where you want to punch in You may find it convenient to register a marker at a loca tion one or two measures earlier than the point at which you want to punch in so you can quickly return to that point For details on registering a marker p 67 4 In the transport section press th
254. es Other company names and product names in this docu ment are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners E Yamaha Website English only http www yamahasynth com Bil Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual english Remember to back up your data E Storing produced data Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken operation We recommend that you store all important data on your computer CD R CD RW discs or other external storage medium Bl Responsibility for loss of data etc Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages including consequential or incidental incurred by the customer or any third party as a result of loss or impair ment of the data stored on the hard disk or CD R media regardless of whether such loss could have been or actu ally was foreseen by Yamaha Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect that may render it unusable AW1600 Owner s Manual 9 UJ D Geh O D lt O Cc Wu e D p About the built in CD RW drive Using the CD RW drive 10 A built in CD RW drive is a device that lets you create or play audio CDs backup and restore data from the internal hard disk and read data from a CD ROM IMPORTANTE e Even if a CD RW drive is operating normally it may fail a read or write operation approximately once in five hundred times e Yamaha will take no responsibilit
255. es shown in the list either alphabetically NAME by when they were saved OLD or by their size SIZE 3 LISTEN button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the button will be highlighted If you now press a pad 1 4 the sample assigned to sample bank A of the currently selected sample library will play repeatedly Playback will stop when you press the pad once again 4 RECALL button This button recalls the library that is selected in the list and assigns the samples to each pad sample bank 5 DELETE button This button deletes the library selected in the list from the hard disk 6 STORE button This button stores a library that you edited 7 PROTECT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch the Protect setting on off for the library selected in the list A lock icon will be displayed to indicate a library that is protected and it will not be possible to edit or delete this library NEW button This button creates a new library on the hard disk 2 Move the cursor into the list and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the library that you want to load By turning on the LISTEN button and pressing a pad 1 4 you can audition the samples that are assigned to sample bank A for each pad in that library For details on the library contents refer to Appendix NOTE e All sample libraries initially supplied with the unit use 16 bit samples and c
256. ess a TRACK SEL key to view the meters for the track chan nels If a track channel is selected 1 PEAK button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on off When this button is on a M indicator will show the peaks of the level meters and this indicator will be held To reset the indicator temporarily turn off the PEAK button This setting is shared with the BUS page of the VIEW screen 2 PRE POST buttons These buttons select whether the level meters in the METER page will indicate the pre fader levels PRE or the post fader levels POST This setting is independent from the BUS page of the VIEW screen 3 Level meters These indicate the input level of each channel Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations Viewing all parameters for a certain channel Sometimes you will want to see all mix parameters for a certain channel in a single screen To do this repeatedly press the Selected Channel section VIEW key or hold down the VIEW key and use the CURSOR A Uu Y keys to access the CH VIEW page of the VIEW screen Some items can also be edited from this page The display in the CH VIEW page will change depending on the currently selected channel shown in the upper left of the screen Use the INPUT SEL keys pads 1 4 TRACK SEL keys and STEREO SEL key to select the channel that you want to view If an input channel pad channel or track channel is selected
257. et tings and sound Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix 11 When the end of the song is reached stop the song and press the RTZ I key to rewind e If you re not satisfied with what has been recorded press the UNDO REDO button to undo the recording and go back to step 7 12 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press ENTER A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that it s OK to exit from the PITCH FIX mode COHFIRHRTIGH Exit Pitch Fix Hodes CANCEL 13 To return to the BOUNCE page move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The PITCH FIX mode will be exited and the BOUNCE display will appear v c KS Ces D Ben ab Q O O c gt O I2 O C O O Ko AW1600 Owner s Manual 91 Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations Here are some convenient functions that you can use during mixdown or bounce operations Adding input signals or pad performances during mixdown During mixdown you can add signals from the input channels or pad channels For example you could add a performance from a workstation type synthesizer with built in sequencer that is synchronized to the AW 1600 song or add sound effects that have been assigned to the pads To do this perform the following steps after you have completed Preparing for mixdown gt p 83 1 In the Quick Navigate
258. etc if you want to use that disc on the AW1600 e Since data is erased as necessary when you back up AW1600 data to CD RW media or when you write audio data to CD RW media you do not need to perform the following procedure each time you re use the disc NOTE e The erased data cannot be recovered Perform this operation with care In the Work Navigate section repeatedly 0 If you turn on the SIMPLY button press the CD key or hold down the CD uu key and use the CURSOR A YI Y keys to Erase CD HM Media access the SETTING page of the CD screen TRACE fy IER IE 35 usize e 4 4 TIE IE AUDIO HAITE DATA HRITE SPEED x SPEED x4 If you turn on the PERFECTLY button SIHFLY TEST J COHFARE E d FERFECTLY T SETTING E ETTING IUIHDERRUH PROTECT DAS COHFIRHRTIGEH Erase CD BH Hedia Perfect lw 7 2 Move the cursor to the CD RW MEDIA ERASE field and press the ENTER key to select the desired erasure method 3 To execute the erasure move the cursor to Each button selects the following erasure method the OK button If you decide not to erase e SIMPLY button Only the TOC Table Of Con the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL tents data written to the CD button Then press the ENTER key RW media will be erased If you select this method it will take only a short time to erase the CD RW media e PERFECTLY button All data written to the CD RW media w
259. eter D From TR CLIP Explanation Content recorded in a sound clip the region specified by CLIP 1 16 A single audio track 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track PAD A single pad track ALL OVER Tracks 1 16 Pad tracks 1 4 overwrite onto the copy destina tion ALL INS Tracks 1 16 Pad tracks 1 4 insert into the copy destination 2 From V TR 1 8 Copy source virtual track number 8 From PAD 1 4 Copy source pad number 4 From Start Specify a point Copy source starting location 5 From End Specify a point Copy source ending location 6 Start Mea sure Lock 7 End Measure Lock On off indi cated by lock icon Switch the measure lock function for From Start From End To TR 1 16 A single audio track 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track A single pad track 8 To V TR 1 8 Copy destination virtual track number To PAD 1 4 Copy destination pad number 1 To Start Specify a point Copy destination starting location 2 To Times 1 99 Number of copies 3 GRID ON OFF indi cated by high lighted GRID text when on Switch the grid function 1 2 From V TR and 9 To V TR can be selected only if From TR
260. etup gt p 149 when recording phrases played on the pads to a song 7 Move the cursor to the bank area for the desired pad and turn the DATA JOG dial The sample bank will change and the sample name will change accordingly H As desired use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section to process the sound of pads 1 4 EQ dynamics and effect send 1 2 levels can be adjusted for the pad channels in the same way as for the track channels or input channels Press a pad 1 4 to select the pad channel that you want to control and use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel sec tion e When you press a pad 1 4 the assigned sample will always sound If you want to select a pad for operations without mak ing it sound hold down the SELECT key and press a pad 1 4 e The playback sounds of pads 1 4 are sent via pad channels 1 4 to the stereo bus By using the MIXDOWN page of the HECORD screen you can record your pad performance on the stereo track gt p 92 A recording on the stereo track can also be moved to an audio track gt p 132 Recording playing a pad performance Here s how you can record your pad performance pad events onto the pad tracks 1 In the Quick Navigation section repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR A UH V keys to access the PAD page of the RECORD screen In the PAD page you can record pad events on the pad tracks
261. ey For example if you assign control change 64 hold to a TRACK SEL key and specify that the control change value alternates between 0 and 127 pressing the TRACK SEL key to turn it on lit will transmit control change 64 with a value of 127 Hold on and turning it off dark will transmit control change 64 with a value of 0 Hold off Control change number 64 value 0 Control change number 64 value 127 T transmit transmit 4 C hear gt DS Alternatively you can specify that a MIDI message with a fixed value is transmitted only when you press the TRACK SEL key to turn it on lit For example if you assign program change 1 the program change of that number will be transmitted each time you turn on the TRACK SEL key Program change number 1 Program change number 1 j transmit 1 transmit 4 4 C7 ER C ER Yh Uh Using the MIDI Remote function presets The PRESET page of the REMOTE screen provides ten different MIDI Remote presets These presets have been created with specific devices and computer sequencer pro grams in mind and assign the necessary messages to the AW 1600 s faders and TRACK SEL keys You can use the MIDI Remote function immediately just by selecting a preset in this page and connecting the appropriate exter nal MIDI device Sequencer programs that are supported e Windows e Macintosh Cubase SX 3 0 1 Cubase SX 3 0 1 e Logic Platinum
262. ey will light 4 CURSOR keys A WT Wa V gt keys These keys move the cursor in the screen the blinking frame to select a specific item 5 DATA JOG dial Use this dial to change the value of a parameter If the JOG ON key 9 is on this dial operates the Nudge function 6 ENTER key Use this key to operate a button displayed in the screen or to execute a specific function 5 INV OUT keys These keys specify the points at which auto punch in out recording will begin the In point and end the Out point These keys can also be used as locate keys to move directly to the In point or Out point 6 AI B keys These keys specify the points at which the Repeat function will begin point A and end point B These keys can also be used as locate keys to move directly to point A or point B 2 MARK key This key places a mark at the current location of the song SET key Use this key in conjunction with the IN OUT keys or the A B keys to register the current location as a loca ter 9 CANCEL key Use this key in conjunction with the IN OUT keys or the A B keys to cancel a locater that you registered E Iransport section ei E In STOP 1 PLAY ki O EE D RTZ 1 key This key moves directly to the relative zero time location Used in conjunction with the SET key this registers the current location as the relative zero time ES e Broadly speaking the ti
263. f the sample If you expand or shrink the time axis of the waveform display the movement that occurs when you turn the DATA JOG dial will change accordingly It is a good idea to start with a lower magnification set the loca tion approximately and then zoom in to a higher mag nification and make detailed adjustments O In the same way move the cursor to the end S point and adjust the playback end point of S8 0000000 0 105839 TIHE the sample o Goen AHF ad D e The unused region before the Start point and after the End B point can be deleted later if you wish For details refer to 122 D PAD Indicates the currently selected pad and sample bank Use the DATA JOG dial to specify whether the L or the R channel will be displayed 2 Start point Specifies the start point of the sample 3 End point Specifies the end point of the sample e In the WAVE DISPLAY popup window the start point and end point are indicated by vertical dotted lines AW1600 Owner s Manual Deleting an unwanted sample gt p 126 6 When you have finished making settings move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key The popup window will close Switching the playback mode for each pad Switching the playback mode for each pad Here s how you can switch the playback mode for each pad between One Shot or Loop modes and between Trigger and Gate modes 1 In the Quick Loop Sampler sectio
264. f this device or the AC power adaptor should be dropped or damaged immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the device or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms e When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it e Jo avoid generating unwanted noise make sure there is adequate distance between the AC power adaptor and the device e Do not cover or wrap the AC power adaptor with a cloth or blanket 5 e Before moving the device remove all connected cables e When setting up the device make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet e Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum Depending on the condition of the connected devices doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers e Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations or
265. fects and dry sounds E DELAY REV Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY REV 0 100 Delay and reverb balance 0 reverb 100 delay MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E DELAY REV Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
266. file the same sample will be assigned to the L and R channels e When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press the ENTEH key there will be a slight interval of time before you hear the sound since the data is being read from CD 5 If you are importing a WAV file move the cursor to the From WAVE file field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the WAV file that you want to import To move to a lower level folder display the C3 icon in this area move the cursor to the ENTER button in the screen and press the ENTER key To move to the folder above display the t_ in this area move the cursor to the UP button in the screen and press the ENTER key 6 If you are importing from an audio CD or CD Extra use the From Start From End fields to specify the region that you want to import 7 Use the To PAD and To BANK fields to spec ify the pad sample bank into which the data will be imported e f the import destination already contains data the existing sample will be overwritten by the newly imported sample Be careful that you do not accidentally erase a sample that you want to keep H When you have finished specifying the data to be imported move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the operation COHFIREHRTIGH Execute CD IMPORT 7 Esc Q To execute the import move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key
267. file format from a com puter or CD into the AW1600 audio tracks or pads It is also possible to directly access the internal hard disk from a computer and edit the audio data using appropriate audio editor software Importing and Exporting Audio Data From and To a Computer Computer WAV file operations can be carried out either via an import export folder or by directly accessing the audio track or pad data When transferring via an import export folder the files must first be written to the folder named Transport pro vided specifically for import and export The AW1600 can then be connected to the computer via a USB cable and the Transport folder can be opened from the computer The required WAV files can then be copied from the Transport folder to the computer or WAV files to be used in the AW 1600 audio tracks or pads can be copied from the computer to the folder from which they can be imported to the appropriate locations To directly access audio track or pad data the AW 1600 must be connected to the computer via a USB cable after which the WAV files can be directly accessed inside the appropriate folders in the AW 1600 You can use a wave form editor application running on your computer to directly edit the AW1600 audio data For operational details see Transferring WAV Files To and From a Com puter on page 137 and refer to Song Folder Organiza tion on page 144 for information on how the folders are organiz
268. first export the WAV file s to the Trans port folder WAV files imported or exported via the Transport folder are automatically converted to 24 bit format that can be edited using most waveform editor software e Song data is created in either the Song1 or Song2 folder You may have to check both of these folders to locate a specific song e To restore the sample library data to it s initial factory state restore the sample library data from the supplied CD ROM e If you initialize the AW1600 hard disk from your computer it will become unreadable by the AW1600 Always use the UTILITY screen D IN e HDD page to initialize the AW1600 hard disk e The song folders also contain audio data for undo and redo opera tions that is not normally used The undo redo data can be deleted by performing an Optimize operation gt p 148 e This setting applies only to the current song Before you perform this procedure load the song whose name you want to edit T In the Work Navigate section press the SONG key The SONG screen will appear 2 Repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR LV keys to access the SETUP page LIST dcukREHTEOHG CDU EBooa3ie IHFORT H meer ner 1EZHE FROTECT POINT COUNTER DISFLAY Bail REL sEc c REMAIN IB TEHF m Jj SHUTDUM TIHE CODE EASE 24 e Eae Ne 3 To edit the song name move the cursor
269. flat or sharp vocals Correct the pitch of a specified segment or phrase of a vocal track using the Auto Punch in out function Create a chorus part using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch of the chorus part a third above the main vocal for example Change the key of a vocal track e f you will be using to an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch for vocal pitch correction or a chorus part the MIDI OUT con nector of an appropriate MIDI keyboard must be connected to the AW1600 MIDI IN connector via a standard MIDI cable In this case the UTILITY MIDI 1 page IN PORT parameter must be set to MIDI Keyboard connection can also be made via the USB port 1 When you want to specify a segment of a vocal track to be processed it is necessary to set up the Auto Punch in out function Details on setting up the Auto Punch in out function can be found in steps 1 through 7 under Auto punch in out on page 59 2 In the Quick Navigate section repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR A UH V keys to access the BOUNCE page of the RECORD screen RECORD trace ah 00 00 00 000 2120 8 4 4 0011 DIRECT E 1H eg n E p idis y HIED 3 LL T v c KS Ces D Ben ab Q O O c gt O O O a c O O LES AW1600 Owner s Manual 89 x Q O z 3 RV 2 e o e c 3 O D O O D A St 5 o 90 Correctin
270. function by which MIDI mes sages received at its MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from its MIDI OUT connector a function called MIDI Echo or MIDI Thru you must turn it off If this function is turned on while you are recording the control change messages trans mitted when you operate the AW1600 will be immediately returned to the AW1600 causing malfunctions 5 Play back the AW1600 song from the begin ning When the AW1600 begins playing it will transmit a Start message and MIDI Clock messages to the sequencer and the sequencer will begin running in synchronization with the AW 1600 6 Operate the AW1600 s mix parameters such as fader and pan The control changes assigned to each parameter will be recorded on the sequencer The type of mix parameters that can be recorded will depend on the setting of the CTRL CHG MODE field gt p 160 When you are finished recording stop the AW1600 song 8 Switch the workstation s sequencer to play back ready mode and play back the AW1600 song from the beginning The recorded control changes will be transmitted to the AW1600 and the corresponding mix parameters will change If necessary you can use the editing functionality of your sequencer to edit the values and timing of the control changes that were recorded e If you set CTRL CHG MODE to 1 operating track channels 1 16 will transmit control changes on the corresponding MIDI channel 1 16 For this reason yo
271. g a Vocal Track Pitch Fix 23 Move the cursor to the PITCH FIX button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear which allows you to select the source edit track COMFIRMATION Select SOURCE Track to PitchFix TRACES TI MAME LU bat 11 CANCEL Specify the source edit track in the TRACK filed then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear which allows you to select the record destination track and the virtual track LOAF IRAARTIOH Select DESTIHMHT OM Track to PitchFix TRRCK Z TR 1 MAME LU TERGZ 11 e Different tracks must be specified for the source and destina tion 5 Specify the record destination track in the TRACK field and the virtual track in the V TR filed then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key This will select the PITCH FIX display EC RI TRACK 1 IDDIE TUR 2 1ze 0 aa DOD FITCH FIH ERIT EVFASS CTRL PANEL RE A TupE H ORFHHRL zB ice Fae 1 TR ZWMTRI 7 7 c UE gd PAD RATE E M Bes NNNM ema a Ga T 0 NOTE D The following occur when the PITCH FIX mode is engaged e No other display can be selected from the panel keys e Record track assignments are ignored e No internal effects other than Pitch fix can be accessed e The Tempo Map scene numbers is temporarily ignored e MIDI program and control change messages cannot be received
272. g the number of segments into which the sample is divided However this may not improve the result if there is too great a difference between the tempo of the sample and the tempo of the current song 6 Repeatedly press the TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CUR SOR l V keys to access the VIEW page of the TRACK screen 7 Play back the song and press the pad for which you turned the Slice function on The phrase of the sample assigned to the pad will play in synchronization with the tempo of the current song If you have input data in the tempo map to change the tempo during the song the sample phrase will follow the change For details on tempo map settings gt p 149 XI Q c o Q O D x 9 2 O AW1600 Owner s Manual 125 Deleting an unwanted sample Deleting an unwanted sample Here s how you can delete unused data before the start point and after the end point from a specific sample or completely erase an individual sample T In the Quick Loop Sampler section repeat The procedure after this point will depend on the function edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold that you want to execute down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR l Y keys to access the MEM E To erase the entire sample ORY page of the SAMPLE screen To erase the entire selected sample move In this page you can delete the unused portion of a sample or erase an unwanted sample t
273. ge to This selects all songs and sample libraries 8 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key O A popup window will ask you for confirma tion so move the cursor to the OK button or CANCEL button and press the ENTER key While the Restore operation is being executed the state of progress will be shown in a popup window When this popup window closes the operation has been completed Installing a remote file EH Supported DAW software e Windows e Logic Platinum 5 5 1 1 e Cubase SX 3 0 1 Nuendo 3 0 1 e Sonar 4 0 1 Producer Edition e Macintosh e Logic Pro 7 0 1 C1 e Cubase SX 3 0 1 e Nuendo 3 0 1 e Protools TDM 6 7 2 1 Use the setting file from the included CD ROM to map the AW1600 s faders TRACK SEL keys transport keys to the Logic key commands Track assignments must be made within Logic as appropriate for your system 2 Select the CS 10 settings as the MIDI controller type For details on the CS 10 settings ask Digidesign 2s O C Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 211 About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 gt Oo O D 2 e x 212 Bl Windows users NOTE P e n order to use a remote file the corresponding software must be installed e Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in the explanation below may differ depending on the software you are using Installing the Cubase Nuendo remote setup file 1 Start up Cu
274. gh pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type low pass high pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type low pass high pass band pass FREQ 1 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance MIX BAL 0 100 95 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 3 C Q Q Q lt 199 Sample library list Sample library list This is a list of the sample libraries that are installed on the internal hard disk when the AW1600 is shipped from the factory L LOOP O ONESHOT No assigns 060Normal16 060Normal8 060NormShffl 064RnBsmooth 065 Triplet 080Latin16 089Syncopatn 090MedSlow8 093Bounce8 093Southern 094Gangsta 096Hip 1020ldSkool2 106BreakRock 106HipFunk 106O0ldSkool 108Funk1 108Funk2 110Med8 110NJS 114Simple16 118LoudFunk 120Normal16 120Normal8 120NormShffl 125Simple8 126BigBeat 126LatinRock O O O O O O L
275. he ENTER key If select a source other than 1 16 the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to enter a file name If you select 1 16 as the source the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to enter a folder name The WAV files TRACK 01 WAV TRACK 16 WAV will be stored in the new folder which will be created inside the Transport folder 6 Enter an appropriate file or folder name via the TITLE EDIT popup window as required For details on how to enter a name refer to page 25 NOTE e Characters that can be used in folder names are the letters of the alphabet numbers and _ Characters that can e used in file names are the capital letters of the alphabet numbers and _ 7 To execute the export move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Exporting will begin If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key the export operation will be can celled However it is not possible to abort the export process once it has been started Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files NOTE e Since the AW1600 does not have a concept of the real world date and time dummy values will be written as the file cre ation date and time of the WAV files e Tracks that do not contain data in the specified region will not be exported 8 Connect to a computer using
276. he AW1600 as a volume con troller for an XG tone generator Each preset will control the XG compatible tone generator s parts 1 16 17 32 33 48 and 49 64 respectively e TRACK SEL key operations will switch the part on off Fader operations will control the volume of the part If you select preset 07 09 the button indications will change as follows Preset 07 1 16 button gt 17 32 button 1 12 button gt 17 28 button 9 16 button gt 25 32 button Preset 08 1 16 button gt 33 48 button 1 12 button gt 33 44 button 9 16 button gt 41 48 button Preset 09 1 16 button gt 49 64 button 1 12 button gt 49 60 button 9 16 button gt 57 64 button 2 CH Choose one of these buttons to select the MIDI channels that will be assigned to the faders and the TRACK SEL keys as shown in the following tables When the 1 16 button is selected Using the MIDI Remote function Faders TRACK SEL keys 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIDI channel 1 8 9 10 1142 13 14 15 16 When the 1 12 button is selected Faders TRACK SEL keys 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIDI channel 1 8 9 10 11 12 e When the 9 16 button is selected Faders TRACK SEL keys 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIDI channel e When the 1 16 button is on operating a fader 9 10 15 16 or a TRACK SEL key 9 10 15 16 will transmit two channels of MIDI messages 3 TRANSPORT Select one of the following to specify what will
277. he corresponding key while the song song to that locate point is stopped or playing The song will move to that location and an icon will appear at the left side of the counter to indicate the currently selected locate point 1 Move the song to the point that you want to register as a locate point You can set a locate point whether the song is playing or stopped Locator icon 2 Hold down the SET key and press the key TRACE i 00 00 04 340 for the desired locate point TRACK 5 T ido ABC EH Een MARK MARK SEARC Ls l E em 8 N This icon will remain visible until you play or rewind fast forward past the previous or next locate point or A M SEARCH E marker location Locate points that you register are displayed in the AUTO PUNCH LAST REC QUT REPEAT C CHT TRACK screen VIEW page or PAD page as shown below The locate points correspond to the following keys TRACK stereo ty 00 00 05 610 2 18 28 ar IERT qTRACE x ru TR8 1 11 MARK MARK B em N IN R Pm OUT 0 O4E TLT Atm CA PUNCH S In point Oo Out point em Locator icon T m A point lt O D B point e z E e Locate point settings are stored on the hard disk as part of E Relative J the song o Zero point e Locate points can be adjusted as desired gt p 68 Locate e points other than the Start point and End point may also be ien B e IN key 000000nnnannn In point e OUT key
278. he cursor to the ERASE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to erase the sample SANPLE Fat iA Ex Wu DI J 1ze8 aal 2 To execute the erasure move the cursor to ETE RAL SIZE the OK button and press the ENTER key LIBRARY ED 1 577 i E PADI BAHEA ER Weiz 770 I ss FORUN BREI TR IWER a Gi 13 1 OSC Hp Ea m UN TS a If you decide to cancel move the cursor to the CAN CEL button and press the ENTER key lll To delete the unused D One Shot Loop mode portions of the selected sample This icon indicates whether One Shot mode Jor Loop Mode z is selected for the sample assigned to 1 Move the cursor to the EXTRACT button Bo pads and press the ENTER key 2 Pad number A popup window will ask you to confirm that you Indicates the pad number 1 4 want to delete the data 3 Size This area graphically indicates the memory size of pa To execute the deletion move the cursor to each sample The horizontal line indicates the amount the OK button and press the ENTER key of memory used by each pad If you decide to cancel move the cursor to the CAN PAD CEL button and press the ENTER key 5 BANK These select the pad 1 4 and sample bank A D to which the operation will apply 6 Sample name Indicates the name of the sample for the pad and sam ple selected in 4 and 5 7 ERASE button Erases the specifie
279. he input level refer to Recording to a sound clip gt p 33 IHFUT 1 If an input channel is connected to a recording desti nation that recording destination and the METER but ton will be added to the display in the INPUT SETTING popup window By moving the cursor to the METER button and press ing the ENTER key you can switch the location at which the level is detected between pre fader default setting immediately after A D and post fader after the signal has passed through EQ dynamics and the level knob Check that the increase in level after passing through EQ and dynamics does not cause the signal to clip Q Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion 10 To monitor the signal that you are record ing raise the fader of the track channel that you selected as the recording destination Normally when recording you do not monitor the input channel signal before it is recorded but rather the signal after passing through the recorder via the track channel This lets you monitor the signal that is actually being recorded and also lets you adjust the volume and tone of the monitor signal without affect ing the signal that is being recorded If the track channel fader for the recording destination track is set to the O dB position the monitor level dur ing recording will be the same as the playback level after recording AW1600 Owner s Manual D D Lus O O D 2 x O H 43
280. he pitch and other properties of a vocal track gt p 89 AW1600 Owner s Manual 3 In the upper TRACK area select a bounce source track move the cursor to the symbol for that track and press the ENTER key Each time you press the ENTER key the screen will change as fol lows e If a track channel is selected as a bounce source its assignment to the L R bus will automatically be turned off e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as M mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maxi mum of 8 play tracks gt p 143 tracks 9 16 are muted and will not play back TRACE 1 og TRACE d 3 M Sr San es EU TRACE 1 oy TRACE 2 44 ds dh e TRACE 1 Im TRACE 2 44 ds d de EU TRACE 1 og TRACK 2 3 4 Bex AE 4 Select other bounce source tracks in the 3 same way Use the TRACK SEL keys to select a bounce destination track The TRACK SEL key will blink red indicates that the corresponding track is selected as the bounce des tination A line will appear in the screen to indicate the connection to the track To cancel your selection press the same key once again TRACE 8 12 z1ze amp 8 4 4 0011 STRACK 2 4 4 56 18 ERR TE Aes des 3 D D D dr dire D D You can select up to two bounce destination tracks If you select track 1 3 5 or 7 bus L will be connected If you sele
281. he stereo bus HASTERING LIERARY e Fe F3 d de Ss dk oem 4 Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion and while you play back the song adjust the level pan EQ and dynamics for each track channel If desired you can also use the mastering library 5 When you have finished adjusting the sound and the levels put your digital recorder in record mode then play the AW1600 from the beginning and perform the mixdown You do not need to turn on the REC button in the MIXDOWN page at this time 6 When you have finished the mixdown stop the AW1600 and your digital recorder e Signal flow when mixing down to a digital recorder Recorder section Digital recorder MD or DAT PHONES DIGITAL STEREO MONITOR OUT UNBAL 10dBV STEREO AUX OUT UNBAL 10dBV GR Track channels 1 2 3 4 D nts Stereo output channel Stereo bus Mixer section AW1600 Owner s Manual v E gt D O E Ben x ab C e e co z st ab X T2 O E GA 177 c DD e P 2 o Z M D t 2 D x t D 3 D al ap lt Q D o 178 Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT To play back your digital recorder and listen to the recorded result connect the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack of your digital recorder to the AW 1600 s DIGI TAL STEREO IN jack and perform
282. helving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E FLANGE Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds gt O O D 2 e x 190 l AW1600 Owner s Manual Effects Parameters E SYMPHONIC Parameter Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center fre
283. hrough recorder track 5 and sent to track channel 5 This signal is then sent to the stereo bus mixed with the play G back sound of track channels 1 4 and output from the STEREO AUX OUT jacks and the MONI TOR OUT jacks PHONES jack e Signal flow when overdubbing Overdubbing Recorder section PHONES STEREO AUX OUT MONITOR OUT UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV Stereo output channels channel Stereo bus Mixer section AW1600 Owners Manual f 55 Assigning the input signal to a track e Instantly recalling an EQ library lt D s CL c o ca 2 Q 56 Assigning the input signal to a track In order to overdub you must first assign the mic or instrument to a new track The basic proce dure is the same as when recording the first track Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 Connect your instrument or mic to a MIC LINE INPUT jack 3 In the Quick Navigate section repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR UH V keys to access the DIRECT page of the RECORD screen The INPUT SEL keys and TRACK SEL keys will blink red ippuT 1 eg 00 00 00 000 wzizeae 4 4 DO l 1 fa 4 5 hh EC sr e H mon 4 Assign the input channel to which your instrument mic is connected to a new track and adjust the level For details on this step refer to Track recording gt p 39 The
284. ibrary you can use this to apply dynamics processing to an input channel while you record or when you want to modify the dynamics settings after recalling an input library Press and hold the INPUT SEL key of the input channel for which you want to use the dynamics library to access the INPUT SET TING popup window IHFUT 1 2 Move the cursor to the DYN button in the screen and press the ENTER key The dynamics library will appear Alle LIERARY RECALL G EXIT BOS H Dr PD tExXP m BOS H Or BD GAT d 1 List This is the library list The line surrounded by a dotted line in the middle of the list is the data that is selected for loading When you turn the DATA JOG dial the data in the list will scroll upward or downward 2 RECALL button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to load the currently selected data 3 EXIT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window e You can also access the dynamics library by pressing the DYN knob of the Selected Channel section For details refer to Using libraries and scene memories p 73 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the library that you want to use and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the library recall operation COHFIRHRTIGH DH Lib Harr CANCEL Recall 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key
285. ic guitar bass MIC LINE INPUT TRS phone jacks 1 8 These are TRS type balanced input jacks Use a 1 4 TRS phone lt gt female XLR cable to connect your mic direct box or a guitar bass preamp that has a balanced output jack 1 4 TRS phone Wa female XLR cable Preamp or effect proces sor with balanced output Electric MIC LINE INPUT guitar bass TRS phone jacks 1 8 Alternatively you can use a 1 4 phone lt gt 1 4 phone cable to connect an instrument with unbalanced output such as a synthesizer or rhythm machine Synthesizer rhythm machine E Oo O c O V O O KS O pus O O D PE 1 4 phone lt gt phone cable MIC LINE INPUT TRS phone jacks 1 8 MIC LINE INPUT jack 8 Hi Z Use a 1 4 phone lt gt phone cable to directly connect an electric guitar bass that has passive pickups 1 4 phone lt gt phone cable MIC LINE INPUT HI Z jacks 8 Electric guitar bass with passive pickups AW1600 Owner s Manual 33 Adjusting the input level JJ D Q pj 2 e t O RV o O c 2 Q o E 34 Adjusting the input level The signals that are input from MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 are sent to input channels 1 8 respectively Here s how to adjust the input level of the input channel and make settings so that you can hear the sound from your monitor system via the stereo bus Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion
286. ied from the com puter to the Audio folder Did you change the bit depth of the WAV file when editing it with waveform editing software For 24 bit songs audio data is saved in the Audio folder in 32 bit WAV file format Have you changed the file name Did you copy the file s to a different folder E Can t copy files from the computer Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied E An error message appears when discon necting the AW1600 from a Windows com puter Before turning the USB storage mode OFF remove the device via the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar Close all AW1600 windows before removing the device via the Safely Remove Hardware icon Pitch Fix operations E Can t hear any pitch change e Make sure that RATE is NOT set to 000 e Make sure that BYPASS is off E The voice is not recognized When the voice is high set TYPE to FEMALE when it is low set TYPE to MALE E Pitch correction doesn t sound right n some cases pitch correction may sound unnatural especially for parts sung with vibrato To make the pitch corrected vocal sound more natural and subtle set DETECT to a relatively short value and set RATE to a rel atively slow value 2 O Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 205 Display message list Display message list E Messages gt oO O D e x 206 A B POINTS NOT FOUND Repeat Playback cannot be performed because A
287. ield to specify the From Start and From End locations and execute the copy the location you specified in the measure display format field will be aligned with the e Fora pad track loop copy destination To Start setting From Start From End e When measure lock on From EE CG Measure Lock PAD Start End To Start iL COPY To o ENEBERBEBEBEBESEN PAD GMM 7 DEER For a pad track one shot To Start From Start From End 4 The possible choices for 8 To TR copy destination track will depend on your selection for 1 From TR copy source track If 1 From TR is a single audio track 1 16 you will be able to select only a single audio track 1 16 If 1 From TR is CLIP ST 1 2 15 16 a pair of adjacent audio tracks you will be able to select only ST or 1 2 15 16 a pair of adjacent audio tracks If 1 From TR is PAD you will be able to select only PAD If 1 From TR is ALL OVER or ALL INS you cannot select TO TR 5 Grid function 3 GRID When this function is on the To Start location cannot be specified in To E counter display format it can be specified only in measure beat PAD SS units By using the Grid function in conjunction with the Measure Lock function you can easily copy measure beat length segments of data whose divisions do not fall precisely on the measure or beat Track editing E Parameter list MOVE The parameters are the same as for the COPY
288. ify the import source track number 2 V TR Specify the import source virtual track number 3 NAME Displays the name of the currently selected virtual track AW1600 Owners Manual 151 CD 5 a 3 3 Q D D 5 t D Move the cursor to the TRACK field and V TR field and turn the DATA JOG dial to specify the track number and virtual track number The name of the selected import source track will be displayed in the NAME field NOTE e You can import only one track at a time 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to select the import des tination track 2e ect DESTIHMBRT IO Track to Imrort TRACE 1d MIR 1 s 2 1 6 MAME EU bai 1 1 CAHCEL Importing data from an existing song Backing up songs and sample libraries TRACK Specify the import destination track number 2 V TR Specify the import destination virtual track number 3 NAME Displays the name of the virtual track that you selected as the import destination NOTE e When ST stereo track is selected as the import source the destination track will also be ST stereo track 7 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and V TR field and turn the DATA JOG dial to specify the track number and virtual track number for the import destination 8 To execute the import move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will beg
289. ign a control change to a fader the END byte will automatically be input at the end of the MIDI message e When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change to a fader the FAD byte will be automatically input as the variable value NOTE e If you assign a MIDI message manually be sure to input END at the end of the MIDI message e When you assign a MIDI message to a fader FAD must be input for one of the bytes If FAD is not input operating the fader will not do anything e If you input the values manually it is possible that an invalid MIDI message will be input For this reason you should use the 9 LEARN button to assign MIDI messages whenever possible Using the test tone oscillator Using the test tone oscillator The OSC page of the UTILITY screen lets you send the signal of the AW1600 s built in test oscil lator the test tone oscillator to the desired bus To access this page repeatedly press the Work Navigate section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key and use the CURSOR A Uu Y keys UTILITY stered gg OOOO HIDI US ozciILLrTOR HIDI 2 HAVEFORH FREFER use d d4onz MOISE pop ST T up LE aus EF EFF EUS TLF This page contains the following items da WAVEFORM Selects one of the following signals for output from the oscillator es OFF button Oscillator is off es 100Hz button 0 100 Hz s
290. iles This procedure allows you to import WAV files transferred from a computer to the Transport folder to be imported into specified audio tracks This is useful when importing WAV files you have edited on your computer into the AW 1600 NOTE e For information on importing WAV file data into the AW1600 pads refer to Importing From a Computer To the Pads on page 120 1 Begin by transferring the required WAV files from your computer to the AW1600 Trans port folder p 137 2 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR A Wf keys to access the TRACK screen WAV IMPORT page This page shows the following information FAD 1 MEDIEN NOE size 4 4 DO HEM BieuieORT LTR E FAD 3 CD in HAVE UTR e OSTEN IB HAL IHF Dn ngl e 30 Torere Ze kenen uu TR Lan 00 00 00 000 DD UR B D From WAVE File Selects the WAV file that will be imported If the media contains folders directories move to the folder that contains the WAV file you want to import and then specify the desired WAV file The icons shown here have the following meaning Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files es bat Indicates that a WAV file is selected e E Indicates that a folder in the same level is selected SD ses Indicates that the folder in the next higher level is selected 2 Mon
291. ill be restored from the backup data in temporary memory the next time the power is turned on Recording is stopped Track editing is ended Import from the CD RW drive is completed Import of a WAV file is completed In the PREFER page of the UTILITY screen you can make settings that affect the overall opera tion of the AW1600 such as specifying whether or not popup windows will appear and switching copy protect on off To access this page repeatedly press the Work Navigate section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key and use the CURSOR A Uu Y keys UTILITY stereo e MEO j i 4 OY HIDI I STORE Coupen El uuper Hone Teo n HID SE RECALL CONFIRM RL nuper TIME soo no E eT Dat COPYRIGHT El S0UMD CLIF TINE 30 SEC fae e LITE FARAH DISFTIHE 2 SEC FREROLL TIHE W in WE iFADERFLIF TRACE FOSTROLL TIHE M 5E igp 0 This page contains the following items STORE CONFIRM ON OFF button Specifies whether the TITLE EDIT popup window allow ing you to assign a name will appear when you store a scene library 2 RECALL CONFIRM ON OFF button Specifies whether a popup window will ask you to confirm the operation when you recall a scene or library 3 D OUT COPYRIGHT ON OFF button Specifies whether SCMS Serial Copy Management Sys tem copy protect flags will be written into the digital sig nal that is output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack Protect is enab
292. ill be erased completely Since this method erases all data from the media it will take a longer time than SIMPLY Move the cursor to the desired button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to con firm the erasure If you selected the OK button erasure will begin This operation cannot be halted e O Q O Le O E Ces C Be O AW1600 Owner s Manual Il 109 Playing an audio CD Playing an audio CD You can use the CD RW drive to play back a conventional audio CD or CD R RW media to which audio data has been written This is referred to as the CD Play function e The CD Play function can also play audio data from a mixed mode CD ROM only track 2 and fol lowing or CD Extra only the first session In the Work Navigate section repeatedly 4 To play the CD tracks press the PLAY b gt press the CD key or hold down the CD key To stop press the STOP W key key and use the CURSOR VT keys to During playback the audio output of the CD RW access the CD PLAY page of the CD screen drive will be sent directly to the stereo output channel In this page you can play back an audio CD inserted in Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume the CD RW drive When the CD Play function is on the keys of the transport section will have the following functions STEREO gg 00 00 00 000 2 1225 5 4 4 LI i CD PLAY TRACE TIHE Operation PLAY Ip key Play STOP W key Stop
293. in When the track has been imported you will return to the state of step 2 Backing up songs and sample libraries Here s how you can back up songs or sample libraries from the internal hard disk to CD R RW media e To backup AW1600 data to a computer connect the AW1600 to the computer via a USB cable and copy the song folders directly from the internal AW1600 hard disk to the computer For detailed operation refer to Transferring WAV Files To and From a Computer on page 137 Insert CD R RW media into the CD RW drive 2 In the Work Navigate section press the CD key The CD screen will appear 3 Repeatedly press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR Y keys to access the BACKUP page In this page you can back up songs or sample libraries from the internal hard disk to CD R RW media co HRITE nie on co FLAY ti ET D DISAELE SETTING a fe RHBHIE JE_Shu 18 M JF Swi na CUTE 152 AW1600 Owner s Manual This page contains the following items 1 List This area lists the songs or sample libraries that are saved on the hard disk The symbols at the right of the list indicate whether an item of data has been selected 6 or disabled O for backup 2 PAD button When this button is off the list will show the songs that are saved on the hard disk When this button 1s on the list will show the sample libraries that are saved on the hard disk
294. in2 River Robot Voice Scratch 1 Scratch2 SE Analog SE Beep SE SFX Sea Stock Farm Storm rio Oo ooo OQoOr rir oo o O or Oo o or o o Olo o ro r o o rrr rre r O o Jo o oco oc o OF r Oo ir Oo OO O O o r rir OoO o r o o ir Oo o o r oi o o o0 ro r o o ri r ir r r NE r0 v Cc Or OS Oo Oe r 0O o o OO O O O O r r r o OQ Ir o Oro oo r oo OC 0 0 0 O o o r r r r rm rr o GO D DX OO rioO r oo O oO O oO yoy re OPO rr Oro Fr Oro Oy rm yO OO OC Or OO Oyo OO rroommNMME Fv FO E Sao Oo Oe AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 O C ef Q Q lt 201 gt xe O D 2 e x 202 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Power does not turn on operation not possible ll Power does not turn on s the AC adaptor connected to an AC outlet of the correct voltage e Is the POWER switch turned ON f the power still does not turn on please contact your Yamaha dealer B LCD display is dim or dark Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the screen to adjust the contrast Bl Can t use the DATA JOG dial to control on screen parameters The JOG ON key may be on e Some parameters cannot be operated in certain states such as while the recorder is running Bl No sound or sound is too faint Are speakers or headphones connected correctly s your amp and other external devices turned
295. ine wave es 440Hz button 440 Hz sine wave es 1kHz button 0000 00000 1 kHz sine wave es 10 kHz button 10 kHz sine wave e NOISE button White noise When you turn on a button the oscillator output will immediately be sent to the specified bus Use the 3 6 buttons to specify the bus to which the signal will be sent e If the LEVEL knob is raised when you output the oscillator signal a high volume level may be produced suddenly Be sure to lower the LEVEL knob before you switch on the oscillator 2 LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the oscillator 3 AUX 1 2 buttons Send the oscillator output to AUX buses 1 2 4 EFF 1 2 buttons Send the oscillator output to effect buses 1 2 5 BUS L R button Sends the oscillator output to the L R bus 6 ST L R button Sends the oscillator output to the stereo bus 7 Level meter Indicates the output level of AUX 1 2 effect bus 1 2 and the L R bus e Sine waves and white noise have a higher sound pressure than they perceptually appear These signals may damage your speak ers if played at a high volume so please use caution AW1600 Owner s Manual WY Cc 9 DS O c gt Zeen gt z gt O 167 Digital input settings and Initializing the internal hard disk z GN 2 CL c LI lt A c 2 O pu O 2 LI 168 Digital input settings and Initializing the inter
296. ing the current song Saving the current song This section explains how to save the current song to the hard disk If you accidentally turn off the power of the AW1600 without saving the song all recordings or operations that you per formed since last saving the song will be lost You should make a habit of saving the song at appropriate breaks in your work 1 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR A WT keys to access the LIST page In this page you can select a song on the hard disk and load or delete it SE STEREO y DEDE 2 266 4 400 ae OS EE IHFURT FFT ETUE CANA J Lon 201 Hew sona 7 25 Fd DH zd B1 5H 16 TEHFO DELETE SAVES SE Bossa SHUTOUH COFY ror Ren 8 5 e 61e 1 List This is a list of the songs saved on the hard disk The line enclosed by a dotted frame in the center of the list is the song to which your operation you perform will apply The highlighted line is the song that is currently loaded into the AW 1600 This is referred to as the current song 2 SORT field Use these three buttons to select how the songs in the list will be sorted You can choose NAME sort alpha betically OLD sort by date of saving or SIZE sort by size 3 SAVE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the current song will be saved 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and
297. ing to the tempo Pad track 1 of the song E By using the Slice function you can change only the Pad track 3 tempo of a phrase without affecting its pitch Pad track 4 For example a sampled drum pattern can be played back at the tempo specified by the song s tempo map For details on using the Slice function p 124 ES e The settings of the Quick Loop Sampler and the sample data assigned to each pad are saved as part of the song Attack pad on Release pad off 112 AW1600 Owner s Manual Using sample libraries Using sample libraries Sample libraries contain sets of up to sixteen different samples that can be used by the Quick Loop Sampler When the AW1600 is shipped from the factory sets of samples such as drum loops and sounds effects are stored on the hard disk as sample libraries When you load one of these libraries samples will be assigned to each pad sample bank and you can use the pads to play the sam ples immediately Here s how to load a sample library and try it out 1 In the Quick Loop Sampler section either repeatedly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR l V keys to access the LIBRARY page of the SAMPLE screen IHPUT mM 10 00 00 000 2216 6 4 4 DOEI SE 4 3 Eik T 1 List This area displays a list of the sample libraries saved on the hard disk 2 SORT field These buttons sort the sample librari
298. ining stereo tracks that will be written to the CD R RW media The line TRACK 3 A DUD 1540 arises ara MA enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for Oh WRITE EY TI operations If no songs have been registered this will aerem indicate NO TRACK 1 opisc at once SETTING 3 If audio data has already been written to the inserted CD R RW media but the media has not yet been final ized a title of EXIST will be displayed for the already written data CO TRACK AT ONCE button Creates an audio CD using the Track At Once method 2 FINALIZE button 2 DISC AT ONCE button MM the inserted media by writing track informa Creates an audio CD using the Disc At Once method 3 INS button Inserts a new song in front of the song currently selected in the list 4 NEW button Adds a song at the end of the song list 5 DEL button Deletes the selected song from the list 6 EXECUTE button Executes writing to the CD media x D Q Q Q Q c Q O O UO 104 f AW1600 Owners Manual e If you have inserted CD RW media that contains data written using other than the Track At Once method a popup window will appear immediately after step 3 asking whether you want to erase the data If you want to erase the entire media move the cursor to the OK button If you want to cancel creation of an audio CD move the cursor to the CANCEL button Then press the ENTEH key 4 M
299. ion 163 Using the MIDI Remote function presets 163 Using the user defined Remote function 165 Using the test tone oscillator 167 Digital input settings and Initializing the internal hard disk 168 Overall settings for the AW1600 169 15 Using the AW1600 with external devices 171 Using the AW1600 with a workstation synth 171 Synchronizing the AW1600 with the workstation s sequencer 171 Recording playing AW1600 mix operations on the workstation s sequencer 172 Switching AW1600 scenes from the workstation s sequencer 173 Remotely controlling a tone generator module 174 Using external effects seseeeessssssesss 175 Connecting a digital recorder such as MD or DAT 177 Mixing down to a digital recorder 177 Recording audio data from a digital recorder 178 Appendix 179 Input library a IEN 179 Mastering library Iert 180 EQ library list ccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 181 Dynamics Parameters nnsnnennenseneesnnnnennrrenerrnnene 182 Dynamics library jet 185 Effects library jet 186 Effects Parameters nnnnennnnnennnnnnnennnrneenrrnererrreen 188 Sample library list ncscesnsceeseviedssmesnetuceriedavanoendoneese
300. is an area of memory that stores individual set tings such as for EQ or dynamics The AW1600 has sepa rate libraries for EQ dynamics effect channel input and mastering settings Each library is saved on the hard disk as part of the song E Tempo map The tempo map records changes in tempo and time sig nature that occur during the course of a song The tempo map is saved on the hard disk as part of the song E System data Various global settings that apply to all songs are collec tively referred to as system data System data is stored on the hard disk independently of the individual songs Parts of the AW1600 and what they do Parts of the AW1600 and what they do This section explains the names and functions of the various items on the AW1600 s top panel rear panel and front panel Top panel Data entry control Work Navigate section P 18 Input output section P 17 Selected Channel section P 19 section P 20 MIC LINE INPUT STEREO AUX OUT MONITOR OUT PHONES nnn A n CH e co lt eb C O O 2 CO O Bn c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GAIN GAIN Al GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly e d N di ki WW e w N e be A N a Cw e E CY ec ET E E ec ET N N N N N N N N LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC Weg Be SELECTED CHANNEL HIGH YAMAHA
301. its of measures or beats However you cannot move an event past the preceding or following event Move the cursor to the item that you want to edit and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the value If necessary you can play back the song to check that the tempo map event works as you expect In the same way use the NEW or INSERT button to add new events and set their parameters Bl Deleting a tempo map event Here s how to delete an unwanted event from the tempo map However you cannot delete the event that is located at the beginning of the song 1 Access the TEMPO page and scroll the list to select the tempo map event that you want to delete 2 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key The selected event will be deleted Importing data from an existing song Importing data from an existing song Here s how selected items of data such as scenes libraries or individual tracks of audio data from a song saved on the hard disk can be imported into the current song NOTE e When you execute this import operation the previous data for that item in the current song will be lost Use this procedure with caution Bi Selecting the song from which you will import data T In the Work Navigate section press the SONG key The SONG screen will appear 2 Repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR LV keys to access the IMPORT page dg 00 00
302. just only the last edited parameter The last edited parameter is remembered for each channel TYFE EEUIM SOURCE a L HMP SEEP Lom THRE gt HOLD RATIO OUT GAIA oct m a ch E Jade E ATTACK RELEASE EHEE 18m Gdmmz 1 GE LF TYFE EEVIH SOURCE 2 COMP SEET mg THRESHOLD RATIO QUT GAIM ot mia 5 Agg ieee ATTACK RELEASE KEHEE T 1amz e2Jmz 1 GE LR 3 If you once again recall a read only library that contains dynamics settings turning the DYN knob will again simultaneously adjust multiple parameters Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations Editing the parameters of an internal effect By using the EDIT page of the EFFI screen or EFF2 screen you can make detailed edits to the effect parame ters of the internal effects 1 and 2 If an effect 1s internally connected via send return in the mixer section the parameters EQ pan AUX send etc of the return channel that processes the return signal can also be edited in this page As an example here s how you can edit the settings of internal effect 1 internally connected via send return For internal effect 1 recall an effect library that uses the desired effect type You cannot change the effect type e g reverb delay in the EDIT page You must first recall library settings that use the desired type 2 In the Selected Channel section repeatedly press the EFFECT 1 knob or hold down the EFFECT 1 knob and use the CURSOR
303. k Loop Sampler Polyphony 4 voices stereo Recordable Time Total 47 seconds 16 bit stereo Total 29 seconds 24 bit stereo Edit Functions NAME TRIM PLAYBACK MODE ERASE EXTRACT CD IMPORT TRACK IMPORT WAV IMPORT B External Control MIDI IN 5 pin DIN MIDI OUT THRU 5 pin DIN FOOT SW phone USB USB 2 0 2s O C Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 221 Dimensions gt xe O D 2 e x 222 Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer For European models Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 13A Conforms to Environments El E2 E3 and E4 AW1600 Owner s Manual Unit mm Index A AJB KOY MEN 20 AB PO cree 65 A B Repeat 70 Access indicator 18 23 Accessing a screen page channel 24 Adjusting the input level 34 AM 72 Assigning input signals Bus recording 45 Assigning input signals Direct recording 42 ATT KOOD NE E 168 audio CD Sum 101 Basic settings 103 Disc A
304. k channels 1 8 you can also switch two adjacent odd numbered even numbered channels to function as paired channels The parameters except for pan and phase of paired channels will be linked so that adjusting one parameter will cause the same parameter of the other channel to follow A signal route that mixes the signals from multiple chan nels and send them to an output jack or recorder track input is called a bus Unlike channels which handle only a single signal a bus can combine multiple signals into one or two and send them to a destination The term bus comes from the vehicle that carries numerous people simultaneously The AW 1600 s mixer section lets you use the following buses Stereo bus This mixes the input signals to stereo and sends them via the stereo output channel to the stereo track of the recorder or to the STEREO OUT jacks AUX buses 1 2 These combine the signals from the various track input return and pad channels and output them via the STE REO AUX OUT jacks to an external device Use these when you will use an external effect processor or to create a mix differing from the stereo channel for musicians to monitor Effect buses 1 2 These combine the signals from the track input return and pad channels and input them to built in effects 1 and 2 However it is not possible for the return channel 1 2 signals to be returned to the input of the same effect 0 Buses L R
305. ks accept both XLR 3 31 and TRS phone plug type connectors Nominal input sensitiv ity can be adjusted from 46 dBu to 4 dBu Just about any type of balanced source can be connected here microphones direct boxes or the output from equipment with balanced line level outputs Unbalanced lines with standard phone plug connectors can be directly connected to the TRS inputs Connector wiring is as shown below Male XLR 1 ground connector 3 cold Ill er J 1 4 TRS phone plug X ae 7 Sleeve ground Tip h Ring cold 8 i e om INPUT PHANTOM 48V D MIDI D ON CH5 8 CH1 4 m FOOT SW DIGIT 2 MIC LINE INPUT jack 8 Hi Z This is a high impedance 1 4 phone input jack unbal anced The nominal input level is 46 to 4 dBu An instrument with high output impedance such as an electric guitar or bass with passive type pickups can be connected here 3 STEREO AUX OUT jacks These are 1 4 phone output jacks unbalanced that out put the signals of the stereo bus or AUX bus 1 2 4 MONITOR OUT jacks These are 1 4 phone output jacks unbalanced for con nection to your monitor setup such as a stereo system or powered speakers 5 PHONES jack This is a 1 4 TRS phone output jack for connecting your headphones for monitoring AW1600 Owner s Manual e e co z lt C T O O 2 O O A 21 3 bm O Q c 3 2 Q e D z O O
306. kstation synthe sizer a synthesizer that has a built in sequencer Synchronizing the AW1600 with the workstation s sequencer Here s how you can use MTC to synchronize the AW 1600 song with the sequencer built into your workstation synth In this example we will also use MMC to remotely control the transport of the AW1600 from your workstation synth Refer to the following diagram and connect the AW1600 to your workstation synthe sizer MT ala ajala WM c heeg MIDI OUT MIDI IN BEC H MIDIIN MIDI OUT e Synthesizer with AW1600 built in sequencer 2 In the Work Navigate section use the UTIL ITY key to access the MIDI 1 page of the UTILITY screen Set the IN PORT and OUT PORT to MIDI 3 In the Work Navigate section use the UTIL ITY key to access the MIDI 2 page of the UTILITY screen Turn on the SLAVE button in the MMC MODE field and turn on the MASTER button in the MTC MODE field The AW 1600 will be set to function as MMC slave and MTC master Example settings for synchronization using MTC and MMC DEDERE DI 2126 6 4 4 DOEI HIDI IJ YHE OUT HAC HODE HTC HODE HIDI CH EE Ter MasteR Dem T 59086 me Ie FGH CHG PS GE OFF DEU 2 ARG H cr CHG HODE OFF t osc On D IH HDD ba FREFER Use WEST 00 00 00 00 00 4 Move the cursor to the DEV field and set the value to match the device number of your workstation synthesizer When
307. l be displayed during the restore process Exchange the CD R RW media for the media of the corresponding number Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key NOTE P e When a song or sample library with the same name already exists the name of the restored song or sample library will automatically be changed For example if 001 Song already exists the song name will be altered as in 001 SongO 001 Song etc Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations You can back up an AW1600 song in a format that is compatible with the other AW series AW4416 AW2816 AW2400 AW16G Conversely a song that was backed up by the other AW series can be restored into the AW1600 NOTE e Only the audio data recorded in a song can be exchanged with the other AW series Mix parameters libraries and system data cannot be backed up restored in this way E Backing up an AW1600 song in a format compatible with the other AW series If you turn on the AS AW2816 button in the BACKUP page of the CD screen the data will be saved in the AW2816 backup file format An AW2816 backup file can be restored into the other AW series version 2 0 or later for AW4416 For the procedure refer to Backing up songs and sample libraries earlier in this manual NOTE e Backup in the AW2816 backup file format is limited to one song at a time e When you perform a backup in the AW2816 backup file for
308. l data on the internal hard disk to a computer before exe cuting this operation E Loading the demo song and sample library You can load the demo song and sample library from the included CD ROM to restore the AW1600 to its factory set condition Insert the included CD ROM into the CD RW drive of the AW1600 2 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the CD key to access the CD screen RESTORE page 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button and press the ENTER key Loading from the CD ROM will begin When loading is finished the contents of the display will change as follows CD HRITE CDFLAY SE DISHELE RESTORE E SETTING 2 5TEH 4 EXECUTE 4 Move the cursor to the DISABLE button and press the ENTER key The DISABLE button will change to ENABLE and the symbol at the right of the list will change to About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 5 Move the cursor to the PAD button and press the ENTER key Once again loading from the CD ROM will begin When loading is finished the contents of the display will change as follows CD HRITE COFLAY 1 ok T ERCEUF DISRELE RESTORE SETTING SYSTEM J EXECUTE 6 Move the cursor to the ALL button and press the ENTER key 7 Move the cursor to the DISABLE button and press the ENTER key The DISPLAY button will change to ENABLE and all symbols at the right of the list will chan
309. layback when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000010 02 Play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 3 MMC DEFERRED PLAY lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the PLAY key is pressed lt Reception gt If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin playback when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000011 03 Deferred play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 4 MMC FAST FORWARD lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the FF key is pressed lt Reception gt If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin fast forward when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Con
310. layed if appropriate clock data is not being sent to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack While this message is displayed all channels will be muted and the recorder section will not operate To make the AW1600 oper ate you must either input the correct clock signal or switch the DIGITAL IN PATCH setting to DISABLE AW1600 Owner s Manual internal clock If you select any other setting the AW1600 will syn 2 ATT knob Adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the DIGI TAL STEREO IN jack to the stereo bus e The ATT knob is meaningful only if DIGITAL IN PATCH is set to STEREO BUS 3 DIGITAL REC ON OFF button Enables ON or disables OFF digital recording from the DIGITAL IN jack and importing of digital audio data from an audio CD or WAV file inserted in the CD RW drive When you switch this setting ON the following message will be displayed OBSERVE Copyright Notice Written in Owner s Manual Cancel OK If you agree to the conditions described in Copyright Notice p 6 select OK When you select OK recording and importing of digital audio data will be enabled e The DIGITAL REC ON OFF button is always set to OFF when you turn on the power 4 VARI PITCH ON OFF button Selects whether the sampling frequency will be adjustable Vari pitch function when DIGITAL IN PATCH is set to DISABLE If you turn this button on vari pitch will be enabled and you can use the VARI PITCH knob to adjus
311. le Use this when you want to transfer audio data to your computer so that you can edit the data using a waveform editing program ENCHG T COHF FITCH j TR D 1 00 00 08 000 AA ESSE C zai E MERGE i WAVE FILE ru TRE 1 11 For details on the parameters and procedure for the Export command refer to Exporting WAV files p 136 MERGE Audio playback performance can be improved by using this command to merge a number of separate regions sec tions of audio data created in separate recording passes in a specified track into one continuous region The merge command creates a continuous region from the beginning of the track to the end of the last region on the track and sections of the track that contained no regions are replaced with audio silence E CHG E T COMF 3 FITCH EXFORT MERGE E LL MERGE E Parameter list Parameter Rame Explanation 1 16 A single audio track 1 From TR 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks 2 From V TR Virtual track number AW1600 Owner s Manual D E o D x O 135 RV Q Q D a e Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files In this section we ll discuss transferring exporting audio data from the AW1600 tracks to a com puter in WAV file format and transferring importing audio data in WAV
312. led if the button is on and disabled if the button is off If copy protect is enabled you will be able to copy the sig nal from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack on an MD or DAT recorder but it will not be possible to make a second generation digital copy from that data When copy protect is enabled AW1600 D OUT COPYRIGHT ON DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack Digital recording possible C hel 00000 OOO Digital recording not possible 4 PARAM DISP TIME Adjusts the duration for which the value will be displayed in the upper right of the screen when you use the knobs of the Selected Channel section to edit a parameter This set ting has a range of 0 9 seconds AW1600 Owner s Manual V Cc 9 O c gt Zeen gt z gt O a 169 Overall settings for the AW1600 5 FADER FLIP Specifies whether faders 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 will adjust the track channel levels TRACK or the input channel pad levels INPUT When the power is turned on this set ting will always return to TRACK NOTE e Even if you select INPUT the function of the TRACK SEL keys will not be affected 6 NUDGE MODE Selects the playback method that will be used by the Nudge function a function that lets you use the JOG ON key and DATA JOG dial to search for a location e AFTER Play back repeatedly starting at the cur rent location for the duration specified by the
313. ler synthesizer or rhythm machine adjust the parameters accordingly No Data User area 2 O C Q Q Q lt 181 AW1600 Owner s Manual Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels However you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound The AW1600 features com prehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels tape returns and the bus and stereo outputs These processors allow you to compress expand compress expand compand gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibil ity Out Gain sets the compressor s output signal level E Compressor S ee Compression tends to reduce the average signal level Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches Knee hard the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Output Level Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold If the release time is too short
314. les WAVE data and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws Any violation of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument AW1600 Owner s Manual 1 Before you start 9 loifere Preio nm e TE 9 Remember to back up your data 9 About the built in CD RW drive aaaaaaanaanannanannnneanni 10 Using the CD RW drive uelis e des tuto ooa este stesse ues 10 Connecting the AC adaptor nnnsnneneeeeeeeeereeeeeeeee 11 Turning the power on off ccccsseseeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeens 11 2 Introducing the AW1600 13 Features of the AW1600 ssnannnsnennnsnnnnsnnsnnnnnennnnnennne 13 AW1600 terminology s sneenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnsnnnnene 15 Keele 15 Mixer section MN 15 Quick Loop Sampler section 16 87 7 e 16 Parts of the AW1600 and what they do 17 Lee DANG ke 17 pirigel Me M 21 Front panel Mb P 29 Basic operation on the AW1600 24 Viewing the display sseeeeeee 24 Accessing a screen page channel 2
315. ly you can also transmit MMC from the AW10600 to an external device to control its transport e Example of using MTC MMC to synchronize the operation of the AW1600 and a MIDI sequencer computer MIDI OUT Wie THRU connector gt MIDI IN LE ee sa MIDIIN mc SEET connector amp MIDI OUT SES Te UM See lt _ CT External MIDI device e g computer AW1600 USB cable Automate scene changes and mix parame ter operations When you recall a scene on the AW 1600 or operate its mix parameters the corresponding messages program changes or control changes can be transmitted to an external device If you record these messages on a MIDI sequencer that is synchronized to the AW1600 song these scene recall operations or realtime mix parameter operations can be reproduced whenever you want e Example of recording playing scene selections and mix parameter operations on a MIDI sequencer computer Control changes MIDI OUT Program changes THRU connector gt MIDI IN LER au 1 MIDI IN connector a O TT a lt Control changes Program changes or AW1600 device e g computer USB cable e MIDI Remote MIDI Remote is a function that lets you use the AW 1600 as a physical controller for an external device You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders and TRACK SEL ke
316. ly EQ and dynamics processing to the signals that are input from MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 and send them to the recorder tracks or to the STEREO OUT jacks Track channels 1 16 These channels apply EQ and dynamics processing to the audio playback signals from audio tracks 1 16 of the recorder and send the signals to the stereo track and the STEREO OUT jacks You can also perform bounce recording by sending these channels to different tracks Return channels 1 2 These channels send the return signals from the internal effects to the stereo track and the STEREO OUT jacks Pad channels 1 4 These channels apply EQ and dynamics processing to the playback of Quick Loop Sampler pads 1 4 and send the signals to the stereo track and the STEREO OUT jacks Stereo output channel This applies EQ and dynamics processing to the signal of the stereo bus which combines the signals of the various channels and sends it to the stereo track or to the STE REO OUT jacks The same signal is also output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and from the PHONES jack AW1600 Owners Manual f 15 AW1600 terminology t es O Q c Q 5 e t 3 D Z h D 16 E Paired channels For track channels 9 10 15 16 pad channels 1 4 and return channels 1 2 the parameters except for pan and phase are always linked for adjacent pairs of channels These are called paired channels For input channels 1 8 and trac
317. ly be turned off Also if the TEST button is turned on this whether any errors occurred while writing the data button will automatically be set to DISABLE AW1600 Owner s Manual J 103 Writing audio data Track At Once Writing audio data Track At Once Here s how to use the Track At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD R RW media Use this method if you expect to be adding tracks to the disc later or if you want a two second gap between tracks 1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track 3 Insert CD R RW media in the drive move is selected for the stereo track of the the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button song s you want to write and press the ENTER key Only the virtual track that can be played by the stereo A display like the following will appear track Oe the current track will be written to disc If the correct virtual track 1s not selected load that song use the ST TRACK page of the MONITOR screen to switch to the correct virtual track and then TRACK 1 f DER S90 iee 474 HU CD WRITE EY save the song TRACE AT ONCE DIBL ooatrt FIHRLIZE 2 Repeatedly press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR Y HEL cece EEE DECH keys to access the CD WRITE page of the mE RW CD screen Immediately after you access this page the following two buttons will appear in the display Song list This is a list of the songs conta
318. ly hear the currently selected region of the CD DA 5 ToTR Selects the track number into which the data will be imported If the import source is an audio CD or a ste reo WAV file you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1 2 15 16 6 To V TR Selects the virtual track number 1 8 into which the data will be imported 7 To Start Specifies the starting location in counter display for mat of the import destination to which the data will be imported When importing a WAV file TRAGER Jean 1j 10 00 00 000 2125 5 27a LU TCDIR EOETT 1 e LI TEH IH Iz un nn na GB66 LISTEN ne 30 DD I I ri H 00 00 00 000 a From WAVE file Selects the WAV file that will be imported If the media contains folders directories move to the folder that contains the WAV file you want to import and then specify the desired WAV file The icons shown here have the following meaning e uw Indicates that a WAV file is selected Ji a RS Indicates that a folder in the same level is selected S pes usen Indicates that the folder in the next higher level is selected Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files 2 Mono stereo Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing is monaural M or stereo S This field is for display only and cannot be changed 3 Size Indicates the playback length in msec of the WAV file select
319. maha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd Tong Yang Securities Bldg 16F 23 8 Yoido dong Youngdungpo ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 3770 0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Co
320. mat data other than the audio tracks will not be backed up All virtual tracks of tracks 1 16 will be backed up For the stereo track only the current track will be backed up 24 bit songs are not compati ble e Depending on the data size some songs can t be saved as AW2816 backup files If this problem occurs use the Optimize function to reduce the data size E Restoring the other AW series songs Insert CD R RW media containing the other AW series song backup into the AW1600 2 In the Work Navigate section press the CD key The CD screen will appear 3 Repeatedly press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR Yl Y keys to access the RESTORE page 4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button and press the ENTER key Data will be read from the inserted CD R RW media When the data has been read a screen like the follow ing will appear CD HRITE COFLAY 3 ERCEUF P RESTORE DI HELE SETTING J EXECUTE AW1600 Owner s Manual 155 c ab E o CH a E O c O o Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations 5 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select a song that you want to restore 6 Move the cursor to the ENABLE DISABLE button and press the ENTER key The symbol at the right of the data will change to and the data will be selected for restoring e The list will show all the songs that were b
321. matically be turned on when you operate the TRACK SEL key of a track channel LATCH UNLATCH button Selects how the TRACK SEL key of a track channel will operate when pressed e LATCH The setting will alternate on off each time you press the TRACK SEL key MIDI data transmitted MIDI data SW 7F transmitted SW 00 t t of Ng b 4 KA of lt p ao er a p gt L Joe oe el gt J Oo bh Uh e UNLATCH The setting will be on while you hold down the TRACK SEL key and will turn off when you release the key MIDI data MIDI data transmitted SW 7F transmitted SW 00 j i off wll off b 4 p lt C gt a 8 LEARN button When this button is on the MIDI message received from the MIDI IN connector will be assigned to the currently selected fader or TRACK SEL key This is a convenient way to assign MIDI messages quickly ES e If two or more MIDI messages are received while the LEARN but ton is on the last received MIDI message will be input in the MIDI message field e If a system exclusive message longer than sixteen bytes is received the first sixteen bytes will be displayed AW1600 Owner s Manual MIDI message This area displays in hexadecimal form the MIDI mes sage that is assigned to the currently selected fader or TRACK SEL key You can move the cursor to each numeric box and turn the DATA JOG dial to edit the value of each byte two digi tal hexadecim
322. mes displayed in the AW1600 s counter can be either absolute time ABS or relative time REL The tion can be freely specified 2 REW lt lt key This key rewinds the current location Each time you press this key you will alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed Rear panel absolute time zero location is fixed but the relative time zero loca Parts of the AW1600 and what they do 3 FF PP key This key fast forwards the current location Each time you press this key you will alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed 4 STOP W key This key stops playback recording fast forward or rewind 5 PLAY gt key If you press this key while the recorder is stopped play back will begin If you press this key during fast forward or rewind nor mal speed playback will begin If you press this key during recording recording will stop and playback will resume punch out 6 REC key If you hold down this key and press the PLAY P gt key while the recorder is stopped recording will begin If you hold down this key and press the PLAY P gt key during playback you will switch from playback to record ing punch in Le c 59 Ors Loes Osch Qe 5 e PHONES _ MONITOR OUT UNBAL 10dBV PROFESSIONAL AUDIO MODEL AW1600 JAPAN ov YAMAHA CORPORATION STEREO AUX OUT UNBAL 10dBV D D MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 XLR TRS Phone These balanced input jac
323. meters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Range dB 70 to 0 71 points Attack ms O to 120 121 points Hold ms 0 02 ms to 2 14 sec 216 points 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points Decay ms Threshold sets the level at which the gate closes cut ting off the signal Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close For ducking trigger signal levels at and above the thresh old level activate ducking and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter AW1600 Owner s Manual Range controls the level to which the gate closes It can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely At a setting of 70 dB the gate closes com pletely when the input signal falls below the threshold At a setting of 30 dB the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through At a setting of 0 dB the gate has no effect When signals are gated abruptly the sudden cutoff can sound odd For ducking a setting of 70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff At a setting of 30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB At a setting of 0 dB the duck has no effect Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial tr
324. n Deletes the library or scene that is selected in the list 5 TITLE button Accesses the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can edit the name of the library or scene selected in the list ES e For some libraries or scene memories buttons other than those listed here may appear or some of these buttons may not appear For details refer to the explanations on page 77 and following AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list so that the dotted frame encloses the library or scene to which you want to store the data Regardless of where the cursor is located turning the DATA JOG dial will scroll the list 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the data e If you selected read only data indicated by a lock icon in step 2 a message of Read Only will appear and it will not be possible to execute the Store operation e Scene number 00 is read only data used to initialize the cur rent scene Scene numbers 01 96 are writable data 4 Assign a name to the data as desired Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on how to assign a name gt p 25 The library or scene will be stored e You have the option of making settings so that the TITLE EDIT popup window does not appear when you perform the Store operation For details refer to
325. n nector disable the power management mode suspend sleep standby hibernate on your com puter Connect the USB connector to the computer before you power on the AW1600 Execute the following before turning the power to the AW1600 on off connecting disconnecting the USB cable or turning the USB Storage mode on off Close all application programs e If the USB Storage mode is off make sure that data is not being transmitted from the AW1600 e If the USB Storage mode is engaged make sure that reading and writing files is not in progress e If the USB Storage mode is engaged safely remove the AW1600 from the Windows taskbar or drag the AW1600 icons from the Macintosh desktop to the trash after closing all AW1600 windows Leave an interval of at least six seconds between powering the AW1600 on and off or between dis connecting and connecting the USB cable AW1600 Owner s Manual 7 DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT jacks These jacks allow direct transfer of digital audio between the AW 1600 and DAT recorders MD MiniDisc record ers CD recorders and other consumer format digital audio gear These connectors conform to the IEC 60958 standard FOOT SW jack A separately sold foot switch Yamaha FC5 can be con nected here to control transport operations such as start stop or to perform punch in out NOTE P e The appropriate operation may not occur if you use a foot switch other than the Yamaha FC5 or equiv
326. n input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in out put level Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is compressed almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected gt xe O D Q x 182 l AW1600 Owners Manual B Expander dB Output Level 3 Expansion ratio 2 1 Knee knee5 e eae GE py p Threshold 10dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level An expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold the expander reduces low level noise and effectively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material Expander EXP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 20 25 30 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms 0 to 120 121 points Outgain dB 0 to 18 36 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander Signals above the thresh old pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by
327. n repeat 3 Move the cursor to the item that you want to edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold set and turn the DATA JOG dial to select down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the the setting CURSOR l Y keys to access the SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen e Playback mode settings are made for each pad The playback 2 Repeatedly press the CURSOR m key to mode of a pad will not change when you switch the sample access the second page of the SETUP Bauhinia Het page SAHPLE Fan z ty 0100 00 010 seize 474 DOLD FAD BANK A HODE LIERARY E 1 ACORUHEAS LOOP TRIGGER cp iF i znrEa RIFF11 DREES Ru GATE TRE IHF RLEG RIFFZI OHESHOT GATE HAV IAF E4 arcHoRUS 1 LOOF GATE HEHORY HOHITOR TEMFO ORIGIHAL Since the SETUP page contains numerous settings it is divided into two pages To return to the first page press the CURSOR lt key repeatedly The second page contains the following items a One Shot Loop mode Selects one of the following two modes to specify how the sample assigned to the pad will play back e ONE SHOT The playback region of the sam ple will be played only once e ILOOPB ouem The playback region will be played repeatedly NOTE P e If you select LOOP the playback will automatically follow the time signature and tempo that are specified in the TEMPO MAP page of the SONG screen In this case the way in which the sample plays back will depend on the SLICE setting
328. nal effects 1 2 Of library num bers 001 128 numbers 001 041 are read only and 042 128 can be written ill Recalling effect library data Perform one of the following actions to access the LIBRARY page of the EFF 1 2 screen Press the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 knob repeatedly Hold down the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 knob and press the CURSOR A VI V keys Hold down the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 knob and turn it to left or right LIERAR ERE a REPERE HALL You can also recall library data for an effect that has been inserted in the input channel directly from the INPUT SETTING popup window To do so move the cursor to the EFF1 or EFF2 button in the window and press the ENTER key AW1600 Owner s Manual NOTE P e The M symbol indicates monaural input and S indicates that stereo input is supported If an effect indicated by M is inserted into paired channels such as the stereo output channel the sense of stereo will be lost e 019 HQ Pitch cannot be recalled to effect 1 Mastering library This library contains settings used to apply EQ and dynamics processing to the stereo output channel during mixdown It contains EQ and dynamics settings suitable for processing the final mix All library numbers 00 13 are read only and 00 is data for initializing the stereo out put channel Bl Recalling mastering library data Repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the
329. nal hard disk In the D IN HDD page of the UTILITY screen you can make settings for digital input and initialize the internal hard disk To access this page repeatedly press the Work Navigation section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key and use the CURSOR A l Y keys UTILITV Track x ODFO0 00000 2 126 1 4 OLD HIDI LS DIGITAL IH FATCH VARI FITCH SIMT HDD IL DIDL 2 DISABLE FORMAT E osc cres oe E DIH HOD ATT Ty DLDDz RUTBSRUE Be FREFER E quim oer IL 3n use Blues a ga This page contains the following items CD DIGITAL IN PATCH Selects one of the following as the destination to which the signal from the DIGITAL IN jack will be sent e DISABLE The DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be disabled e INPUT 1 2 7 8 The signal will be sent to input channels 1 2 7 8 If you select this setting the MIC LINE input jacks for the corresponding input chan nels will be disabled e STEREO BUG The signal will be sent to the ste reo bus a e If you select DISABLE the AW1600 will operate using its own chronize to the clock contained in the input signal from the DIGI TAL STEREO IN jack However when playing an audio CD the AW1600 always operates using its own clock NOTE i e You cannot switch this setting while the recorder is running e If you select a setting other than DISABLE a message of WRONG WORD CLOCK will be disp
330. ncies 010 E Bass 2 Unlike program 009 this emphasizes the low range of the electric bass 011 Syn Bass 1 Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range 012 Syn Bass 2 Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to a synth bass 013 Piano 1 This is used to make a piano sound brighter 014 Piano 2 Emphasize the attack and low range of the piano sound by using a compressor 015 E G Clean Use for line recording an electric guitar or semi acoustic guitar to get a slightly hard sound 016 E G Crunch 1 Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound 017 E G Crunch 2 This is a variation on program 016 018 E G Dist 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer 019 E G Dist 2 This is a variation on program 018 020 A G Stroke 1 Emphasizes the bright tones of an acoustic guitar 021 A G Stroke 2 This is a variation on program 020 You can also use it for the electric gut guitar 022 A G Arpeg 1 Corrects arpeggio technique of an acoustic guitar 023 A G Arpeg 2 This is a variation on program 022 024 BrassSection Use with trumpets trombones or sax With one instrument adjust the HIGH or H MID frequency 025 Male Vocal 1 Use as a template for male vocal Adjust the HIGH or H MID setting according to the voice quality 026 Male Vocal 2 This is a variation on program
331. nd hold the INPUT SEL key of an input chan nel the INPUT SETTING popup window will appear allowing you to make settings for the corresponding input channel To close this popup window and return to the previous screen move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key Track recording Repeatedly press the IMFUT 1 Eg d same INPUT SEL key as d o es in step 4 and the signal sent from that input chan nel to the L R bus will be switched on off Each time you press the TRACE INPUT SEL key the screen IHPUT 8 LE will change as follows 99 ES e For an input channel that is selected as a record source the assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off and IHFUT 1 n connections will be made so that IHFUT 2 4 4 the signal can be monitored via b ee ee the track channel AW1600 Owners Manual f 45 I Q Q s lt D Q O SS CL 2 eX Assigning input signals to tracks Bus recording 6 As necessary use the same procedure to specify other input channels as recording sources Press the TRACK SEL key s for the record destination track s You can select up to two tracks as the record destina tion If you select track 1 3 5 or 7 the signal will be con nected to bus L If you select track 2 4 6 or 8 the sig nal will be connected to bus R If you select tracks 9 10 15 16 odd numbered tracks will be connected to bus L and even
332. nd its abbreviation 2 POSITION Shows the position of each locate point as time code or the counter display format 3 MEAS Shows the position of each locate point as measures beats This value is calculated according to the tempo and time signature of the tempo map p 149 The format in which the position is displayed will depend on the locate point The following table shows the display format for each locate point AW1600 Owner s Manual Here s how you can adjust the position of a previously registered locate point or marker Locate point POSITION field MEAS field REL ZERO Time code START Time code Measure beat Time code Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat HRREEER F ziTIOH HEI i n pg UU Bag ELE ee BOO 6 00 D O0 08 24 OD BTA T LOCATOR d 00 00 34 000 DIR BS 00 00 46 407 O24 HARKER Counter display format Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat e f a locate point has not been registered the numerical field will indicate Move the cursor to the locate point value that you want to adjust and turn the DATA JOG dial to change the value Only in the case of the Start point a Change START Position popup window will ask you for confirma tion when you attempt to change the value Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key and then change the value
333. nd or shrink the wave form display in the amplitude axis The value of this field indicates the level range of the waveform dis played in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window If you select 0 dB the top and bottom edges of the screen will correspond to the maximum level 5 LISTEN button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the waveform in the display area of the WAVE DISPLAY popup window will be played once During playback the vertical line pointer that indi cates the current location will move and the counter value will also change You cannot perform conventional transport operations when playing back by pressing the LISTEN button 6 EXIT button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key you will exit the WAVE DISPLAY popup window and return to the previous VIEW page e Even after displaying the WAVE DISPLAY popup window you can use the TRACK SEL keys to switch the track for viewing 5 As necessary move the cursor to the TIME AMP fields and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the vertical and horizontal scale of the waveform display 6 To specify a location within the popup win dow move the cursor to the counter and turn the DATA JOG dial Turning the dial toward the right will move the pointer forward and turning the dial toward the left will move it backward If necessary you can use the LISTEN button to play the waveform region shown in the WAVE DISPLAY pop
334. nd then press a pad the sample assigned to sample bank A of the library will play 3 DELETE button Deletes the selected library data from the hard disk 4 PROTECT button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the Protect setting will be switched on off for the library data selected in the list Library data for which Protect is turned on is indicated by a lock icon and cannot be edited or deleted 5 NEW button Creates new library data on the hard disk Channel library This library contains mix parameter settings that can be loaded into a channel It is convenient to use this library when you want to use the settings of a specific channel for another channel Library numbers 00 01 are read only data for initializing a channel and 02 64 can be written Channel library data contains the following parameters Channel on off e Attenuator EQ on off EQ parameter settings e Dynamics processor on off e Dynamics processor parameter settings Fader position Aux buses 1 2 pre fader post fader setting e Send levels to Aux buses 1 2 Effect buses 1 2 pre fader post fader setting e Send levels to effect buses 1 2 Details on libraries and scene memory Bl Recalling channel library data Repeatedly press the Selected Channel section VIEW key or hold down the VIEW key and use the CURSOR A l Y keys to access the CH LIB page of the VIEW screen HETER CHRHHEL FAD
335. ndow will ask you to confirm that you ees want to cancel record ready mode Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 7 Press the RTZ k key to rewind the song and press the PLAY B key The stereo track will be played back Use the STE v c KS Ces C Ben ab Q O O c gt O O O c O Ke GE 5 To play back the stereo track repeatedly press the Quick Navigate section MONI TOR key or hold down the MONITOR key REO fader to adjust the monitor level and use the CURSOR A ViV keys to When playback ends and you want to move to a differ access the ST TRACK page of the MONI ent screen switch the ST TRACK ON OFF button TOR screen OFF ES e If desired you can use the UNDO REDO button to cancel the recording that was made on the stereo track gt p 61 or TRACE a gy 00 00 00 000 2 128 4 4 00I use the ST TRACK page to switch virtual tracks and record LET TRACK OFF e another take gt p 62 H Save the song If the song is not saved after it has been recorded as a stereo track it cannot be selected for burning to a CD AW1600 Owner s Manual 87 Bounce ping pong recording procedure Here s how to perform the bounce ping pong recording procedure which lets you combine mul tiple tracks onto one or two tracks X Q O 2 Q 2 CL o O c O D O O D Q CT O 2 o 88 e If you plan to
336. nel faders to an appropriate level If necessary adjust the EQ and dynamics of each track channel You can adjust the track channel EQ dynamics in a similar way as for the input channels press a TRACK SEL key to select a track channel and use the Selected Channel section EQ knob and DYN knob Using the internal effects via send return Using the internal effects via send return You can use the internal effects via send return to add effects to the mixdown As an example here s how to use internal effect 1 in this way Bl internally connecting an B Adjusting the effect send level internal effect via send return Here s how to load an effect library into internal effect 1 and adjust the level effect send level of the signal that is The Track recording chapter explained how to insert an i sent from each channel via effect bus 1 to internal effect 1 internal effect into an input channel by using the input library If an insert effect has been inserted in a channel you must first un insert that effect cancel the insertion before you can use it in a send return configuration 1 Repeatedly press the EFFECT 1 knob or hold down the EFFECT 1 knob and use the CURSOR A l Y keys to access the Press any INPUT SEL key to select an LIBRARY page of the EFF1 screen input channel for operations 2 Select the effect library that you want to 2 Repeatedly press the EFFECT 1 knob or us
337. next higher level is selected 2 Mono Stereo Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing is monaural M or stereo S This field is only for display and cannot be edited 3 Size Indicates the size length in msec units of the WAV file selected for importing This field 1s only for dis play and cannot be edited 4 LISTEN ENTER UP buttons The name and function of the button displayed here will depend on the item that you select for the From WAV File parameter If WAV file is selected The LISTEN button will be displayed allowing you to hear the WAV file repeatedly If a folder in the same level is selected The ENTER button will be displayed allowing you to move into that folder If the next higher folder t is selected The UP button will be displayed allowing you to move to the folder above 5 To PAD 6 To BANK Q To NAME These have the same function as when importing from an audio CD CD Extra ES e f a mixed mode format CD ROM is inserted in the CD RW drive a popup window will appear allowing you to select AUDIO CD DA or WAVE WAV files for importing Move the cursor to the button for the type of data that you want to import and press the ENTER key e Only 16 bit or 24 bit 44 1 kHz mono or stereo WAV files can be imported Also WAV files having a different bit depth from the song cannot be imported AW1600 Owner s Manual e If you import a monaural WAV
338. ng commands For details refer to What you can do using editing commands p 127 10 If you want to mute a specific pad track press the Work Navigate section TRACK key repeatedly or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR A J keys to access the PAD page of the TRACK screen In the PAD page of the TRACK screen you can switch muting on off for each pad track Fat e oy DEDERE NOE 2 1ze 0 4 4 DO VIEH H LTR E D One Shot Loop mode An icon indicates whether the sample assigned to the pad is set to One Shot mode D or Loop mode D AW1600 Owner s Manual XI Q c o Q o D x 9 2 O 115 Recording playing a pad performance Grid Recording Step Recording the Pads O E O 9 O O o RV z o D 116 2 Pad track number This indicates the pad track number 1 4 At the right is displayed the name of the sample assigned to the sam ple bank selected for that pad 3 Track mute button This button switches muting on off for each track Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch between the following two settings ll esee The pad track can be played M Pr RE The pad track is muted 11 Move the cursor to the track mute button for the track that you want to mute and press the ENTER key to switch the button to R muted To cancel muting move the cursor to the track mute button and press the ENTER key once again e Ifa
339. ng playing a sound clip 35 Relative zero point 65 REMOTE key 18 REPEAT key aainnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 20 Responsibility for loss of data 9 SIS 21 RTZ MN ERNRS 21 Sample bank 111 Sample bank and sample terminology sssssss 16 SAMPLE EDIT key 18 Sample library 78 113 BACs EE 152 library MSU ERRORES 200 Recall MCCC TETTE 79 Restoring ERE EE HUP 154 Sampling Editing the sample name 121 TOMMIN G NT 122 Saving the current song 63 scene rz inpr gro eec eS DEUS 76 PROTECT button wcccecsctentncciemsais 79 Recall Safe function 80 SCENE KOY 5e trio tnr herpes 20 scene memory Basic operation BICI eegene Recall aec 79 elle S EE 74 terminology edegegssedEaedsegeegeg eg 16 SELECT E 18 Selected channel 24 Selected Channel section 26 AW1600 Owner s Manual Appendix 225 Index gt O O D 2 e x 226 ee 20 SUL e e EE 11 SHUTDOWN page 11 SIMPLY button E 109 EE Eege 124 Slice function deisde E 124 ee E 143 E E 155 AW series cccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 155 BOK UD NEN T cere 152 bit dent 143 CODI e sees 147 Deiere 147 Editing settings 146 Editing the song name
340. nitor level appropriately use the AW1600 s MONITOR PHONES knob and the volume control of your moni tor system ES e The demo song uses the Scene function to switch the settings of the mixer This means that playback will occur using the O G O V O eb O eb Be O O Kr HETER E E E E T R pre specified balance you do not need to operate the fad M MM AMOR TUE ANE ENDE Ge FADER 3 Bus CH VIEH CH LIE 3 The VIEW screen METER page contains meters that show the input level of each channel and the output level of the stereo output channel It is convenient to display this page when you want to check the level of each track NOTE e Make sure that the selected channel area at the upper left of the METER page indicates either TRACK 1 8 or TRACK 9 I Ej I 10 15 16 If neither of these are displayed press either the TRACK SEL key 1 8 or 9 10 15 16 RTZ REW FF 2 Lower the AW1600 s STEREO fader to the La Ia cu infinity position Also make sure that the STOP PLAY REC AW1600 s MONITOR PHONES knob and the volume of your monitor system are turned down AW1600 Owner s Manual 29 Mixing the demo song Mixing the demo song When you play back a song tracks 1 16 of the recorder are directly connected to track channels 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 of the mixer The signals that pass through track channels 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 are sent
341. not be changed while the AW1600 is running Copying or deleting a song Copying or deleting a song Here s how to copy or delete a song in the hard disk NOTE P T In the Work Navigate section press the SONG key The SONG screen will appear 2 Repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR LV keys to access the LIST page ELIT RES ora SIZE Eg Bosra z4 OH 24 IHFORT et A Gent JE Shutffle amp 14 EH 16 ETUE rane coa TEMPO ia EEEE SHUTDHH This page contains the following items D DELETE button Displays a popup window that allows you to delete a song 2 COPY button Displays a popup window that allows you to copy a song 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song that you want to copy or delete The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the selected song Bl Io copy a song 4 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the copy operation COHFIRHRTIGEH COFY Selected Sond KS e If you have selected the current song as the song to be cop ied a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song Move the cursor to either the YES button if you want to save or the NO button if you don t want to save and then press the ENTER key e You cannot copy or delete a song while the AW1600 is running e A deleted song will be lost forever Use great c
342. nother CD RW drive or a CD player but it can be played by the AW1600 s CD Play function gt p 110 Insert the CD R RW media that you want to finalize into the CD RW drive 2 Repeatedly press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR V V keys to access the CD WRITE page of the CD screen 3 Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button and press the ENTER key The following screen will appear and the track list will show the content that has been written to that CD R RW media Already recorded tracks will be dis played as EXIST dch WRITE EY 1 TRACE AT nHcE H 1 c EXIST 1e6 FIHRLIZE 4 EXIST 16 4 EXI5T 1 amp AW1600 Owner s Manual 4 Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the finalize operation COHFIRHRTIGH Final ize This Mediaa D To finalize the disc move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you decide not to finalize the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key NOTE e The finalize operation cannot be halted once it has been started Perform this operation with care Erasing CD RW media Erasing CD RW media Here s how to erase all data that has been written to CD RW media so that the CD RW disc can be used as a blank disc You will need to perform this operation on a disc that has been used to store computer data
343. nput channels are con nected to tracks 13 14 E J Y v RECORD IN IH TEET 3 mar 2120 8 4 4 0011 14 D vd ms INPUT Indicates the connection status of input channels 1 8 If you move the cursor to numbers 1 8 and press the ENTER key the INPUT SETTING popup window will appear allowing you to make settings for the cor responding input channel If you move the cursor to the se symbol and press the ENTER key the symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding input channel will be selected as a recording source 2 TRACK Indicates the connection status of tracks 1 16 If you move the cursor to the se symbol and press the ENTER key the symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding track will be selected as a recording destination 42 E AW1600 Owners Manual 3 1 8 button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key input channels 1 8 will be connected to tracks 1 8 4 9 16 button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key input channels 1 8 will be connected to tracks 9 16 SAFE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all connections will be cancelled 4 Press the INPUT SEL key for the input channel to which your instrument mic is connected The corresponding INPUT SEL key will light red and the remaining INPUT SEL keys will go d
344. ntal lines indicate the bus L R signal route You can check the on off status of the signal that is sent from the record source input channel s to bus L or R and check the tracks that will be the record destination of the L R bus 3 TRACK Selects the track s that will be the record destination of the L R bus signal 4 SAFE button To cancel all record sources and record destinations move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key 5 BUS button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key a dedicated fader and level meter for the L R bus will appear in the right of the screen You can use this to adjust the master level of the L R bus 4 Press the INPUT SEL key for the input channel to which you connected your instrument or mic The current setting INPUT SEL key will light orange and that input channel will be selected for operations 1 2 l l o N z N N N N E d N CH G3 CH CH CH CH d M Pd M Pd M M M N ZA ZA ZA ZA 4 4 4 4 9 4 bj Vly ZUR B VOR 4 2 Fa Fa Fa Fa EF In the screen the se symbol for the corresponding input channel will be highlighted and a line will appear indicating that this chan nel is connected to the bus ES e You can also select an input channel by moving the cursor to the symbol for the desired input channel and pressing the ENTER key e If you press a
345. ntire tracks changing the structure of the song itself Even after all parts of the song have been recorded you can use this method to adjust the length of the song for example by shortening the number of measures or increasing the number of choruses D E o D x O FE 4 Create special effects You can also use editing commands to create special effects For example you can copy a guitar or vocal solo part to another track and use the PITCH CHANGE com mand to slightly detune one of these tracks creating a chorus effect without using the internal effect processor By applying the PITCH CHANGE command to a drum track to lower the pitch you can create a unique lo fi effect AW1600 Owner s Manual f 127 What you can do using editing commands o Q Q D a 2 e 128 Basic procedure for track editing Here is the basic procedure for using a track editing com mand The procedure is essentially the same for all track editing commands E Select the editing command T In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the EDIT key The EDIT screen will appear This screen displays the following information ERASE j gop p EH CORY INSERT I cory E UH 00 00 08 000 O05 Jil IB 00 00 24 000 Os of 30 ed K GRID ox TR Pil DDIDuDpp Daags d a Editing command Indicates the currently selected editing command 2 Locator marker Indicates the appro
346. ntly selected channel Effect library Effect settings can be loaded from this library into internal effects 1 2 On the AW1600 settings for the mix parame ters of all channels and the effect parameters etc can be stored in internal memory as a scene with the name you specify When you recall one of the various libraries described above the library settings you recall will be loaded into the settings that you are currently using referred to as the current scene You can then save the current set tings as a scene memory which will contain the settings that you loaded from a library Libraries and scene memories are saved on the hard disk as part of the song The following diagram shows how libraries scene and the song are related to each other on the AW1600 e Mastering library EQ and dynamics settings can be loaded from this library into the stereo channel This library is read only and can not be used to store your own settings e Sample library Sets of samples can be loaded from this library into the Quick Loop Sampler Channel library Major mix parameters can be loaded from this library into a channel Current scene EQ dynamics effects for an input channel EQ for the selected channel Dynamics for the selected channel Internal effects 1 2 Input library EQ library Dynamics library Effect library Mastering library EQ dynamics for the stereo output Sample data for the Quick
347. o ERR 19 26 EQ library 52 50 77 Abray A TE 181 lege 4 example of connections 27 Expander acta essences ennndeccodeceninnn 183 Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV AU 136 external devices 171 digital recorder 177 external effects 175 tone generator module 174 workstation synth 171 external effects 175 F Fader ERREUR 19 PAD ER ABT 170 FADER RECALL SAFE 80 Features eeeseeeeeereeeee 13 CD RW drive 14 GOM UTOT E 14 Mixer section ss 13 Quick Loop Sampler section 14 Recorder section 14 m RT 21 Finalizing EP TM PE 102 108 FOOT SW Jack enar 22 59 foot e E 99 FORMAT button 169 free space on the hard disk 148 Front panel 23 AW1600 Owner s Manual GAIN knob o MERE 17 NS 184 Gate mode 112 Seegen 22 H Hard disk folder organization 144 initialize qe 168 mlt mE ROY EET 19 HI MID key se 19 Jee bg 20 IN OUT pont 65 included items 9 ij PP 223 Initializing a channel 94 INPUT CH MUTE MIX button 110 INPUT LEVEL knob cortes 34 Input library
348. o create inter esting effects E O Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 185 gt xe O D Q x 186 Effects library list Effects library list The following table lists the preset effects programs See Effects Parameters p 188 for detailed parameter information Effects programs that use the HQ PITCH effect can be used only with Effect 2 Reverb Hall ll Reverb type Effects REVERB HALL Description Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert hall Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space room than REVERB HALL Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed with vocals in mind Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Simulation of a metal plate reverb unit producing a feeling of hard edged reverberation Early Ref EARLY REF An effect which isolates only the early reflection ER component from reverberation A flashier effect than reverb is produced Gate Reverb GATE REVERB A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb Reverse Gate B Delays Mono Delay REVERSE GATE MONO DELAY A reverse playback type ER Description Mono delay with simple operation Use when you don t need to use complex parameter settings Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Stereo delay with independent left and right Mod delay MOD DELAY Mono delay with modulation Delay LCR DELAY LCR Three
349. o stereo Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing is monaural M or stereo S This field 1s for display only and cannot be changed 3 Size Indicates the playback length in msec of the WAV file selected for importing This field is for display only and cannot be changed 4 LISTEN button You can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to repeatedly hear the currently selected WAV file 5 To TR Selects the track number into which the WAV file will be imported 6 To V TR Selects the virtual track number 1 8 into which the WAV file will be imported 7 To Start Specifies the starting location in counter display for mat of the import destination to which the WAV file will be imported e Only 16 bit or 24 bit 44 1 kHz mono or stereo WAV files can be imported Also WAV files having a different bit depth from the song cannot be imported Move the cursor to the From WAVE file field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the WAV file that you want to import The WAV files stored in the Transport folder will be displayed gt p 144 NOTE e The maximum number of WAV files that can be displayed is 100 D E E o D x O FE Use the To TR To V TR and To Start fields to specify the track number virtual track num ber and starting location into which the WAV file will be imported e If the import destination already contains data it will be
350. o the faders and other mix parameters of each channel AW1600 Owner s Manual 19 3 O Q c 3 2 Q e D z O O O Parts of the AW1600 and what they do E Data entry control section UNDO REDO y DATA JOG UNDO REDO key This key cancels the results of a recording or track editing operation Undo or re executes a cancelled operation Redo ES e This key will light if Undo can be performed Here you can turn the DATA JOG dial to revert as many as the last fifteen operations gt p 61 ll Locate section EI AUTO PUNCH REPEAT MARK E E imi 7 LAST REC IN SEARCH FE SET Ser 4 SOUND CLIP key This key accesses the CLIP screen where you can record or play sound clips 2 AUTO PUNCH key This key switches the audio punch in out function on off letting you automate recording 3 REPEAT key This key switches the A B repeat function on off letting you repeatedly play a specified region MARK SEARCH I 91 keys These keys search for markers placed within the song 20 ll AW1600 Owner s Manual e If you press and hold this key the UNDO LIST screen will appear 2 SCENE key This key accesses the SCENE screen where you can save or recall scene memories 3 JOG ON key This key is an on off switch for the Nudge function gt p 71 which uses the DATA JOG dial 5 When this function is on the k
351. ocation as 0 e SEC Display the current location in hours minutes seconds milliseconds with the Start point as O EE E oc Display the current location in time code hours minutes seconds frames with the Start point as O e REMAIN When this button is on the remaining recordable time with the selected num ber of recording tracks will be displayed instead of the current location e The counter in the upper right of the display always shows the current location in measure beat units relative to the Start point e The measure beat display will depend on the settings in the TEMPO page of the SONG screen For details refer to Cre ating a tempo map p 149 5 To change the time code frame rate move the cursor to one of the buttons in the TIME CODE BASE area and press the ENTER key In the TIME CODE BASE area you can choose one of the following frame rates to specify the minimum unit of time code e 24 24 frames second e 25 25 frames second e 30 30 frames second 30 non drop frame e 30D 29 97 frames second 30 drop frame e This setting affects both the counter time code display and the MTC that the AW1600 transmits and receives If the AW1600 is sending or receiving MTC to or from an external device you must set both devices to the same frame rate e With the exception of COUNTER DISPLAY the settings in the SETUP page of the SONG screen can
352. of the EQ screen Press the EQ knob repeatedly Hold down the EQ knob and press the CURSOR L i Y 1 keys Hold down the EQ knob and turn it to left or right HU RECALL E Bar Boss Drum 2 Gas Snare Drum 1 You can also recall EQ library data into an input chan nel directly from the INPUT SETTING popup win dow To do so move the cursor to the EQ button in the window and press the ENTER key AW1600 Owner s Manual Using libraries and scene memories 77 SOLIOLUSL eueos pue seueagi Huish 78 Details on libraries and scene memory Dynamics library From this library you can recall dynamics settings to the currently selected channel Of library numbers 001 128 numbers 001 040 are read only and 041 128 can be writ ten Bl Recalling dynamics library data 1 Use the INPUT SEL keys TRACK SEL keys STEREO SEL key or pads 1 4 to select the channel into which you want to recall the dynamics settings 2 Perform one of the following actions to access the LIBRARY page of the DYN screen Press the DYN knob repeatedly Hold down the DNY knob and press the CURSOR AV 1 keys Hold down the DYN knob and turn it to left or right You can also recall dynamics library data into an input channel directly from the INPUT SETTING popup window To do so move the cursor to the DYN button in the window and press the ENTER key Effect library This library is used by inter
353. on refer to MIDI and utility functions p 157 The Remote function will be enabled Aa Hio REHOTE CH TRANSPORT l i 5 Operate the faders and TRACK SEL keys i 1 m HoRHAL of the AW1600 1 Cl LocaL Protoolz REMOTE olume RecTr The messages assigned to the faders and TRACK SEL keys will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT THRU connector and the parameters of your tone generator module will change accordingly e While the REMOTE screen is displayed the functions of the faders and TRACK SEL keys will be disabled the faders and keys will function as controllers that transmit MIDI messages e t is also possible to assign your own MIDI messages to the e The MIDI Remote function is enabled whenever the REMOTE AW 1600 s faders and TRACK SEL keys For details refer to screen is displayed MIDI and utility functions p 157 C o e P 2 o Z ak D z t 2 D x t D 3 D zi ap lt Q D o 174 AW1600 Owner s Manual Using external effects Using external effects As an alternative to using the internal effects you can use an external effect processor con nected to the STEREO AUX OUT jacks As an example here s how you can use AUX bus 1 to apply a mono in stereo out reverb to the track channels during mixdown 1 2 Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion In the Selected Channel section repeatedly press the PAN BAL knob or hold
354. on track so that the moni tor level is appropriate Now you will be able to monitor the signal that is being sent to the track s via the L R bus 46 El AW1600 Owners Manual 11 To set the pan of each input channel use the INPUT SEL key to select a channel and turn the PAN BAL knob of the Selected Channel section When you use bus recording it will not be possible to adjust the pan or volume balance for individual instru ments after they have been recorded on the track s This means that you must finalize the pan and volume balance when you send the signals from the input channels to the L R bus 12 To adjust the volume balance of each input channel repeatedly press the VIEW key in the Selected Channel section to access the FADER page When you want to set the volume balance of the input channels it is convenient to use the FADER page of the VIEW screen Here you can adjust the on off status and input levels for the input channels pad channels and track channels all in one page IMFUT 1 ae mm J 2120 0 4 4 0011 d aH non on on mpyaa SIMFUT 1 2 34 56 13 While producing sound on your instru ments use the INPUT SEL keys or CUR SOR l V keys to move the cursor to the input channel that you want to control and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the vol ume balance e We recommend that you not use the GAIN knob to adjust the volume balance of the input channels This will degra
355. ontacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve Genevastraat 10 1140 Brussels Belgium Tel 02 726 6032 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen Musica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 Goteborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial ay Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini N ringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraDe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraDe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Ya
356. op line in the display 3 TIME CODE BASE Selects the format the number of frames per second for the time code used by the AW 1600 3 To switch the protect setting on off move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the ENTER key Protect is a setting that prohibits any change to the song data If protect is turned on the PROTECT but ton will be highlighted and it will not be possible to perform additional recording or editing or to erase the song ES e We recommend that you turn protect on for important songs e Even if protect is on you can still copy the song gt p 147 and adjust the mixer settings 4 To change the counter display format move the cursor to one of the buttons in the COUNTER DISPLAY area and press the ENTER key AW1600 Owner s Manual e These settings apply only to the current song Before you perform this proce e The counter display mode with the exception of REMAIN and timecode frame rate changes will be saved with the song data when the song is saved In the COUNTER DISPLAY area use the following buttons to select the display format for the counter that is shown in the center of the top line in the display e ABS absolute time Display the current location in hours minutes seconds milliseconds with the absolute time zero location as O e REL relative time RAN Display the current location in hours minutes seconds milliseconds with the relative time zero l
357. or the desired input channel The INPUT SETTING popup window will appear 2 Move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you whether you want to insert internal effect 1 or 2 into that input channel This popup window will change as follows depending on how internal effects 1 2 are being used If the song is in the default state COHFIFHRTIGH If effect 1 is already inserted into a spe cific input channel If effects 1 and 2 are already inserted into specific input channels e If an effect has already been inserted into that input channel the INPUT LIBRARY popup window will appear immediately 3 Move the cursor to the EFF1 or EFF2 button and press the ENTER key The corresponding internal effect will be inserted into the input channel and the INPUT LIBRARY popup window will appear PFT LIERARY DZ Eu ih t Crunch im CO EXIT button Closes the popup window and returns to the previous INPUT SETTING popup window EQ library From this library you can recall EQ settings to the cur rently selected channel Of library numbers 001 128 numbers 001 040 are read only and 041 128 can be writ ten W Recalling EQ library data 1 Use the INPUT SEL keys TRACK SEL keys STEREO SEL key or pads 1 4 to select the channel into which you want to recall the EQ settings 2 Perform one of the following actions to access the LIBRARY page
358. or to this button and press the ENTER key NEW button To create an event at the beginning of the measure fol lowing the last step move the cursor to this button and z press the ENTER key D C 6 STEP Indicates the step number of the tempo map event E O D MEAS 9 Indicates the location measure beat at which the tempo map event is input METER p TEMPO PAD BANK 1 4 0 SCENE These fields show the time signature tempo pad sam ple bank and scene number of each tempo map event AW1600 Owner s Manual ll 149 Creating a tempo map W 5 e 3 D D e D 3 D t 150 3 Move the cursor to the item that you want to edit and turn the DATA JOG dial to edit the value If the METER TEMPO PAD BANK 1 4 or SCENE value is move the cursor to the item and press the ENTER key before you edit the value NOTE P e The METER TEMPO and PAD BANK 1 4 at the beginning of the song cannot be set to e You cannot change the METER value to other than for a step that is not located at beat 1 The range for each item is as follows 1 4 to 8 4 Specifies the time signature of the song 30 0 to 250 0 Specifies the tempo of the song You can set the tempo in units of 0 1 over a range of 30 0 250 0 BPM PAD A to D BANK 1 4 Selects the sample bank that will be used for each pad 1 4 00 to 96 Switches the scene numbe
359. osted a certain band lower the ATT knob to attenuate the signal e The EQ knob of the Selected Channel section will still oper ate even while the EDIT page of the EQ screen is displayed AW1600 Owner s Manual Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations v c KS Ces D Ben ab Q O O c gt O I2 O a c O Ke GE 95 Convenient functions during mixdown bounce operations Geen z 3 Response curve Editing the dynamics parameters This graph indicates the approximate response of dynamics settings The horizontal axis of the graph is the input level and the vertical axis is the output level 4 KEYIN SOURCE You can perform detailed editing of the dynamics parame ters in the same way as for the EQ parameters 1 Press an INPUT SEL key a pad 1 4 a Selects one of the following as the trigger signal key TRACK SEL key or the STEREO SEL key in signal that will control dynamics processing to select the channel whose dynamics e SELF The post EQ signal of the currently parameters you want to edit selected channel l e LEFT The post EQ signal of the adjacent 2 From the dynamics library recall the set BCEE tings that are closest to what you have in AUXA Ls The signal immediately before the mind master send level of the AUX 1 bus es AUX2 The signal immediately before the 3 Repeatedly press the Selected Channel master send level oith
360. ot have a CLEAR button Access the page for the desired library or scene memory The illustration below shows an example of when you have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen Warr tor Aadio Marce 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list so that the library data or scene you want to delete is enclosed by the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Delete operation COHFIRHRTIOH Clear Fa Lib Hatz rey Coe e If you selected read only data indicated by a lock icon in step 2 a message will indicate Read Only and the Delete operation will not be executed 4 To execute the Delete operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The library or scene will be deleted AW1600 Owner s Manual Using libraries and scene memories 75 Basic operation for libraries and scene memories Naming library or scene data Here s how you can assign a new name to existing library or scene data e The input library and mastering library and the EQ dynamics or effect libraries accessed from the INPUT SETTING popup window are all read only and therefore have no TITLE button Access the page for the desired library or scene memory The illustration below shows an example of when you have selected the LIBRARY page of the EQ screen ga41 Badio MO ice B42 light Fick
361. ot use characters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters and the underscore character 3 In the Quick Loop Sampler section repeat edly press the SAMPLE EDIT key or hold down the SAMPLE EDIT key and use the CURSOR l Y keys to access the CD IMPORT page of the SAMPLE screen ETuP COMFORT LIERARY PCO AHF TE mp Hau IHF MEMORY READ CD IMFO K FAD 1 Ent pn CF AO_1_A 4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button and press the ENTER key The display will indicate READ CD INFO and the AW 1600 will begin reading the CD that is inserted in the CD RW drive Depending on the source from which data is read the screen will change as follows e When importing from an audio CD CD Extra SAHPLE Fan gy 0000 00 000 221ze 0 4 4 TOLD 2ETUF CO IMPORT pe o LIERARY eee E E ee g TRE IHF CO TRACE 0 00 00 00 HAL InF 3 EREC 05 00 428 e 30 Jk MEMORY FAD 1 ERHE R CFAO_i_A_ LE 1 From CD TRACK Specifies the number 01 99 of the audio track that will be imported from the source CD 2 From Start Specifies the starting location of the data that will be imported in units of minutes seconds frames 1 75th of a second 3 From End Specifies the ending location of the data that will be imported in units of minutes seconds frames 1 75th of a second e The frames here are the smallest unit of time us
362. ou might hear some mechanical noises This is normal Do not subject the unit to strong physical shock Excessive physical shock can damage the internal hard disk Always turn the power off when moving the unit from one location to another Data on the internal hard disk can be lost or corrupted if the unit is moved while the power is on Copyright Notice Copyright and other intellectual property laws in various countries permit reproduction of copyrighted materi als under certain requirements The observance of applicable laws for use of this product however is your responsibility Yamaha disclaims any liability for violation of such laws in association with the use of this product Although this product is designed for original music production it can be utilized to make reproduction of copyrighted music and other sound products While certain reproduction and use of reproduced materials are permitted under applicable laws such reproduction and use without license may constitute copyright infringe ment and other violation of laws Since violation of such laws can have serious consequences you may wish to consult a legal expert about your planned use of this product This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without lim itation all computer software styles files MIDI fi
363. ove the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key The song list will show information track number song name size of the stereo track for the song that will be written to track 1 of the CD 5 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the song list and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song that will be written to track TRACK 2 fy IER IE 35 size 4 4 TIE lU To0TRL de EH nie od EXECUTE DATA JOG NOTE P e When you turn the DATA JOG dial you will see only songs for which the current stereo track contains data e Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not be displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select the songs that will be written to track 2 and following ES e When you move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key a new song will be added at the end of the existing songs e By using the INS button instead of the NEW button you can insert a new song immediately before the song that is selected in the list e You can use the DEL button to delete the currently selected song from the song list NOTE e When you add a song to the song list the same song will always be initially selected Change this as desired Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm COHFIRHBRTIGEH Hr te ST Track to CO7 CANCEL Writing audio data Track At Once H To begin writing move
364. over written Be careful not to accidentally overwrite important data AW1600 Owner s Manual J 139 o Q Q D a 2 e 140 Exporting WAV files and importing audio CD or WAV files 5 When you have finished making settings move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion COHFIRHRTIOH Execute Hay IMPORT 7 CANCEL 6 To execute the import operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will begin If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key import ing will be cancelled ES e Even after you press the ENTER key you can press the UNDO REDO key to return to the state prior to importing as tion since the import NOTE e You cannot execute the Import operation while the AW1600 is running Importing from the CD RW drive CD audio data CD DA or a WAV file from a CD ROM or CD R can be imported loaded into an AW1600 audio track After being imported this data can be handled in the same way as any recorded audio track If you want to import from an audio CD repeatedly press the Work Navigate section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key and use the CURSOR A keys to access the D IN e HDD page of the UTILITY screen Immediately after the AW1600 is powered on it will be set to prohibit digital recording from an external source or importing from
365. preset from the library and use the panel knobs and keys to quickly adjust the settings Two high quality multi effect units are built in The two built in effect units deliver a wide variety of effects including spatial type effects such as reverb and delay modulation type effects such as chorus and flanger and guitar type effects such as distortion and amp simula tion These effects can be used either via send return or inserted into a desired channel 13 AW1600 Owner s Manual Features of the AW1600 3 O Q c 3 2 eX e D z O O O 14 E Recorder section 8 track Simultaneous Recording amp 16 track Simultaneous Playback 16 bit songs You can record multiple tracks of instruments one by one or set up multiple mics to record a drum set or a live per formance by an entire band A stereo track for direct mix down of all 16 tracks is also provided letting you manage the multi track audio and the two track mix as a single package of data For the multi tracks as well as the stereo track you can use eight virtual tracks for each track When recording parts or during mixdown you can switch virtual tracks to record multiple takes and select the best take later The bit depth number of quantization bits of the audio data recorded on each track can be set to 16 or 24 bits for each individual song 16 bit songs allow simultaneous recording of up to 8 tracks and simultaneous playback of up
366. ptimizing a song Optimize is an operation that deletes the undo redo audio data and the unused sample data maintained within the song When you have finished recording and editing a song you can exe cute the Optimize operation on that song to increase the amount of free space on the hard disk NOTE e The deleted undo redo audio data will be lost forever Use this operation with caution T In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR AJ keys to access the LIST page of the SONG screen MAME BE Bosra 34 AH zd IHFORT aen JE ZHhuffle E1 EH 16 T FTIHZI LORD POINT f TREN ERUE ELI dam TEMPO sHuTDHH 3 COPY HELENE 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the song that you want to optimize The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song 3 Move the cursor to the OPTIMZ button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the optimize operation COHFIRHRTIOH rtimize Selected song CHHCEL ES e You may select the current song to be optimized In this case a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to save or the CANCEL button if you don t want to save and press the ENTER key AW1600 Owner s Manual 4 To execute the optimize operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Th
367. quency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSHF 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL E PHASER Parameter FREQ 0 100 95 0 05 40 00 Hz Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL E AUTOPAN Parameter FREQ 0 100 0 05 40 00 Hz Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Description Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving fil
368. quency change decay speed LEVEL 0 100 Output Level MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E DYNA FLANGE Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 6 0 ms 46 0 s Decay speed LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E DYNA PHASER Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 6 0 ms 4
369. r 5 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR A WT keys to access the CD IMPORT page of the TRACK screen The READ CD INFO button will appear in the center of the display TRACE 4 gg 00 00 00 000 2 1225 5 4 4 0011 weH COMPORT UTE D CD IMPORT e FAD HAL mp READ CD IMFO K TR be P i 00 00 00 000 DUT D Press the ENTER key The display will indicate Read CD Info and infor mation will be read from the CD inserted in the CD RW drive Depending on the import source data the screen will change as follows When importing from audio CD CD Extra TRACK 1 ug OOOO 2 12z8 2 aa OOII CDIHPORT s e o WIEH UTR 3 FAD Hn A EN Cp TRACK O OO nn nn CZE IB MAL InF EXEC 0s nn ua 4r anne us L2 p i 00 00 00 000 D I I LE bd 1 From CD TRACK Specifies the audio track number 01 99 of the import source CD 2 From Start Specifies the beginning of the data that will be imported in minutes seconds frames 1 75 second 3 From End Specifies the end of the data that will be imported in minutes seconds frames 1 75 second e The frames referred to here are the minimum time axis units used in CD DA Do not confuse them with the frames used in MTC or SMPTE 4 LISTEN button You can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to repeated
370. r Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker In the Work Navigate section repeatedly press the SONG key or hold down the SONG key and use the CURSOR A WT keys to access the POINT page In the POINT page you can adjust the time location of each locate point and marker SONG track 1 fy 0000 LATA Trizee 474 D IL Foz ITIGH HEA REL ZERO R 00 00 08 05 45 TART 00 00 00 00 00 EHD E 00 04 48 20 69 TEMPO NT M A ZHUTDUH d HARKER E 00 00 30 000 00 00 22 000 Fi E all In GEE 14 000 A E 00 00 30 000 1 LOCATOR button 2 MARKER button These buttons select whether the screen will show locate points or markers The button that is currently turned on will be highlighted 3 Locator point marker display area This area shows a list of the locate points or markers depending on whether you have selected the LOCA TOR button or the MARKER button If you want to adjust the position of a locate point make sure that the LOCATE button is turned on highlighted in the display When the LOCATOR button is on the POINT page will display the positions of each locate point laa F zITIOGH HEA REL PER Fi 00 00 08 05 45 START S O0 00 00 00 00 ool EHD E DID DH HB SE EH 145 2 IN T DO 00 14 000 ODEI Bild GUT 0 00 00 30 000 O 1G A A 00 00 22 000 DIZI DEER ce 00 00 30 000 BIB D Locate points Shows the type of locate point a
371. r display to zero and press the PLAY Bb key 6 If you want to redo the recording press the UNDO REDO key The UNDO REDO key will go dark and you will return to the state prior to recording Repeat steps 2 5 When you finish recording press the Quick Navigate Section RECORD key once again move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you for confirmation so move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Assignments of the input signals to tracks will be cancelled It will no longer be possible to press the REC key and this will prevent recording from occurring accidentally 8 If you are satisfied with the recorded con tent save the song For details on saving gt p 63 Please be aware that the recorded content will be lost if you turn off the power of the AW1600 before saving the song Pairing input channels track channels Pairing input channels track channels Pad tracks 1 4 and track channels 9 10 15 16 are permanently paired However you may also specify pairing for adjacent odd numbered even numbered input chan nels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or track channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When two channels are paired most of their parameters will be linked so that operating one of the channels will cause the same set ting to occur on the other channel as well This is convenient when you are recording a stereo audio source or when you want to play b
372. r edit tempo map events for the current song 8 Cus bien SCENE IHFORT 34 LocaTe SETLIF e The Start point of the song corresponds to the starting location of the tempo map e The data tempo map events recorded in the tempo map will continue to apply until the location at which the next event of the same type has been input e If you modify the tempo map after recording on an audio track the measure beat counter display values will be affected For this reason if you want to use MIDI clock to synchro nize with an external MIDI device or if you want to control the song in measure units you should create the tempo map before you record If you modify the tempo map after a track has already been recorded a popup window will ask you for confirmation This page contains the following items 1 List This area lists the tempo map events that have been input for the current song The line enclosed by a dot ted frame is the currently selected tempo map event 2 LOCATE button By moving the cursor to this button and pressing the ENTER key you can move the song to the location of the tempo map event currently selected in the list 3 DELETE button To delete the tempo map event currently selected in the list move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key 4 INSERT button To insert a blank event at the step preceding the tempo map event currently selected in the list move the cur s
373. r reverse phase feedback Pitch shift precision Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E DUAL PITCH Range Description PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine PAN 1 L16 1 C R1 16 Channel 1 panpot DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time FB G 1 99 to 99 Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback LEVEL 1 100 to 100 Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PITCH 2 24 to 24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine PAN 2 L16 1 C R1 16 Channel 2 panpot DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time FB G 2 99 to 99 Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback LEVEL 2 100 to 100 Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds El ROTARY Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST DRIVE 0 100 ACCEL 0 10 LOW 0 100 HIGH 0 100 SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz MIX BAL 0 100 96
374. r s Manual J 203 Troubleshooting gt Re O D 2 e x 204 B Editing results are not heard in the sound Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded Are you using the appropriate editing command Bl Counter display is not 0 when you return to the beginning of the song The display mode may be set to REMAIN remaining recording time f the display mode is set to REL relative time the start point may be specified Go to the SONG screen SETUP POINT page and check the settings B Display indicates DISK FULL MEMORY FULL or REGION FULL and you cannot record or edit There is insufficient free space or too many recording regions Erase unneeded tracks and then perform the Opti mize operation to obtain more free space If the DISK FULL message appears erase unneeded songs sample libraries or WAV files located under the Transport folder The WAV files under the Transport folder can be erased from your computer when the USB Storage mode is engaged E The display indicates DISK BUSY during playback The recorded data might be so fragmented that the read speed is significantly reduced It might be necessary to backup all hard disk data to your computer and then re ini tialize the hard disk Sampler operations li When you press a pad there is no sound or the wrong bank is heard Have you selected a bank to which the waveform is assigned A bank change may have been
375. r used Beene by the song ES e You cannot delete the tempo map event located at the begin ning of the song or change its location If you want to change the tempo or time signature during the song you can insert a new event e If you set METER TEMPO PAD BANK 1 4 or SCENE to a E A8 value of that event will be disabled For example if you want to specify only the time signature and tempo you should ZE m7 set the pad bank and scene to AW1600 Owner s Manual B Adding a tempo map event 1 Access the TEMPO page move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key A blank tempo map event will be created after the last step that is currently input e If you use the INSERT button instead of the NEW button a blank tempo map event will be inserted before the currently selected step However you cannot insert an event before the tempo map event at the beginning of the song i e the tempo map event that is input when you create the song Make sure that the cursor is outside the list and turn the DATA JOG dial to select a tempo map event that you created When the cursor is located outside the list you can turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the contents of the list Move the cursor to the MEAS field of the event that is selected in the list and turn the DATA JOG dial to specify the location of the event You can adjust the location of a tempo map event in un
376. racks that you now will be overdubbing 1 While you play back the song raise the track channel faders for the previously recorded tracks to an appropriate monitor ing level 2 Press the track channel TRACK SEL key for a previously recorded track and use the PAN BAL knob of the Selected Channel section to set the pan 3 Stop the recorder and while producing sound on your instrument adjust the fader of the recording destination track channel so that the monitoring level is appropriate The track channel for the recording destination track will send the input signal to the stereo bus while recording or stopped and will send the track playback signal to the stereo bus during playback This means that in order to monitor the input signal you must stop the recorder ES e The position of the track channel faders will not affect the recording level However if you set the faders to 0 dB the playback volume will be the same as when you recorded the tracks 4 Press the TRACK SEL key for the record ing destination track channel and use the PAN BAL knob of the Selected Channel section to set the pan In the same way as for the input channel signal you can also use EQ and dynamics to process the track channel To do this press the TRACK SEL key to select the track channel and use the EQ knob or DYN knob of the Selected Channel section to recall a library and adjust the settings This procedure will not affec
377. rect recording uuceuucu eo ecrit 40 DISC At ONGC wecscncsnsccessececdconctiese 102 Vd OPEP PEN 106 Display message list 206 DUCKING ches ceeacenaedanictenccioercctensenacs 184 DYN Reie LEE 53 BAC de decses ccs ncesstenecarioncusens 19 26 Kielen e 90 Dynamics library 53 57 78 library Mc EET 185 Recall eene 57 78 Dynamics parameter 182 KEYIN SOURCE 96 E Se EC 95 96 97 dynamics parameters 96 EQ parameters 95 parameters of an internal effect 97 Edit command COR EE 132 DELETE ieee ener ne 131 ERASE eegene 130 EH i TE 134 EXPOR I 135 INSER T W 131 MOVE RSS 133 PITCH CHANGE 2 ipei 135 TIME COMP EXP Time Compression Expansion 134 EDIT 18 AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 O Q Q Q lt 223 Index gt oO O D 2 e x 224 Editing a value in the display 25 Editing command 127 E saat dee HO 130 OBL epic eee Paid adu 99 BYPASS EE 97 USED A 98 EFFECT WMO Dy ee acees sees tesccte 19 26 EFFECT 2 NOD sige cscpectecesectex 19 26 Effect library sisncsicesatderodensadideeienten 78 Effect Parameters 188 library d 1 186 SU 78 Eject e 23 Eject SWITCH srtescnscenanssnpesionnniasnoncacses 29 ENTER key 20 zo eee 50 Beielftt e 52 EO e
378. rmed and then the actual writing will be performed Depending on the media and the state of the hard disk it is possible that an error may occur while the data is being written If you are using a CD R this will make the media unusable Thus you can turn on the TEST button to check whether an error will occur before you actually write the disc If an error occurs during the test halt the procedure and either lower the writing Q Enables disables the function that prevents buffer speed or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ps underrun an error that can occur when data transfer ENABLE o cannot keep up with writing speed C If desired set the UNDERRUN PROTECT 3 Ge ee W ll See button to ENABLE o Se Ee Hi i The CD RW drive of the AW1600 has a function to w audio e g backup data or WAV files is written to D CD R RW media Normally this will indicate x8 This a ne ds wa ee O EE E it de med asipo a RSS HER data transfer cannot keep up with the writing speed writing speed of x4 This field is for display only and If you switch the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to cannot be edited the ENABLE setting this function will be enabled and buffer underruns will be prevented 7 COMPARE button If this button is on the original data will be compared with the backed up data or the exported WAV file after e If this button is set to ENABLE the TEST button will automati a backup or export operation is performed to check cal
379. rn on the power make sure that the AC adaptor is firmly connected to the AW1600 and to the AC outlet If the power is disconnected while the AW1600 is being used the AW1600 itself or the hard disk may be damaged When you turn on the power of the AW1600 an opening screen will appear and then the following screen will appear IHPUT 1 A TRACE HUTE J C HO FEC 1 D O4E T E S Coa sanie F d D B Turning the power off shut down In a system that includes the AW 1600 turn the power of each device off in the following order 1 The monitor system connected to the AW1600 s out put jacks 2 The AW1600 itself 3 External devices such as audio sources and effect processors connected to the input output jacks of the AW1600 When turning off the power of the AW1600 you must perform the following shut down procedure T In the Work Navigate section located in the upper left of the top panel press the SONG key several times to access the fol lowing SHUTDOWN page E 00 00 00 000 2 125 4 4 TL LST a cuRRENTSONG Gl Meu Song zsHE IHFART TO SETUF FUT TEMFO ZHUTDHH ZHUT DOHH j 2 Press the ENTER key located in the mid dle right of the top panel A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song COHFIRHRTIOH SVE Current Sond 3 Using the CURSOR lt a gt keys located in the upper right of the top panel move the cursor the
380. rnally At this time only the selected INPUT SEL key and TRACK SEL key will be blinking red The blinking TRACK SEL key indicates that the cor responding track is in record ready mode 2 3 4 5 6 D 8 li GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN ly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vd 1 GAIN GAIN Vly Vly 3 ES N Ny s N s gt EI EI EI EI EI EI E E ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC ooo coca a A S 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 STEREO TITTTTTTTTTTT In the screen a line will be drawn to indicate the connec tion TRACK 1 31 IHFUT d AH T p de oe ES e You can also select a track by moving the cursor to the wq symbol of the desired track and pressing the ENTER key e The input channel and track will be internally connected even if you first press the TRACK SEL key and then press the INPUT SEL key afterward e When an input channel is selected as a recording source its assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off and it will be connected to allow monitoring via the track chan nel e EQ and dynamics settings will be flat for a track channel that is selected as the recording destination NOTE e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as M mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 8 play tracks gt p 143 track
381. rporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2441 YAMAHA Yamaha Web Site English only http www yamahasynth com Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2005 Yamaha Corporation 511POCP2 3 02BO This document is printed on chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink WE23260 Printed in Japan
382. rsor to the To PAD and To BANK fields and turn the DATA JOG dial to specify the pad number and sample bank into which the data will be imported When you have finished making the set tings move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion 8 To execute the import move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The data will begin being read from the track If you decide to cancel the import operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key ES e The imported sample will be assigned the same name as the track from which the data was imported You are free to edit this name later gt p 121 XI O o Q O D x 9 2 O e The imported sample is saved together with the current song NOTE P e A total of up to approximately 47 seconds approximately 29 seconds in 24 bit songs of samples can be imported into the Quick Loop Sampler If you specify a region that exceeds this amount an error message will be displayed and the import operation cannot be executed e If you import once again into the same pad and sample bank that sample will be overwritten by the newly imported data If you want to keep the previously imported sample you must import the new data into a different pad or sample bank e It is not possible to import samples while the AW1600 is run ning AW1600 Owner s Manual f 1
383. s or 8 for 24 bit songs Only 24 bit audio data can be used in 24 bit songs 16 bit WAV files cannot be imported from a computer or CD RW drive Audio data imported from audio CDs however will be automatically converted to 24 bit format In the same way only 16 bit audio data can be used in 16 bit songs e The bit depth of a song can be checked via the SONG screen LIST page c ab E ab O O c O o AW1600 Owner s Manual 143 About songs E Song Folder Organization Song and related data stored on hard disk can be accessed from a computer connected via USB in the same way as the hierarchical files and folders on the computer s hard disk The folders are organized as follows AW1600 1 Drive Song1 001 Song Name AWS 001 Song Name AWS BE m IN 0 WAV N Audio Bi 1 WAV HA ETT N li 3 WAV Render Bi in 003 Song Name AWS m 005 Song Name AWS AW1600 SYS BIN a B Song Folder Songs are stored in either the Song1 or Song folder E Individual Song Folders Each song is stored in a folder bearing the song s name extension AWS e Song Files The following song settings are stored in a file bearing the name of the song extension AWS Recorder section settings SONG screen TRACK screen Mixer section settings channels effects Quick loop sampler settings e Library settings excluding the sample library REMOTE screen settings
384. s 9 16 are muted and will not play back e The bit depth of a song can be verified via the SONG screen LIST page 6 If you want to record more than one instru ment or mic simultaneously assign other input channels to tracks in the same way 00 00 00 000 2 1z26 8 4 4 001 1 B 6 148 LR RR e To cancel a connection that you made press the INPUT SEL key to make it light red and then press the TRACK SEL key of the track that is selected as the recording destination To cancel all connections move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording e To change the recording destination press the INPUT SEL key to make it light red and then press the TRACK SEL key of a different track e f both the recording source inputs and the recording destina tion tracks are paired and connected using the INPUT SEL TRACK SEL keys two adjacent odd numbered even num bered channels will be simultaneously assigned to two adja cent odd numbered even numbered tracks Press and hold the INPUT SEL key for the recording source input channel to access the INPUT SETTING popup window ES e You can also access the INPUT SETTING popup window by moving the cursor to an input channel number in the RECORD screen DIRECT page and pressing the ENTER key H Use the GAIN knob to adjust the input level of the signal For details on adjusting t
385. s an old amp stack 10 Funk Cut Trad Blues Dyna Phaser AmpSimulate Phase sound that adds an effect to the picking attack Simulation of a traditional blues guitar sound NeoRockabily Dist Delay Rockabilly sound using a short delay warped by adding distortion Air Clean Delay Rev Clean sound with a sense of air City Lead Mod Delay Combination sound with lightly applied modulation and delay Pop Chorus Chorus Chorus sound suitable for a wide range of uses from chording to arpeggios Fuzzy Drive AmpSimulate A useful and original fuzz sound Jazzy Night Reverb Room Comp sound that lets you express nuances by your picking dynamics Retro Phase Phaser Simulation of a classic compact phaser Mistic Chord Drive Amp Dual Pitch AmpSimulate SFX sound that produces a mystical effect from chords or harmonics Natural sounding overdrive that simulates overdriving a combo amp Smooth Lead AmpSimulate Smooth distortion lead with a smooth playing feel Crunch Box Double Drive AmpSimulate Dist gt Delay Crunch sound with a nice amount of distortion usable for anything from backing to lead Heavy distortion with doubling Comp Driver AmpSimulate Overdrive with compressor to bring out the nuances of your picking Rotary AG Acoustic guitar Rotary The familiar rotary speaker sound optimized for guitar 26
386. s independent from the METER page of the VIEW screen 3 AUX 4 EFF 5 BUS Use these faders to adjust the master levels of AUX buses 1 2 effect buses 1 2 and the L R bus The level of each bus is indicated by the level meters at the right of each fader 7 Move the cursor to the fader for effect bus 1 and use the DATA JOG dial to raise or lower it e You can also adjust the level of the return signal that is returned from the internal effect to the mixer section For details refer to Editing the parameters of an internal effect gt p 97 Recording on the stereo track Recording on the stereo track Here s how to record the final mix on the stereo track In the Quick Navigate section repeatedly CO ST TRACK ON OFF button press the RECORD key or hold down the Switches stereo track playback on off RECORD key and use the CURSOR A UH Virtual track V keys to access the MIXDOWN page of Selects the virtual track that is assigned to the stereo the RECORD screen track The currently selected virtual track is indicated by a Of the other virtual tracks those that have already been recorded are indicated by O and the 66 _ HASTERING LIERARY Se EES Pi unrecorded tracks are indicated by T HL 3 Track view In this area markers and the presence or absence of track data are displayed graphically 2 Move the cursor to the REC button of the 4 PRE POST buttons These bu
387. s read only Region Full The maximum allowable number of regions has been exceeded Selected Pad Not Assigned No sample is assigned to the selected pad Song Data Corrupt Load Another Song The song data is corrupt A different song will be loaded Song Too Large to Export The song file is too large to be exported System Error An internal system error has occurred This Song is Protected Can t save erase or edit the title because the song is protected Too Many CD Tracks No new tracks can be added because the maximum number of allowable tracks has been exceeded Track Not Recorded The track you selected does not contain any recorded data Wav File Link Error Delete Wrong Data A portion of the song data is corrupt Erase the corrupt data If you move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key the corrupt portion of the song will be erased If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key another song will be loaded instead Wave File Link Error A WAV file link error has been found Wrong Bit Depth The bit depth of the selected file is incorrect Wrong File Format The selected file is not PCM format Wrong HD Format The internal hard disk is incorrectly formatted The disk cannot be formatted from a computer Wrong Number of Channels The number of channels in the selected file is incorrect
388. s the data in units of CD tracks The advantage of this method is that you can add new data to media that already contains existing data With the Track At Once method the data from the begin ning to the end of the stereo track of a song is written to the CD as one track Even if there is a portion during the song that contains no data it will be written as silent audio data Since each track is written individually when you use this method an interval of approximately two seconds will be created between each track Start End Start End Y Y Song B Audio CD Track 2 interval 2 seconds Track 1 In order for a disc written using Track At Once to be play able by the CD RW drive or a CD player you must per form a process known as finalizing to write track information to the disc Once you have finalized a disc you cannot write any more data to it AW1600 Owner s Manual Disc At Once This method writes all tracks at once Similarly to when using the Track At Once method the data from the begin ning to the end of the stereo track of each song is written to the CD as one track However since writing does not stop until all data has been written there will be no gap between the tracks Start End Markor ot i i Marker off Start End Marker Jum EN Marker off Audio CD Track 2 Track 1 no gap When using Disc At Once to write a CD you can use the start point end
389. s values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB G R 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback L gt R FBG 99 to 99 Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback R gt L FBG 99 to 99 Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E CHORUS Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEP 0 10096 Pitch modulation depth AM DEP 0 10096 Amp modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High s
390. selected region will be com e The track names will not be exchanged pressed or expanded NOTE j e To End and To Ratio are linked so that editing one field will cause the other field to change e You cannot set To End or To Ratio to a value that would cause the ratio to exceed 50 200 percent e From Start value and From End value must be at least 45 msec apart These cannot be set to a shorter interval 134 l AW1600 Owners Manual PITCH CHANGE Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track without changing the length H 00 00 08 000 006 4 00 00 14 045 O10 1 I C CEHT From Start From End PITCH CHANGE From Start From End IVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVA PITCH 3 CHANGE VANVASVANAVAVA E Parameter list Parameter Explanation 1 16 A single audio track 1 2 15 16 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track 2 From V TR 1 8 3 From Start 4 From End 1 From TR Virtual track number Specify a point Beginning of the edited region Specify a point End of the edited region 12 to 12 semitones 50 to 50 6 Fine cents Specify the amount of pitch change in semitone units 5 Pitch Specify the amount of pitch change in one cent units 1 100th of a semitone List of editing commands EXPORT Writes the specified region of an audio track to a WAV fi
391. settings you make in the UTILITY screen will be backed up on the media together with the selected data If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 but ton turned on data other than audio tracks will not be backed up All virtual tracks for tracks 1 16 will be backed up For the stereo track only the current track will be backed up 24 bit songs are not compatible When you restore data that was backed up to more than one volume of media you must insert the media in the order in which it was backed up Be sure to make a note of the backup sequence on the label surface of each CD R RW media AW1600 Owner s Manual c E eb O a E a t O c O o 153 CD 5 a 3 3 Q D D 5 t 154 Restoring songs or sample libraries Restoring songs or sample libraries Here s how data that you backed up to CD R RW media can be restored to the hard disk of the AW1600 1 Insert the CD R RW media containing the backup data into the CD RW drive If the backup data occupies more than one volume of media insert the first volume In the Work Navigate section press the CD key The CD screen will appear Repeatedly press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR Y keys to access the RESTORE page In this page data that you backed up to CD R RW media can be restored to the internal hard disk Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO
392. sient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the compander s output signal level e Width is used to determine the distance in decibels between the expander and the compressor With a width of 90 dB the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor limiter With a smaller width 30dB and a high threshold OdB the compander is an expander compressor limiter 2 O Q Q Q lt e Release determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold AW1600 Owner s Manual f 183 gt O O D 2 e x 184 Dynamics Parameters El Gate and Ducking dB Threshold 10dB Output Level Range 70dB dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Threshold 20dB Output Level I c e Range 30dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute sig nals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a speci fied threshold It is used for voice over applications where for example level of background music is auto matically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly Gate GAT and Ducking DUK para
393. silence between each track of the CD or if you want to write a single song divided into multiple tracks on the CD 1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track is selected for the stereo track of the song s you want to write 2 If you want to divide the song into CD tracks at the marker locations specified within the song check that markers have been set at the appropriate locations 3 Repeatedly press the CD key or hold down the CD key and use the CURSOR V V keys to access the CD WRITE page of the CD screen TRACE RT oHCE 1 DISC AT ONCE SETTING AW1600 Owner s Manual 4 Move the cursor to DISC AT ONCE and press the ENTER key The following screen will appear CO HRITE EY Disc p nHCE EXECUTE E CD Song list This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that will be written to the CD R RW media The line enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for operations If no songs have been registered this will indicate NO TRACK 2 MARKER button For each stereo track this enables or disables the markers that have been set within that song When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the start pint end point and markers within the currently selected stereo track will be enabled A flag icon will appear at the left of the list If markers are enabled for a stereo track a track number will be written to the CD at the location of ea
394. smitting and receiving devices Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and receiving devices Have the appropriate settings been made in the UTILITY screen MIDI 1 2 pages Select the connector and port to be used MIDI connector USB connector port 1 2 in the MIDI 1 page sa scene assigned to the program change number being transmitted f a USB connection is being used is the required USB MIDI driver properly installed on your computer E MTC messages are not transmitted In the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page has the MTC button been turned on Is MIC SYNC set to MASTER E The AW1600 does not synchronize to incoming MTC messages Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector n the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page has MTC MODE been set to SLAVE s the connector and port to be used MIDI connector USB connector port 1 2 selected in the UTILITY screen MIDI 1 page B MTC synchronization drifts Is a large amount of MIDI data notes etc being received together with the MTC messages e Does the frame rate match between the AW 1600 and the external device In the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page the OFST offset may have been set f jumps occur in the synchronized time change the AV RG setting in the UTILITY screen MIDI 2 page and try again E MMC messages is not transmitted Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector n the UTILITY screen MIDI 1 page has MMC
395. sponding mea sure and pad track QUICK LOOP SAMPLER CAHCEL EHEC 4 Press the pad a second time to turn the event off The symbol at the corresponding grid point will disap pear blank If a previously recorded pad event exists at that point however pressing the pad will sequen tially select O Blank 5 When you have finished editing move the cursor to EXEC and press ENTER The grid recording will be executed and the popup window will close Grid recording will not be executed until you move the cursor to the EXEC button and press the ENTER key e If you edit a measure in which a pad event has already been recorded the results may not always be shown correctly on the display Importing from an audio CD WAY file to a pad Importing from an audio CD WAV file to a pad Here s how you can import CD audio data CD DA or a WAV file from a CD ROM CD R into a sample bank for pads 1 4 1 Switch the internal settings of the AW1600 to enable digital recording For details on digital recording settings refer to page 168 2 Insert a CD into the CD RW drive You can load audio data CD DA or WAV files from the following types of media e Audio data CD DA Audio CD CD Extra only the first session of CD DA Mixed Mode CD only CD DA data of the second and later tracks WAV files e 509660 Level 1 format CD ROM CD R CD RW Mixed Mode CD The directory name and file name cann
396. strumental performances Signal flow during bouncing Recorder section STEREO AUX OUT MONITOR OUT i d Track 10 Track Stereo channels output channel 9 10 Hop God 15 16 er ux Mixer section x Q O z 3 RV 2 e o e c 5 O o O O D A St O 5 o The Pitch Fix function can be used to edit and correct the pitch and other properties of vocal tracks Pitch Fix is dif ferent from Bounce in that only one source and destina tion track can be selected and that no other effects can be used while the Pitch Fix function is active 82 l AW1600 Owners Manual Preparing for mixdown Preparing for mixdown To prepare for mixdown select the track channels that you will mix down and adjust the balance and tone of each track Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 In the Quick Navigate section repeatedly press the RECORD key or hold down the RECORD key and use the CURSOR UH V keys to access the MIXDOWN page of the RECORD screen The MIXDOWN page is where you can perform mix down operations In this page you can select the chan nels that will be recorded via the stereo bus onto the stereo track 00 00 04 994 21265 4 4 AR HASTERING LIERARY qo Fl a FE F3 FH 1 REC button Puts the stereo track in record ready mode 2 SAFE button Defeats the record ready state of the stereo tra
397. t the sampling frequency 5 VARI PITCH knob Adjusts the sampling frequency of the current song in a range of 5 97 to 6 00 e Vari pitch is not available if DIGITAL IN PATCH is set to other than DISABLE or if you have selected MTC Slave in the MIDI 2 page of the UTILITY screen Digital input settings and Initializing the internal hard disk Overall settings for the AW1600 6 FORMAT button Formats initializes the internal hard disk When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the hard disk will be formatted During execution a popup window will indicate the progress When formatting has been completed the popup window will close automati cally NOTE P e Executing the Format operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk and the data cannot be recovered We recommend you to backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing the Format operation e You cannot abort the Format operation once it has been started e Never turn off or disconnect the power during formatting since this may damage the hard disk and cause malfunctions Overall settings for the AW1600 7 AUTO SAVE button Enables or disables the Auto Save function When the Auto Save function is enabled the current song state will be backed up to temporary memory when the following operation occurs If the power is accidentally turned off before the unit is properly shut down the song w
398. t Once 102 EAS NAG M RM NE 109 lte D 108 MethodS ananneennnnnennennennnnnnnn 102 SU e EE 110 Track At Once 102 AUDIO WRITE SPEED 103 AUTO PUNCH key 20 Auto punch in out 59 rehearse sees 60 AUTO SAVE button 169 AVRG Average 159 B BaCk D 152 balance EE 57 PAN BALANCE knob 94 Basic operation 24 Accessing a screen page channel 24 Editing a value in the display 2 Inputting Te XL osos abditus 25 Switching a button on off 25 Using the Selected Channel section 26 Viewing the display 24 Block ge Ee eu BE 227 Seite 81 Convenient functions 92 bounce recording 88 BP EE 124 buck up Responsibility occurri emn 9 Bus terminology suus 16 BUS e le Le ecreis 41 CANCEL key 20 CD key eeeeeeeeenn 18 CD PLAY button iere iris 110 CD Play function 110 CD R RW drive Handling the media 5 CD ROM included with the AW10600 209 CD RW drive 10 23 Access indicator 23 Basic settings 103 Disc At Once 102
399. t and processing in computerbased applications and backup song files can be stored on the computer s memory media AW1600 terminology Recorder section E Iracks A location where data is recorded is called a track The AW 1600 s recorder section uses the following types of track Audio tracks The physical tracks used to record and play back audio data are called audio tracks or simply tracks The AW 1600 has sixteen audio tracks You can record eight tracks simultaneously and play back 16 tracks simulta neously 16 bit songs Stereo track Independently from audio tracks 1 16 the AW1600 has a stereo track that records and plays a stereo audio signal The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown track for recording the final mix Virtual tracks Each audio track 1 16 and the stereo track consists of eight tracks Each of these eight tracks is called a virtual track For the audio tracks and the stereo track only one virtual track can be recorded or played at any time How ever you can switch virtual tracks to continue recording other takes while preserving the previously recorded con tent The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1 16 and the vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1 8 The shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently selected for recording or playback Audio tracks
400. t channel will not be heard during playback ll Recorded sound is not output Has audio data been recorded on the recorder s the virtual track set to the track that was recorded A recorded region shorter than 10 msec will not be played back Tracks 1 16 will not play back if the AW1600 is in Stereo Track Sound Clip or Audio CD playback mode E Can t play back the STEREO track s the stereo track turned on in the MONITOR screen ST TRACK page E Metronome cannot be heard The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONI TOR OUT and headphones e The metronome will not sound while the recorder is stopped n Sound Clip mode the metronome will sound only dur ing recording Can t record something is wrong with the recorded sound E Can t record s there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk You can check the remaining recordable time by setting the counter display to REMAIN in the SONG screen SETUP page The song may be protected The stereo track may be in playback mode Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder Check the recording source and recording destination in the QUICK NAVIGATE page RECORD screen DIGITAL REC may have been turned OFF in the UTIL ITY screen D IN HDD page Please read and understand the copyright warning p 6 before using digital input signals E Can t record on the STEREO track e t is not possible to record on the STER
401. t point move the cursor to the START button and press the ENTER key The current location will be registered as the Start point 3 In the same way stop at the location that you want to specify as the End point move the cursor to the END button and press the ENTER key Recording playing a sound clip 4 Stop playback move the cursor to the CLIP button and press the ENTER key The CLIP button will turn on and the specified Start point and End point will be enabled NOTE e The START button END button and CLIP button are disabled while the sound clip is playing e The region of data between the specified Start point and End point can be copied to an audio track of the Hecorder section by using the EDIT screen COPY command gt p 132 5 To exit the CLIP screen press the SOUND CLIP key A popup window will ask you for confirmation Move the cursor to the OK button to exit the CLIP screen or to the CANCEL button to cancel and press the ENTER key When you exit the CLIP screen you will return to the TRACK screen VIEW page However you can press the SOUND CLIP key at any time to play back the previously recorded content or record a new perfor mance NOTE P e When you record a sound clip the previous recording will be lost Please be aware that the Undo function cannot be used to recover a deleted sound clip Even if you save the song immediately prior to recording a new sound clip the previous
402. t reverb spreed DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV SYM 0 100 Reverb and symphonic balance 096 symphonic 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E REV SYMPHO Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 0 symphonic reverb 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds gt RS O D 2 e x 196 l AW1600 Owner s Manual Effects Parameters E REV PAN Parameter Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0
403. t the channel fader for the source track to an appropriate level while listening to play back of the song NOTE e The fader of the destination track the track to which the pro cessed vocal track will be recorded has no effect on the recorded signal The source track fader determines the final balance so set it with care e When Auto Punch in out is engaged you can monitor the source track channels during playback even when not record ing Q Move the cursor to RATE and use the DATA JOG dial to increase the pitch cor rection level while listening to song play back The pitch of notes in the source vocal track will be corrected to the pitch of the nearest note RECORD track i 6 000000000 2 1ze 2 4 4 00I DIRECT J3PiTEH FIH ERIT CTRL PANEL a lte IA tp T vTR THRE MORMAL LP cea KR EL o taal IEEE En HIRDOHH E NOTE e If you know the which notes should and should not be used for correction you can turn them on or off via the graphic key board or change the CTRL mode as required and turn notes on or off via the corresponding method 1 Set the sound and pitch parameters as required while listening to song playback If you want to change the key of a vocal track set the PITCH parameter If you want to create a chorus part set the CTRL parameter to NOTE e While making the required correction setting you can select the BYPASS mode to monitor the pre correction display s
404. t the signal that is recorded on the track AW1600 Owners Manual 57 Overdubbing Overdubbing Now you can overdub onto the track that you selected as the recording destination 1 In the Work Navigate section repeatedly 4 While monitoring the previously recorded press the TRACK key or hold down the tracks play the instrument that you want to TRACK key and use the CURSOR WT overdub keys to access the VIEW page D To stop recording press the STOP W key zrace Spa The UNDO REDO key in the data entry control STRACK HUTE K rm Cu TR81 11 Se section will light 6 To listen to the recorded performance from the beginning press the RTZ I key to return the counter display to zero and press the PLAY P key 2 Move the cursor to the metronome button and press the ENTER key to switch the setting on or off as desired e f you recorded from the middle of the song you can press the You can perform overdubbing whether the metronome IN key to move to the location at which you began recording O is on or off lt z If you are satisfied with the recorded perfor SG 3 Inthe transport section hold down the REC 7 mance save the song For details on sav 2 0 key and press the PLAY b gt key Ing gt p 63 e e The metronome will begin sounding and the counter If you decide to re do the recording press the UNDO display will advance REDO key to cancel the recording and r
405. tap delay L C R Echo Chorus ECHO E Modulation type Effects CHORUS Stereo delay with additional parameters for more detailed control The signal can be fed back from left to right and right to left Description Three phase stereo chorus Flange FLANGE The well known flanging effect Symphonic SYMPHONIC A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than chorus Phaser PHASER Stereo phaser with 2 16 stages of phase shift Auto Pan AUTO PAN An effect which cyclically moves the sound between left and right Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo HQ Pitch HQ PITCH Effect 2 only Only one note is pitch shifted but a stable effect is produced Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently Rotary ROTARY Simulation of a rotary speaker Ring Mod RING MOD An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the frequency of the input On the AW1600 even the modulation frequency can be controlled by modulation Mod Filter Distortion MOD FILTER B Distortion type Effects DISTORTION An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the filter Description Distortion Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE AW1600 Owner s Manual Guitar Amp Simulator E Dynamic Effects Dyna Filter DYNA FILT
406. ter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSHF 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 95 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AW1600 Owner s Manual 2 O C ef Q Q lt 191 Effects Parameters EH TREMOLO Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Modulation waveform WAVE Sine Tri Square LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz EQG 12 to 12 dB EQQ 10 0 10 HSHF 50 0 16 0 k Hz HSH G 12 to 12 dB MIX BAL 0 100 Parametric equalizer center frequency Parametric equalizer gain Parametric equalizer band width High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds E HQ PITCH Effect 2 only Range Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 MODE 1 10 MIX BAL 0 100 Parameter Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values fo
407. the SONG key and use the CURSOR A WT keys to access the LIST page SONG stereo Te DIETE seize 4 4 LI BENE prora IHF RT LS D Tel E LaPTIHZ J LonpD IER EK TEMPo 3 WELETE SAVE J BE Bosra GA OH Z4 zuurpunjd cor v J nen HIE Su 618 amp 1 EH 16 SONG stereo Te III 2126 5 4 4 EET BENE Ane O0 EBL e IHFORT mur OFTIHZ Loan RAIN PELETE SAVE IP ui n3 ERN CaFY KEISER KH5_Ballad Q lt A Q c o D 5 ie 3 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the screen and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song COHFIRHRTIGH Temm RE t a 4 Move the cursor to either YES if you want to save the current song or NO if you do not want to save the current song and press the ENTER key The song you selected will be loaded e f you select NO all changes you made after last saving the current song will be lost 64 AW1600 Owners Manual Chapter 7 Various types of playback This chapter explains how to use the locator and marker functions and vari ous other playback methods provided by the AW1600 Using the locator Locate points are locations you specify within a song in order to execute functions such as auto punch in out and A B repeat You can use this function to locate move the current location of the song to one of these points just by pressing a single key On the AW1600 you can use
408. the sound clip the location at which playback will begin The current location is shown in minutes seconds mil liseconds at the left 4 END button Specifies the current location as the end point of the sound clip the location at which playback will end The current location is shown in minutes seconds mil liseconds at the left 5 CLIP button When you turn this button on the START button 3 and END button settings will be enabled NOTE e Recording and playback in the Recorder section cannot be performed while the CLIP screen is displayed 2 If you want to use the metronome move the cursor to the metronome button and press the ENTER key The time signature and tempo used by the metronome are displayed above the metronome button 3 To change the tempo of the metronome move the cursor to the tempo value and turn the DATA JOG dial NOTE e The time signature of the metronome is determined by the tempo map setting immediately prior to accessing the CLIP screen Please be aware that the setting cannot be edited from this screen For details on tempo map settings gt p 149 36 AW1600 Owner s Manual 4 In the Transport section hold down the REC key and press the PLAY P key The metronome will begin sounding and the counter display will advance The counter in the CLIP screen always starts from 0 and indicates the current time in minutes seconds milliseconds This counter is sep
409. the MIDI channel that you selected The scene assigned to that program change number will be recalled e If you insert program changes into the appropriate locations of your sequencer track scenes will be recalled automatically as the AW1600 and your sequencer run in synchronization AW1600 Owner s Manual V E gt D O i Ben T X o Be e e co z lt x ab X T O E GA E 173 Remotely controlling a tone generator module Remotely controlling a tone generator module Here s how you can use the AW1600 s MIDI Remote function to remotely control a tone genera tor module T Connect the AW1600 to your tone generator 3 Turn the DATA JOG dial to select the pre module as shown in the following diagram set that you want to use For example if you select preset 06 XG 1 16 the Control changes AW 1600 s faders will control the volume of parts 1 gll un rem 16 of your XG tone generator and TRACK SEL keys 1 16 will control the on off status of parts 1 16 4 If necessary use the buttons in the CH area didi to select the MIDI channels to which the faders and TRACK SEL keys will corre 2 Use the Work Navigate section REMOTE spend key to access the PRESET page of the The buttons in the CH area select the combination of REMOTE screen MIDI channels that are assigned to the faders and TRACK SEL keys For the combination of MIDI channels used when each button is
410. the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is deter mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter Ratio controls the amount of expansion the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 1 2 ratio for example a 5 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level For a 1 5 ratio a 2 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is expanded almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the expander s output signal level Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Release determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold Dynamics Parameters Bl Compander Output Level 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level A compander is a compressor expander a combination of signal compression and expansion The compander attenu ates the input signal above the threshold as w
411. the following steps If you want to hear the result that was recorded on the digital recorder lower the STEREO fader to the position and use the UTILITY key to access the D IN HDD page of the UTILITY screen EN DE 000 2128 6 a a LI H HIDI US DIGITAL IH FATCH VARI PITCH INT HDD HIDI 2 DISRELE FORMAT OSC SE 00 00 AUT SAVE DH HOD l FREFER WI ATT dp USE DIGITAL REC OFFS 8 Move the cursor to the DIGITAL REC ON OFF button and press the ENTER key A message will ask you to confirm your observance of copyright laws If you accept the conditions described in Copyright Notice gt p 6 move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The DIGITAL REC ON OFF button will be switched ON and digital audio data input will be enabled Q Move the cursor to the DIGITAL PATCH IN field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select STEREO BUS as the destination for the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack With this setting the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be connected directly to the ste reo bus e Please note that the EQ and dynamics settings you made for the stereo output channel during mixdown are still valid at this point If necessary turn off EQ and dynamics 1 Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion and play back your digital recorder Recording audio data from a digital recorder Here s how the signal from a
412. the popup window will move more widely However you will not yet hear anything from your monitor system For the best audio quality adjust the level as high as possible without allowing the meter to clip when the loudest volume occurs 4 While you play your instrument raise the E ee Je H STEREO fader to the MV 0 dB position T ES m The LR meters at the right CR 5 zz Ap of the screen will now move As you turn the MONITOR PHONES knob toward the right you should begin to hear sound from your monitor system e f you still do not hear sound after raising the STEREO fader check the INPUT SETTING popup window to make sure that the stereo bus assign switch is turned on and that the INPUT LEVEL knob value has not been set below 0 0 aB 5 To exit the INPUT SETTING popup window move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key You will return to the previous screen e The level settings described above are the basic settings for any type of recording not just for a sound clip By using the GAIN knob to raise the level as far as possible without allow ing distortion to occur you can ensure that the input signal is converted into digital form with the highest possible quality before it is input to the mixer section If the GAIN knob is not raised sufficiently you may not be taking full advantage of the available dynamic range of the mixer section and recorder section When the input
413. the signal of each channel between normal and reversed Move the cursor to this location and press the ENTER key to switch between N Normal and R Reverse phase 3 PAN Adjusts the pan the left right position when the signal is sent to the stereo bus or L R bus of each channel NOTE e If the page is different than shown above make sure that you have selected track channels as the object of operations This is indicated in the upper left of the screen If input chan nels and pad channels are selected press any one of the TRACK SEL keys e Even if channels are paired their phase and pan are not linked Set these parameters individually for each channel AW1600 Owner s Manual 6 Move the cursor to the PAN knob of each track channel and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the pan setting e Another way of adjusting the pan is to press a TRACK SEL key to select a track channel and then turn the PAN BAL knob in the Selected Channel section This method is conve nient when you want to adjust the pan without displaying a dif ferent screen If you use the PAN BAL knob to adjust the pan of track chan nels 9 10 15 16 moving the knob will initially cause only the pan value of one side to change When that pan value reaches the far right or left the other pan value will then begin to change 7 Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion 8 While you play back the song raise the track chan
414. this connector port e MIDI MIDI OUT THRU connector USB T uoces USB connector output port 1 s USB2 USB connector output port 2 iL EE Disabled 3 THRU Selects the THRU input output connector port separately from the IN PORT and OUT PORT listed left When this setting is enabled no internally generated AW 1600 MIDI data 1s transmitted e MIDI lt gt USB 1 enun MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN connector are retransmitted via USB output port 1 and MIDI messages received via USB connector input port 1 are retransmitted via the MIDI OUT THRU connector e MIDI lt gt USB 2 MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN connector are retransmitted via USB output port 2 and MIDI messages received via USB connector input port 2 are retransmitted via the MIDI OUT THRU connector e USB 1 lt USB 2 m MIDI messages received via the USB con nector input port 1 are retransmitted via USB output port 2 and MIDI messages received via USB connector input port 2 are retrans mitted via the USB connector output port 1 e ee No THRU settings e t may be necessary to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver in order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication on com puters gt p 209 Setting MIDI messages In the MIDI 2 page of the UTILITY screen you can make various MIDI related settings such as selecting the MIDI messages that will be output from the MIDI OUT
415. this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure STATUS 11111011 FB Continue 5 10 STOP FC Transmission If MIDI CLK is ON this message is transmitted when the recorder stops STATUS 11111100 FC Stop 5 11 ACTIVE SENSING FE Reception Once this message is received subsequent failure to receive any mes sage for a period of 300 ms will cause Running Status to be cleared and MIDI communications to be initialized STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing 5 12 RESET FF Reception When a Reset message is received MIDI communications will be initialized by clearing Running Status etc STATUS 11111111 FF Reset MIDI data format 5 13 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE FO F7 5 13 1 MMC 5 13 1 1 MMC STOP Transmission When the STOP key is pressed this message is transmitted with a device number of 7F Reception If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will stop when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd da Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000001 01 Stop MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 2 MMC PLAY Reception If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin p
416. tically converted to 24 bit format that can be edited using most waveform editor soft ware Do not change the names of any folders files other than those in the Transport folder Any folder file names that have been added or changed outside the Transport folder from the com puter will be automatically deleted Be especially careful not to change a song folder or song file name e Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied H Once the required WAV file transfer and or editing operations have been finished be sure the unmount the AW1600 hard disk from your computer after closing all AW1600 windows In the case of Windows XP Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the task bar and remove the corresponding two USB mass storage devices Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device Drives I Hi e f an error message appears execute Safely Remove Hard ware one or two more times You should then be able to remove the device without seeing an error message In the case of Mac OSX Drag the AW 1600 1 and AW 1600 2 icons from the desktop to the trash Q In the AW1600 screen move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming whether the AW 1600 has been safely removed from the computer will appear COHFIRHRTIGEH Device Removed on PC 10 To return to the normal mode move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing WAV F
417. ting the more slowly pitch changes are made resulting in more abrupt step like pitch changes RATE This determines the speed resolution for pitch change The faster the setting the more quickly the pitch is changed increasing the apparent effectiveness of the pitch change function When this is set to 000 there is no pitch change 9 FORMANT This determines the vocal quality character of the pitch adjusted signal Positive values result in a higher voice quality and negative values result in a lower voice quality PITCH This determines the octave setting of the pitch adjusted signal The range is from 2 to 2 octaves in semitone steps The integer and fraction segments of the value are set separately 0 Keyboard The graphic keyboard can be used to specify notes when the CTRL parameter is set to PANEL To turn a note on or off move the cursor to the desired note and press ENTER 6 Raise the STEREO fader and the fader of the destination track channel to about 0dB on the scale 7 Press the RTZ I key to rewind the song to the beginning then press the PLAY Il key while holding the REC key Song playback will begin and the processed data will be recorded to the destination track If the CTRL mode is set to SCALE or NOTE and you have an external MIDI keyboard connected use the keyboard to play the required harmony notes for the chorus parts while listening to the vocal track 8 Se
418. tion e When turning on the AC power in your audio system always turn on the power amplifier LAST to avoid speaker damage When turning the power off the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device vents disc slots etc Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects paper plastic metal etc into any gaps or openings on the device vents disc slots etc If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it and avoid use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors XLR type connectors are wired as follows IEC60268 standard pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the device is not in use Even when the power switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the device at the minimum level When you are not using the device for
419. tion is on pressing the PLAY B key will immediately resume repeat play back regardless of the current position 5 To cancel repeat playback press the REPEAT key The REPEAT key will go dark and the A B Repeat function will be cancelled If you cancel the A B Repeat function during repeat playback normal play back will occur from that point e f you perform a recording operation while the A B Repeat function is on the A B Repeat function will be temporarily dis abled Finding a location while you listen to the sound the Nudge function Finding a location while you listen to the sound the Nudge function Nudge is a function that repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location By using the Nudge function you can find a precise location while listening to the playback This is useful when you need to specify a location precisely such as when specifying the auto punch in out points or when editing the contents of a track Locate to the vicinity of the point you want to find 2 With the transport stopped press the JOG ON key The JOG ON key will light and the Nudge function will be turned on A fixed region referred to as the nudge time starting at the current location will play repeatedly 3 To move the current location forward turn the DATA JOG dial toward the right To move the current location backward turn the DATA JOG dial toward the left If time displ
420. tions HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY ER 0 100 Delay and early reflections balance 0 early reflections 100 delay MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 2 O Q Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 197 Effects Parameters E DELAY ER Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio TYPE S Hall L Hall Random Type of early reflection simulation Revers Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections HPF Thru 21 2 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and early reflected delay balance 0 early reflected delay 100 delay MIX BAL 0 100 96 Mix balance of the ef
421. to 16 tracks A maximum of eight 24 bit song tracks can be recorded or played simultaneously gt p 143 0 Versatile editing functionality Audio data recorded on a track can be copied moved or edited using a variety of commands You can make detailed edits or even make radical changes to the struc ture of the song by using the same riff repeatedly or increasing the number of choruses Time Compression lets you compress or expand the time axis of the audio data in a range of 50 200 Pitch Change lets you modify the pitch in a range of one octave upward or downward You can use the Undo func tion to reverse the results of as many as the last fifteen editing operations A variety of Locate methods and auto punch in out Seven locate points start end relative zero A B in out and 99 markers can be assigned at any desired point in the song for quick access via Locate operations Auto punch in out and A B repeat playback functions are also pro vided The AW1600 also has a metronome that follows the tempo map Sound Clip function The Sound Clip function lets you record and play back an input signal without affecting the recorder tracks You can use this as a sketch for your ideas for a song or arrange ment 0 Vocal Editing with Pitch Fix A Pitch Fix function is provided to allow precise adjust ment of the pitch of a vocal track as well as the generation of chorus parts from a main vocal line This feature c
422. to the ENABLE DISABLE button and press the ENTER key The symbol at the right will change to the 6 symbol indicating that this data has been selected for restor ing If you turn on the ALL button and then move the cur sor to the ENABLE DISABLE button and press the ENTER key all data shown in the list will be selected in one step NOTE e The maximum number of songs or sample libraries that can be displayed is 100 6 If you want to restore the system data move the cursor to the SYSTEM button and press the ENTER key The button will be turned on and the system data will be selected for restoring 7 To execute the restore operation move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion COHFIRHRTIGH Restore selected Data Saye Current Sond Restoring songs or sample libraries Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations H Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to execute the restore operation or to the CANCEL button if you decide not to restore and press the ENTER key The current song will be saved automatically and the restore operation will begin A popup window will indicate the progress of the restore operation When the operation is finished you will return to step 3 If the backup occupied more than one volume of CD R RW media a message of Exchange Next Media XXX where XXX is a number wil
423. to the stereo bus routed through the stereo output channel and sent from the STE HEO AUX OUT jacks or the MONITOR OUT jacks Signal flow during song playback Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 Track 14 Track 15 Track 16 E o t D 3 5 e t O t 2 o o D 3 o ES e JJ D O o Q D g D O E o gt PHONES oooo STEREO AUX OUT MONITOR OU UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV Stereo output channel Track channels 11 12 13 14 15 16 STEREO Mixer section Track channels 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 are directly controlled by the faders and TRACK SELECT keys of the panel Here s how you can adjust the mix level of each track channel and switch it on off while the song plays back 30 ll AW1600 Owner s Manual Press the RTZ a key The demo song will be rewound to the beginning 2 Press the PLAY b gt button The demo song will begin playing 3 While listening to the demo song try oper ating faders 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 Notice that the level of the corresponding track will change Operating the STEREO fader will change the overall level of the song 4 To mute the playback of a specific track access RECORD MONITOR the MONITOR screen fa in ON OFF page either by m repeatedly pressing the MONITOR key or by holding down the MONIT
424. top 0 CC1611 Play or Stop Space Control Change gt Rewind Top CC 1611 Channel Forward Bottom CC 16 11 TTE Fast Rewind Top Data 2 Fast Forward Bottom 9 Rewind 1 frame NENNEN Forward 1 frame Assignments Rewind by format value Forward by format value Shuttle Rewind Shuttle Forward Scrub Rewind Scrub Forward Scrub by MIDI Value 2 L Play from Beginning Return ve Play from previous Bar Learn New Assignment Please note that all the previously specified key com mands will be initialized If you do not want to change your existing user key command settings you can manu ally make the MIDI channel and CC settings shown above 2 O o Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual f 213 About the CD ROM included with the AW1600 Setting Pro Tools remote control You can remotely control the Pro Tools software from the AW 1600 No special setting file is required Use the fol lowing procedure to make settings 1 Inthe menu bar select Setup Peripherals 2 The Peripherals window will open Click the MIDI Controllers button In the MIDI Controllers window make the following settings In the Receive From field and the Send To field specify the MIDI device you are using Receive From Send To Your MIDI input Your MIDI output device device This completes preparations for using the AW 1600 s MIDI Remote function to control the Pro Tools softwar
425. trol Command mcc sub id 00000110 04 Fast Forward MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 2s O ef Q Q lt AW1600 Owner s Manual 217 MIDI data format gt o O D 2 2 x 218 5 13 1 5 MMC REWIND lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the REWIND key is pressed lt Reception gt If the AW1600 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin rewind when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call STATUS ID No Device ID Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000101 05 Rewind MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 6 MMC RECORD STROBE lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW 1600 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F If the transport is stopped then recording will begin If the transport is playing then punch in will occur 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd da Destination 00 7E 7F all call STATUS ID No Device ID Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000110 06 Record strobe EOX 11110111 r7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 7 MMC RECORD EXIT lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW 1600 is operating as an MMC Slave and the devi
426. trol an external MIDI device from the AW1600 e SLAVE button If this button is on the AW1600 will be the MTC slave and will follow MMC commands that it receives at the MIDI IN or USB connector Use this setting when you want to remotely control the transport of the AW1600 from an external MIDI device 3 DEV device number Specifies the MMC device number 1 127 that the AW 1600 will receive NOTE e The MMC device number is an identifying number used to distin guish devices that transmit and receive MMC commands When using MMC the AW1600 and the external MIDI device must be set to the same MMC device number e The MMC device number is displayed as a decimal number start ing from one Some devices display the MMC device number as a hexadecimal number starting from zero In this case the numbers will correspond as follows AW1600 display gt hexadecimal display 1 gt 00h 127 gt 7Eh e The AW1600 always transmits MMC commands using the All device number 7Fh in hexadecimal 44 MTC MODE Specifies how the AW1600 operate when synchronized with an external MIDI device using MTC MIDI Time Code e MASTER button If this button is on the AW1600 will be the MTC master When you operate the transport of the AW1600 MTC will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT THRU or USB connector Use this setting if you want to the external MIDI device to follow the AW1600 or if you are using the AW1600 by
427. ttons select whether the level meter in the NTER k me Page ana presse e KS ST TRACK page will indicate the pre fader level to turn the button on m M PRE or the post fader level POST This setting is The panel STEREO key will blink red This blinking shared with the BUS page of the VIEW screen indicates that the stereo track is in record ready mode 5 Level meter 3 Press the RTZ I key to rewind the song This indicates the output level of the stereo track Then hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY P key D Switch the ST TRACK ON OFF button ON When this button is on the stereo track output will be sent to a point directly before the STEREO fader and can be monitored from the STEREO AUX OUT m gt jacks or the MONITOR OUT jacks At this time the record ready status of all tracks will be cancelled The song will begin playing and the playback will be recorded on the stereo track e The data that is recorded here on the stereo track will be the data that is used to create an audio CD If you want to pre cisely specify the beginning or end of the song it is conve nient to use Auto Punch in out gt p 59 e Even while the stereo track is playing you can still monitor the signals from the input channels 4 When you reach the end of the song move the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen NOTE and press the ENTER key e EQ and dynamics processing are applied to the playback of A popup wi
428. u STEREO AUX OUT L R unbalanced phone Output Impedance 150 Q Nominal Load Impedance 10 kQ Nominal Output Level 10 dBV Maximum Output Level 4 dBV MONITOR OUT L R unbalanced phone Output Impedance 150 Q Nominal Load Impedance 10 kQ Nominal Output Level 10 dBV Maximum Output Level 4 dBV PHONES unbalanced TRS phone Nominal Load Impedance 8 40Q 25 mW 8 Q load 35 mW 40 Q load Maximum Output Level DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT coaxial 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms 0 dBV 1 Vrms Digital Mixing Functions Input Channels INPUT 1 8 Track 1 16 PAD 1 4 Attenuation Phase Normal Reverse Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Dynamics Pan Bus Assign STEREO BUS AUX EFF Internal Effect Return Channels Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Pan Bus Assign STEREO AUX Master Channels STEREO L R Attenuation Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Dynamics Balance BUS L R AUX 1 2 EFF 1 2 Specifications B Recorder Section Overview Recording Resolution 16 bit 24 bit Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz Edit Functions Song Edit OPTIMIZE DELETE COPY IMPORT Track Edit ERASE DELETE INSERT COPY MOVE EXCHANGE TIME COMP EXPAND PITCH CHANGE EXPORT CD IMPORT WAV IMPORT Other Functions Locate Marker Locate RTZ A B LAST REC IN OUT Marker 1 99 Punch In Out Manual Auto Pitch Fix CD RW Drive Data Backup Audio CD Burning and Playback WAV File Import Audio CD Import E Quic
429. u hear no sound access the METER page of the VIEW screen and check whether the meter of the corresponding pad channel P1 P4 is moving gt p 93 e If the meter moves when you strike a pad make sure that the STEREO fader has not been lowered and that your monitor system is connected correctly and that its volume is set appropriately e f you hear no sound even after raising the STEREO fader access the INIT page of the MONITOR screen and press that pad This will initialize the pad channel so that it will produce sound gt p 94 6 To switch the sample bank for each pad repeatedly press the SAMPLE EDIT key to access the SETUP page of the SAMPLE screen SANPLE inr ey 10 00 00 000 2 12e6 6 474 0011 HAME TRIM SLICE EFH i EO c EO c EO c EO c H OHITOE TEHF ORMINAL LIERARY cp IWEJE AC MO REC 1 TR InF i z z AC HO REC 1 HAV InF 30 4 ar Ho REC 1 MEMORY D One shot loop mode An icon indicates whether the sample assigned to the pad is set to One Shot mode z or Loop mode dei 2 Pad number This indicates the pad number 1 4 3 Bank This selects the sample bank A D used by each pad The name of the sample assigned to that bank is dis played at the right e f no sample is assigned to the selected bank the sample name area will indicate NO REC e Sample banks recorded in and played back with a song are specified via the Tempo Map Check the Tempo Map s
430. u should normally record operations only for a single channel at a time unless your sequencer is able to record multiple MIDI channels simulta neously Switching AW1600 scenes from the workstation s sequencer Here s how you can transmit program changes from the built in sequencer of your workstation to switch scenes on the AW 1600 ll Assign scenes to program changes T In the Control section use the SCENE key to access the PC TABLE page of the SCENE screen This page lets you assign a scene number to each pro gram change SCEHE stenceo g 00 00 10 000 22 128 8 a a TOLL J PETALE li uu FoR SCENE Bazta Drums Off IHITIALIZE vc ect i on_A 1 List This lists the scenes of the current song The line enclosed by a dotted frame is the scene currently selected for operations 2 Program change number This indicates the program change number 001 128 Move the cursor to this number and turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list upward or downward 3 Scene Move the cursor to this area and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the corresponding program number 4 INITIALIZE button Returns the program change assignments to the initial state e With the initial settings program changes 1 96 correspond to scenes 1 96 and program changes 97 128 are set to NO ASSIGN no assignment 2 Move the cursor to the program change number and turn the
431. up window and check the loca tion by listening e You can also change the pointer position by using the locate points or markers that are registered in the song gt p 65 67 e The position displayed in the counter can be registered as a locate point or marker gt p 65 67 y When you have finished specifying the location move the cursor to the EXIT but ton and press the ENTER key You will return to the previous VIEW page and the location that you specified in the popup window will remain the current location As desired register the location as a locate point or marker Chapter 8 Using libraries and scene memories This chapter explains how to use libraries and scene memories About the libraries Memory areas that store settings for sections such as EQ dynamics and effects are called libraries By recalling loading data from a library you can instantly use the desired set of set tings Most types of library also let you store the current settings The AW1600 provides the fol lowing libraries Input channel library EQ dynamics and internal effect settings can be loaded from this library into the currently selected input channel This library is read only and cannot be used to store your own settings EQ library EQ settings can be loaded from this library into the cur rently selected channel Dynamics library Dynamics settings can be loaded from this library into the curre
432. urn the DATA JOG dial toward the left With the default EQ settings the LOW band is a shelv ing type The value field for the Q knob will indicate L SHL If you turn the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will change to a numerical value and will switch to the same boost cut type as the HI MID and LO MID bands If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will indicate HPF and the LOW band will function as a high pass filter If HPF is selected you can use the LOW band G knob to switch the high pass filter on off 6 To switch the HIGH band type turn the HIGH band Q knob all the way to the left With the default EQ settings the HIGH band is a shelving type The value field for the Q knob will indicate H SHL If you turn the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will change to a numerical value and will switch to the same boost cut type as the HI MID and LO MID bands If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will indicate LPF and the HIGH band will function as a low pass filter If LPF is selected you can use the HIGH band G knob to switch the low pass filter on off 7 To switch the EQ on off press the ENTER key In the EDIT page you can press the ENTER key to switch the EQ on off except when the cursor is located at the FLAT button ES e f the meter display clips because you bo
433. use the DATA JOG dial to set the nudge time You can set the nudge time in a range of 25 ms 800 ms Default 500 ms 7 To change the playback position nudge mode move the cursor to the NUDGE MODE button and press the ENTER key to switch between the following two nudge modes e AFTER Repeatedly play for the duration of the nudge time starting at the current location default e BEFORE Repeatedly play for the duration of the nudge time ending at the current location NUDGE MODE BEFORE NUDGE MODE AFTER Current location Current location 0 m f e You cannot change the nudge time or nudge mode while using the Nudge function You must turn off the Nudge func tion and change these settings while the JOG ON key is dark AW1600 Owner s Manual x O C O gt amp Q O GA Q gt rum Qo 2 O E gt 71 lt Q SCH O c o p lt O D LI O A 2 fo lt o Q Q A 72 Finding a location while you view the waveform Finding a location while you view the waveform The AW1600 lets you find a location while viewing the waveform of the sound recorded on the track Locate to the vicinity of the point you want to find 2 Repeatedly press the Work Navigate sec tion TRACK key or hold down the TRACK key and use the CURSOR A J keys to access the VIEW page of the TRACK screen qTRACK 1 HUTE ru TRAI AE THAME D D 4E el
434. used 3 1 12 MIDI Rx Ch This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for reception If this is set to ALL data of all MIDI channels will be received 3 1 13 Program Change Mode Enable disable reception and transmission If MIDI Rx Ch is set to ALL these messages will be received regardless of their MIDI chan nel 3 1 14 Control Change Mode Enable disable reception and transmission If this is enabled you can specify the correspondence between control numbers and operations of the mixer section Three modes are available for correspondence with control numbers For mode 1 transmission and reception will occur without regard to the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx Ch settings For modes 2 and 3 reception will occur without regard to MIDI channel if you set MIDI Rx Ch to ALL 4 MIDI format list 4 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Command Rx Tx function 8n NOTE OFF Rx Control the internal effect 9n NOTE ON Rx Control the internal effect Bn CONTROL CHANGE Rx Tx Edit parameters Cn PROGRAM CHANGE Rx Tx Switch scene memories 4 2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command Rx Tx function F1 MIDI TIME CODE Rx Tx F2 SONG POSITION POINTER Tx MTC transmission Song position transmission 4 3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command Rx Tx function F8 TIMING CLOCK TX MIDI Clock transmission FA START Tx Start command transmission FB CONTINUE Tx Continue command transmission FC STOP TX Stop command transmit FE ACTIVE SENSING Rx Check MIDI
435. using MMC you must set the AW1600 and the external MIDI device to the same MMC device num ber For details on the device numbers that your work station synth can use refer to its owner s manual D In the Work Navigate section use the SONG key to access the SETUP page of the SONG screen and select a frame rate in the TIME CODE BASE area SHG track 6 EL 000 2 1z5 6 aa TL LIST 3 CURRENTSOnHG JB Shuttle 173HE IHFORT amp BIT LHAME PROTECT s POINT COUNTER DISFLAY Bail e USECH GC REHAN IH TEHF MEE ioa 430 sHuTDHH 3 TIHE CODE BASE En e The frame rate you specify here will affect not only synchroni zation with the external device but also the time code that is displayed in the counter etc 6 Set your workstation synth to function as MMC master and MTC slave and set its MMC device number and MTC frame rate to the same settings as the AW1600 For details on how to make these settings refer to the manual for your workstation synth 7 Play back the sequencer of your worksta tion synth When you play back the sequencer of your worksta tion synth the corresponding MMC commands will be sent to the AW1600 and the AW1600 will begin run ning At the same time the AW 1600 will transmit MTC to your workstation synth and the sequencer will run in synchronization with it ES e You can synchronize using MIDI Clock and Start Stop Con tinue messages instead of using MTC and MM
436. volumes is incorrect Compare Error The data was not written correctly Corrupt File The file is corrupt Data Mismatch Found A data mismatch has been found in the song Data Too Long No more data can be written because the capacity of the CD has been exceeded End of Archive File Not Found The end of the backup file cannot be located End Range Over The operation could not be executed since the end of the song would be later than 24 hours Erase CD RW Media Is it OK to erase the CD RW media File in Use Can t save erase or edit the title because the file is in use File List Full The file list is full and cannot be appended File Name Already Exists The specified file name already exists Use a different file name File Number Full No more songs can be created or restored since this would exceed the maximum number of files File Size Exceeds Limit The file is too large to be saved HD Full The internal hard disk is full and can accept no more data HD Status is Out Of Range The hard disk reliability status the number of past errors has exceeded the threshold Back up your data and have the hard disk replaced as soon as possible HDD Error A problem occurred with the internal hard disk Illegal Unsupported Media An unrecognized or unsupported medium has been inserted Insert Next Media Insert me
437. wer is STANDBY e When the disc is being accessed data is being read written or erased While in CD PLAY mode N CAUTION e This removal method is for use in emergencies such as when you cannot remove the disc due to a malfunction of the disc tray or a power failure Do not use this method unnecessarily since doing so will damage the CD RW drive Connecting the AC adaptor When connecting the included AC adaptor PA 300 you must first connect it to the DC IN jack of the AW 1600 and then to the AC wall outlet After connecting the AC adap tor to the AW 1600 wrap the cable around the hook as shown in the diagram This will prevent the cable from being accidentally pulled out causing the AW 1600 to unexpectedly lose power Connecting the AC adaptor e Turning the power on off Ben T V 2 O gt D O eo Turning the power on off You must use the following procedure to switch the power of the AW1600 between ON and STANDB Y If you fail to follow this procedure the internal hard disk or your exter nal monitor system may be damaged B Turning the power on In a system that includes the AW10600 turn the power of each device on in the following order 1 External devices such as audio sources and effect processors connected to the input output jacks of the AW1600 2 The AW1600 itself 3 The monitor system connected to the AW1600 s out put jacks N CAUTION e Before you tu
438. ximate location of the currently set locate points and markers If the current track is selected as the virtual track to be edited the approximate range s of recorded data will also be displayed 3 Parameters Sets various parameters track virtual track number editing region etc required in order to execute the command The type of parameters and the ranges of the settings will depend on the command that is selected 4 EXEC button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to execute the editing command N Repeatedly press the EDIT key or hold down the EDIT key and use the CURSOR V L keys to select the desired editing command The EDIT screen is divided into pages for each editing command For example a screen like the one shown below will appear if you choose the ERASE com mand H ikoo0 08 000 00 00 24 000 nia K ERASE AW1600 Owner s Manual Bl Select the track s to edit After you choose an editing command the next step 1s to specify the track s that will be edited 3 To select the track for editing move the cur sor to the TR Track field in the lower left of the EDIT screen and turn the DATA JOG dial For any command the TR Track field will appear in the lower left of the screen allowing you to select the track s Track number TE v 1 DfRnn ng nnn rns FEC 00 00 24 000 ps ERASE In the TR field you can select the following types
439. y for any damages direct or consequential that may result from the use of the above CD RW drive To insert a disc into the CD RW drive press the eject switch The disc tray will open Place the disc on the tray and gently push the disc tray in e The disc tray is ejected electrically If the disc tray is not ejected when you press the eject switch turn on the power of the AW1600 and press the eject switch once again IL 72 sel Eject hole Eject switch AW1600 Owner s Manual About the built in CD RW drive 1 Never touch the objective lens 2 Be careful that the objective lens does not become dusty or dirty 3 If the objective lens becomes dusty use a commer cially available blower etc to blow the dust off with clean air 4 Since the inside of the drive contains powerful mag netic circuitry do not allow any magnetic material to come near the drive In particular any metallic frag ments screws or pins that enter the drive mechanism will cause operation to fail Using the CD RW drive E Removing a CD in an emergency If you are unable to remove the disc by pressing the eject switch insert a wire of less than 2 mm diameter such as a straightened paper clip into the eject hole and push gen tly However pressing the eject switch will not eject the disc when the AW1600 is in the following states so do not use this method in such cases e When the AW1600 s po
440. y once again If the effect is internally connected to the mixer sec tion via send return you can repeatedly press the CURSOR key to access the mix parameters of the return channel The following pages are the same for all effect types AW1600 Owner s Manual TVvFE STEREO DEL od zl EFFZZEHD AUB ISEHO X mHlUmszzEHD UUU 00 dB oo dB oo dB o EFF HU Aue o d l H LE i EFF2SEND Adjusts the level at which the signal is sent from the return channel to the other internal effect e You cannot send the signal from return channel 1 to insert effect 1 since this would mean sending the signal back to the same effect itself For this reason the EDIT page of the EFF1 screen has no send level to effect 1 For the same rea son the EDIT page of the EFF2 screen has no send level to effect 2 2 AUX1SEND 3 AUX2SEND These adjust the send level of the signal that is sent from the return channel to AUX buses 1 2 4 EFF2 PRE POST Switches the signal that is sent from the return channel to the other effect bus between pre fader and post fader 5 AUX1 PRE POST 6 AUX2 PRE POST These switch the signals that are sent from the return channel to AUX buses 1 2 between pre fader and post fader TYFE STEREO DELAY G fea HIGH FREG BO dE 1 amp 3 BkHz A SHELF o Eg H HID FREG a m x Ga AdE JakHz Pe LE 4 C EQ HIGH GAIN 2 EQ HIGH FREQ 3 EQ HIGH Q 4 EQ H MID GAIN
441. ys of the top panel and use them to remotely control a MIDI device or computer program e Example of using the AW1600 as a physical con troller for a MIDI sound module Control changes System exclusive messages etc gt Cf 1 MIDI OUT THRU MIDI IN connector or Control changes System exclusive messages etc Dm AW1600 External MIDI device e g computer USB cable AW1600 Owner s Manual 157 v Cc 9 O c gt w gt z gt O Basic MIDI Settings Setting MIDI messages Basic MIDI Settings The UTILITY screen MIDI 1 page lets you specify the connector port to be used for MIDI mes sage transmission and reception to and from external MIDI devices To access this page repeatedly press the Work Navigation section UTILITY key or hold down the UTILITY key and use the CURSOR A l Y keys JT zrEREo gg 00 00 00 000 2122 5 da DOLL IH FORT HIDI our FORT HIDI ole ig FREFER USE This page contains the following items CD IN PORT Selects the input connector port to be used for MIDI mes sage reception e MIDI MIDI IN connector USB 1 cte USB connector input port 1 USB 2 USB connector input port 2 uL c Disabled 2 OUT PORT Selects the output connector port to be used for MIDI transmission MIDI data internally generated by the AW 1600 is transmitted via
442. ys to access the FADER page of the VIEW screen In the FADER page of the VIEW screen you can use on screen faders to adjust the faders input level of each channel JHPUT 4 ig 00 00 00 000 J zione ii ET l Jon een onp enen onon on TE FUT Te H SR 0 ON OFF buttons These buttons switch each channel on off 2 Faders These faders adjust the input level of each channel 6 While you play back the song move the cursor to the on screen faders and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the level of the input channels pad channels that you want to use 7 If necessary adjust EQ dynamics and the send level to the internal effects for each input channel or pad channel Now you have completed the preparations for adding input channel or pad channel signals to the mixdown Record the mixdown on the stereo channel as described in Recording on the stereo track gt p 87 Using meters to check the level of each channel During mixdown or bouncing you can watch meters that indicate the input levels in a single screen To do so repeatedly press the Selected Channel section VIEW key or hold down the VIEW key and use the CURSOR A l V keys to access the METER page of the VIEW screen In the METER page the display will change depending on the channel that is currently selected shown in the upper left of the screen Press an INPUT SEL key to view the meters for the input channels pad channels or pr

Manual - The DijonStock AW16G digital recording support forum

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents